Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080209016 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POLICY-BASED PROVISIONING IN A VIRTUALIZED SERVICE DELIVERY ENVIRONMENT - In a distributed computing network having computers interconnected with each other, a method and apparatus of providing policy based provisioning of middleware components to provide a solution for a service. With this invention, the middleware components that are necessary to provide the solution are determined. Then, the configurations of the computers are determined so as to satisfy a selected configuration policy for a selected solution. Finally, the necessary middleware components are installed on the configured computers so that the solution can be provided. Some of the selected configuration policies are: maximization of server utilization policy, provisioning of software components requiring external access based on availability of external resources, and minimization of total time to install said determined components. The progress of installation of the middleware components can also be monitored to make any necessary adjustments in the configuration of the virtual machines so that the selected configuration policy can be satisfied. | 08-28-2008 |
20080209017 | MANAGEMENT OF BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION IN A NETWORK SERVER - A method and system for operating a network server to discourage inappropriate use are disclosed. A server is connected to a plurality of connected client devices, and is configured to transfer information between any selected one of the client devices and a memory for static storage of information. The method comprises the steps of receiving a request to transfer a file between the memory and one of the plurality of client devices, removing a packet comprising a defined number of information bits from the file, transferring the packet between the memory and the client device per the request, then pausing for a defined delay period, and repeating the removing, transferring, and pausing steps in order until all of the file has been transferred. Preferably, the method further comprises increasing the defined delay period after each execution of a packet transfer cycle, thereby discouraging the transfer of unacceptably large files. The delay period may be initiated, and the amount of increase or other adjustment to the delay period during the transfer cycle may be controlled, by selected a predetermined value from a table, or by calculating a value based on variable input parameters such as the file size, server load, network response time, and number of transfer requests from the client device within a defined prior period. The number of information bits in the packet may similarly be initiated, and adjusted during the transfer cycle. The system comprises the server having an application for performing the method according to the invention. | 08-28-2008 |
20080215713 | System and Method for Automatically Enforcing Change Control in Operations Performed by Operational Management Products - A system and method for enforcing change control in operations performed by operational management products (OMPs) are provided. The system and method automate the checking of a request-for-change (RFC) state by an OMP when the OMP is installed in an environment where a change management database (CMDB) has been installed and certain resources or operations have been placed under strict change control. The OMPs of the illustrative embodiments require an RFC identifier to be specified when a change operation of the OMP is invoked. The RFC identifier is used by the OMP to access a service management system so that the OMP may determine if the RFC identifier is valid, IT resources are in the correct state, and the change is scheduled to be performed at the current time. If these checks are passed, then the change operation associated with the RFC is permitted to occur. | 09-04-2008 |
20080215714 | REDUNDANCY SWITCHING METHOD - A service interruption time is shortened in redundancy switching, thereby to render a vocal service of good quality, in addition to a data service of good quality by a server. | 09-04-2008 |
20080215715 | Recording medium storing information distribution program, information distribution apparatus, and information distribution method - Information may be distributed to a plurality of communication devices connected to a network by creating a distribution route including a plurality of levels by assigning a plurality of following level stations (0-level to n-level stations) to the distribution route, distributing information from one of the communication devices as an m-level station in a lower level to one of the communication devices as an (m+1)-level station in a level lower than the lower level in which the m-level station is present using the distribution route, monitoring a distribution status of the information distributed, and changing the distribution route based on the distribution status. | 09-04-2008 |
20080228903 | System and method of serving advertisements for web applications - An improved system and method for supporting web system services is provided for storing data and context of client applications on the web. A client application may include a web system services interface for invoking web system services to support web applications to operate over the web using different devices that may store data and context of web applications as a web application document onto a web server. A web application document may be represented by components that may include view information, content, and context information. The application may also include a web system services user interface for providing a graphical user interface for a user to invoke web system services that may include a new document system service, a store document system service, and a restore document system service. A schema for context scope may be implemented for collecting context information relevant to the web application document. | 09-18-2008 |
20080244043 | Network system and network device - There is provided a network system including a server and a printer connected to a network, where the server collects and stores configuration data describing operating conditions from respective printers, the server stores the respective collected configuration data associated with a registered ID. If a user enters a predetermined registered ID in new printer, the new printer transmits the entered registered ID to the server. The server, upon receiving the entered registered ID, transmits configuration data associated with the entered registered ID to the new printer. The new printer sets the operating conditions described in the received configuration data to its own operating conditions. | 10-02-2008 |
20080244044 | Substation automation system with increased availability - In automation systems, such as Substation Automation systems, the mean time to repair is reduced by remote reconfiguration and start-up of a replacement or spare Intelligent Electronic Device (IED), leaving some more hours for the maintenance personnel to repair an inactive or faulty IED. The time for the actual repair is irrelevant for the system availability as long as it is short enough compared to the IED failure rate. Exemplary embodiments can provide nearly the same availability as a hot-standby configuration, but without the need for doubling all the essential IEDs. Additionally, spare IEDs are supervised to be healthy, and a fault of the spare IED being detected before it is put in use. Only one spare online IED is needed for each set of IEDs of the same type connected to the same station bus and process bus. In a retrofit or extension case with limited downtime, a number of previous IEDs can be replaced by an equivalent set of new or real IEDs of a different type, but configured to perform the same functions as the previous IEDs. | 10-02-2008 |
20080250126 | Method and apparatus for updating firmware for interface unit connecting portable audio/video player with another audio/video player - A method and apparatus updates software data for an interface unit that interfaces a portable audio/video player with another audio/video system. When the portable audio/video players are updated by adding new features, etc., the method and apparatus enables the users to obtain the corresponding update file for the interface unit in the same manner that the user obtains the music file. Thus, the user can easily and quickly obtain the update file for updating the interface unit and store it in the portable audio/video player in the same manner as the music files. For executing the update operation, the user selects the update file from the play list and starts playing the update file on the portable audio/video player while connecting it to the interface unit. | 10-09-2008 |
20080250127 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROGRAM, NETWORK MANAGEMENT DEVICE, AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT METHOD - When a new service is implemented by adding a server, a network management device detects a network device requiring setting modification. Next, the network management device presents to an administrator a plurality of samples corresponding to the detected network device requiring setting modification and selects a sample selected by the administrator as setting modification content. Specifically, the network management device retrieves from a sample database a plurality of samples corresponding to the network device requiring setting modification, presents the retrieved samples to the administrator so that the administrator can select one, selects the sample selected by the administrator as the setting modification content, and sets the selected setting modification content to the network device. | 10-09-2008 |
20080263186 | Storage system, management server, system reconfiguration support method for a storage system, and system reconfiguration support method for a management server - In order to provide support for a system to operate in a manner appropriate for system requests desired by a user, a management server acquires functions corresponding to system requests acquired using a user interface using a second table for storing a correspondence relationship of functions provided by one or more managed storage devices and system requests occurring at the storage system, simulates whether or not implementation of the system requests is possible from the acquired functions and functions corresponding to the system requests occurring at the current storage system acquired using a third table for storing information for functions provided by the one or more storage devices, and notifies the one or more storage devices of instructions to set functions corresponding to the system requests to valid based on the simulation results of this simulation. | 10-23-2008 |
20080275970 | AUTONOMICALLY ADJUSTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR A SERVER WHEN A DIFFERENT SERVER FAILS - A load balancer detects a server failure, and sends a failure notification message to the remaining servers. In response, one or more of the remaining servers may autonomically adjust their configuration parameters, thereby allowing the remaining servers to better handle the increased load caused by the server failure. One or more of the servers may also include a performance measurement mechanism that measures performance before and after an autonomic adjustment of the configuration parameters to determine whether and how much the autonomic adjustments improved the system performance. In this manner server computer systems may autonomically compensate for the failure of another server computer system that was sharing the workload. | 11-06-2008 |
20080288616 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING PDG INFORMATION - Provided is an apparatus and method for providing and updating PDG information. In a method for updating PDG information in a terminal, an instruction indicating an update of PDG information is received from a network apparatus. PDG information is received from the network apparatus and the received PDG information is stored in a storage unit to perform an update operation. | 11-20-2008 |
20080294756 | RESOLUTION OF CONFLICTING NETWORK SETTINGS ON A SOFTWARE PARITITION SERVER - A method, system and computer-readable medium for resolving conflicting network settings on a software partition server. In one embodiment, the method clones a software partition of a data processing system to obtain a second software partition. The method detects a conflict between a network configuration of the second software partition and an existing network configuration of an existing software partition on the data processing system. The method then dynamically resolves the conflict between the network configuration of the second software partition and the existing network configuration of the existing software partition without additional input from the user. | 11-27-2008 |
20080294757 | System and Method for Publication of Distributed Data Processing Service Changes - Methods and systems to improve change description information dissemination are described. When an altered version of a distributed data processing service is deployed, information about the altered service is published in a service information registry. The published information includes a link to a natural-language description of the altered service. | 11-27-2008 |
20080294758 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR ADJUSTING BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION DURING A COLLABORATION SESSION - In one embodiment, the systems and methods determine an initial bandwidth at a client device; allocate an allocated bandwidth to the client device between a first server and a second server; monitor the allocated bandwidth; and adjust the allocated bandwidth based on a target bandwidth from the first server to the client. | 11-27-2008 |
20080301270 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DIRECTED PROVISION AND INSTALLATION OF DEVICE-SPECIFIC FUNCTIONALITIES, IN PARTICULAR FOR FIELD DEVICES - A method for directed provision and installation of device-specific functionalities and/or information for field devices which are arranged in a distributed system, in particular in a distributed automation system, wherein in a first step, a field device to be connected to the system is supplied with basic functionalities and/or basic information for operation of the field device in the system, bypassing a higher-level controller for the system, after which in a second step, the higher-level controller automatically installs further required upgrade functionalities and/or upgrade information in order to produce the full functional scope of the field device, using the existing basic functionalities and/or basic information. | 12-04-2008 |
20080301271 | METHOD OF IP ADDRESS DE-ALIASING - A method of internet protocol (IP) address de-aliasing that involves obtaining IP addresses from devices in a network, pinging pairs of the IP addresses by sending packets to pairs of the IP addresses, obtaining ping response orders for the packets, and determining whether the pairs of IP addresses are aliases of the same network device based on the obtained ping response orders. | 12-04-2008 |
20080301272 | QUORUM-BASED POWER-DOWN OF UNRESPONSIVE SERVERS IN A COMPUTER CLUSTER - A quorum-based server power-down mechanism allows a manager in a computer cluster to power-down unresponsive servers in a manner that assures that an unresponsive server does not become responsive again. In order for a manager in a cluster to power down servers in the cluster, the cluster must have quorum, meaning that a majority of the computers in the cluster must be responsive. If the cluster has quorum, and if the manager server did not fail, the manager causes the failed server(s) to be powered down. If the manager server did fail, the new manager causes all unresponsive servers in the cluster to be powered down. If the power-down is successful, the resources on the failed server(s) may be failed over to other servers in the cluster that were not powered down. If the power-down is not successful, the cluster is disabled. | 12-04-2008 |
20080313312 | Apparatus, system, and method for a reconfigurable baseboard management controller - An apparatus, system, and method are disclosed for a baseboard management controller (BMC) which includes an FPGA with a monitor module for monitoring the operations parameters of a host computer device. In addition, the BMC has a host connector that connects the BMC to the system bus of the host computing device, allowing the BMC access to the computing elements on the host. The host connector has reconfigurable pins with connection configuration controlled by the FPGA. In addition, the BMC has a server with a processor and associated non-volatile memory on board. The operating system provides services to the host computing device and its constituent components, as well as allowing advanced networking and interconnectivity with other BMCs in a management network. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313313 | Synchronizing information through profile management between a host system and a mobile device - A system for enabling control and managing the assets by synchronizing information between a host system server and a mobile client device is disclosed. Control of the mobile client devices from remote locations enables an administrator to provide specific profiles for the mobile devices. These profiles are consistent and ensure that the user can perform all of the required tasks. The system also includes a multi-level security mechanism. The security provision maintains control of the hardware (mobile device) and the information stored thereon. The administrator also controls the distribution of applications and services to the mobile device, including restoring information which may have become lost. | 12-18-2008 |
20080320116 | Identification of endpoint devices operably coupled to a network through a network address translation router - Methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for identifying an endpoint device from a network when the endpoint device is operably coupled to the network using an internal address on a network address translation (NAT) router. The methods include generating mapping information by associating each of a plurality of internal addresses on the NAT router with a corresponding internal port on the NAT router, a corresponding external address on the network, and a corresponding external port. The mapping information is placed into a flat file and sent to a collection agent server operably coupled to the network. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320117 | CLUSTER SYSTEM MANAGEMENT - In a system having a cluster of system components interconnected by a cluster interconnect fabric, the system components include out-of-band management network interfaces to an out-of-band management network. The system is configured to use the cluster interconnect fabric and the out-of-band management network interfaces to determine the overall connectivity and status of the cluster. | 12-25-2008 |
20080320118 | Computer system and method for configuring thereof - A computer system includes a plurality of domains and a service processor. The service processor sets and changes a configuration of the domain by setting and changing configuration information for determining to combine and separate a hardware resource. The service processor includes a configuration information storing unit registering the configuration information, a first domain communicating unit transmitting the configuration information to the domain, and a domain controlling unit registering the configuration information in the configuration information storing unit to transfer the configuration information to the first domain communicating unit. Each of the domains includes a second domain communicating unit receiving the configuration information, and a configuration changing engine for actually setting and changing the configuration of the domain based on the received configuration information. | 12-25-2008 |
20090031011 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SETTING CONFIGURATION-VALVE THEREIN - The present invention discloses a DM system and a method for setting configuration values in the same. The DM system includes: a server for generating configuration values for a predetermined resource of a terminal, transmitting the configuration values and a reconfiguration parameter to the terminal through a DM session, and requesting the terminal to set the configuration values; and the terminal for receiving the configuration values and the reconfiguration parameter, and setting the configuration values in the resource according to the reconfiguration parameter, the terminal being operated according to the configuration values. As a result, the server can generate the configuration values and transmit the configuration values to the terminal, and the terminal can directly apply the configuration values from the server. | 01-29-2009 |
20090049159 | Method and Apparatus for Setting Up and Managing Operational Environment in P2P Wireless Networks - In a cognitive radio, a method of establishing an operational policy for use in a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) group, wherein the policy can be described by layers of policy parameters with progressively higher layers having a progressively increasing number of parameters, involves determining that a policy change is to be made from a current policy; requesting policy information from at least one P2P group member; receiving a policy description from the at least one P2P group member; and implementing a change in the lowest layer policy parameter to establish a new operational policy. | 02-19-2009 |
20090055517 | Method for a plug-and-play network device to acquire dual internet protocol addresses - The present invention is to provide a method applied to at least a network device connected to a network and enabling the network device to send a request for an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a DHCP server connected with the network according to the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and, in the meantime, automatically generate an IP address according to the automatic link-local IP address allocation protocol. When an IP address is first acquired according to either the DHCP or the automatic link-local IP address allocation protocol, the network device exchanges data with other network device of the same segment by using said IP address first acquired, and constantly trying to acquire another IP address according to either the DHCP or the automatic link-local IP address allocation protocol, so as to effectively reduce the time for acquiring an IP address needed by a conventional network device. | 02-26-2009 |
20090070442 | Architecture And Protocol For Extensible And Scalable Communication - A system performs information technology (IT) tasks using a computer. Examples of IT tasks include installing or configuring software, displaying alerts, executing programs or scripts on the endpoint, or logging activities. In an embodiment of the system, a connection initialization module receives a request for a persistent connection over a network from a managed endpoint. The request is accepted and a persistent connection is opened with the managed endpoint. A tier-1 module then receives configuration information from the managed endpoint over the persistent connection. The configuration information includes a list of functional plugins on the managed endpoint, where a functional plugin comprises a software module for performing an IT task. The tier-1 module stores this configuration information along with information describing the persistent connection and maintains the persistent connection in an open state. | 03-12-2009 |
20090077208 | System And Method For Assigning Addresses To Information Handling Systems - Information handling system network addresses are managed to support a consistent MAC address for iSCSI and fibre channel host bus adapter. For example, a management controller retrieves a MAC address from persistent memory, such as a network location, and assigns the MAC address to a non-persistent memory of a predetermined information handling system network component so that the MAC address remains consistent even if the network component is replaced. For example, an offload engine that supports network communications with iSCSI receives a MAC address from a network location and applies the MAC address for use by a host bus adapter. Alternatively, an offload engine supports Fibre Channel with World Wide Name or World Wide Identifier address assignments. | 03-19-2009 |
20090083404 | SOFTWARE DEPLOYMENT IN LARGE-SCALE NETWORKED SYSTEMS - Software deployment to server nodes within large-scale networked systems is provided using image-based deployment. A mostly immutable image is provided at a central service and transferred from the central service to the server nodes. The image includes a base image, which is immutable, and a delta image, which is writable and provides role-specific and/or node-specific state to the base portion. When a server node receives an image from the central server, the server node stores the image intact without installation. The server node then runs software directly from the stored image. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083405 | MAXIMIZING APPLICATION AVAILABILITY DURING AUTOMATED ENTERPRISE DEPLOYMENTS - A method of deploying enterprise applications or updates to data processing systems in a complex data processing environment. The enterprise applications or updates are phase deployed to the target data processing systems. Phased deployment includes the steps of preparing one affected node, quiescing all affected servers in the node, stopping all affected servers in the node, synchronizing the node, delivering the applications or updates, starting all affected servers, reactivating all affected servers, restoring the affected node, and repeating these steps for each affected node one at a time until all targeted data processing systems have been affected. | 03-26-2009 |
20090094353 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - It is an object of the present invention to provide an information processing apparatus equipped with a many-core processor providing a VOD service having a fast playing response speed with a small size and power saving and an information processing system. In the information processing apparatus equipped with a many-core processor configuring an operation matrix that performs a reconfiguration for each packet based on a communication state, the functions and wirings of the operation matrix are reconfigured so that data is transmitted in a wideband transmission process when a transmitted data amount is smaller than a preset threshold value and the data is transmitted in a narrowband transmission process when the transmitted data amount is larger than the threshold value by comparing the transmitted data amount obtained by counting a transmission data amount of a transmission byte counter with the threshold value in a transmission amount/time determining unit and changing a communication state in a wideband/narrowband transmission state changing unit according to the comparison result. | 04-09-2009 |
20090094354 | TECHNIQUE FOR IMPLEMENTING VIRTUAL FABRIC MEMBERSHIP ASSIGNMENTS FOR DEVICES IN A STORAGE AREA NETWORK - A technique is provided for facilitating fabric membership login for an N_Port of a storage area network. A communication from a network node is received. The communication may include a portion of criteria associated with the N_Port. Using at least a portion of the portion of criteria, a virtual fabric identifier corresponding to a virtual fabric which is associated with the N_Port may be automatically identified. Fabric configuration information, which includes the virtual fabric identifier, may be automatically provided to the network node. A fabric login request from the N_Port to login to the virtual fabric may then be received. According to a specific embodiment, the communication may be transmitted from a network node to an F_Port on a Fibre Channel switch. When the N_Port received the fabric configuration information from the F_Port, the generating, using at least a portion of the received fabric configuration information, a fabric login request message may be generated by the N_Port which includes a fabric login request for the N_Port to login to the virtual fabric corresponding to the virtual fabric identifier. In at least one implementation, the N_Port and/or F_Port may be configured or designed to support trunking functionality. | 04-09-2009 |
20090100157 | Virtual session on a removable memory - A virtual session for a computer in which files that are worked on or automatically stored to a portable device such as a hard drive. Depending on the options that are selected, helper files for those programs may also be stored. Those helper files may be files that enable reading the programs, for example, or may be a complete new OS. | 04-16-2009 |
20090100158 | Backup and Recovery System for Multiple Device Environment - A backup system stores configuration data for several interdependent systems in a single backup store. As the systems are being configured and when changes are made to the systems, the backup store is updated with the change. The systems may be configured with each system having a designated role. During a restore operation, an otherwise unallocated system may assume a particular role and use the configuration logic defined for the role that may be taken from the backup store. The system may perform the restore in conjunction with the other systems and the interdependencies with the systems. | 04-16-2009 |
20090100159 | Method for automatically modifying a program and automation system - A method for automatically modifying a program of an automation system, wherein a first item of data related to a program component is determined using an identificator assigned to the automation system, wherein a program code object stored in a database is selected using a selector based upon the first item of data, and wherein the program is modified by means of the program code object in that the program code object is integrated into the program. Further, an automation system with a program having program components and which is automatically modifiable in accordance with the method, having an assigned identificator for determining a first item of data related to a program component, a selector for selecting a program code object stored in a database based upon the first item of data, and an integrator for integrating the program code object into the program and finally a computer readable medium. | 04-16-2009 |
20090106403 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING COMPATIBILITY WITHIN A DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT ENVIRONMENT WITH A PLURALITY OF CONFIGURATION VERSIONS - A method, apparatus and computer instructions are disclosed for maintaining the compatibility of a multiple nodes in a distributed systems management environment with multiple configuration settings, by transforming the configuration data stored in the master repository (one possible realization is where XML documents contain the configuration data) from one version of the product to a previous version of the product. For multiple versions of the systems management environment, a transformation pipeline process (one possible realization of such a process may utilize XSLT) can be used by a “master” node to transform the configuration data multiple times for each version of the environment, until the configuration data has the format of the intended recipient “slave” node. Also, by performing the transformation process on the “master” side of the computing environment, “slave” nodes with older version configuration settings can continue to operate without having to upgrade their software applications in this regard. | 04-23-2009 |
20090119390 | Adaptive Resource Management Method and System - A resource management method ( | 05-07-2009 |
20090119391 | TARGETED WEB PAGE REDIRECTION - The present invention provides redirection for a web page request for an old URL received at a web server. In an embodiment, a web page request from an end-user is redirected to a Common Gateway Interface (“CGI”) script for handling the web page redirection. In an embodiment, the CGI script includes a routine for matching an old URL to a new URL provided in a lookup table. In an embodiment, each web page of an old URL has a corresponding new URL such that an end-user trying to access a web page using an old URL is always directed to a corresponding new web page, or to a relevant page if a corresponding new page does not exist. In another embodiment, a customized message may be associated with a match between an old URL and a new URL, and the customized message may be displayed prior to redirection. | 05-07-2009 |
20090125615 | ADDRESS RESOLUTION PROTOCOL CHANGE ENABLING LOAD-BALANCING FOR TCP-DCR IMPLEMENTATIONS - Data processing systems, computer implemented methods, and computer program products are provided for updating an address resolution protocol table. Updates received for the address resolution protocol table are comprised of an internet protocol address, a media access control address, and a unique identifier. | 05-14-2009 |
20090132685 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING AND UNPROVISIONING MULTIPLE END POINTS WITH RESPECT TO A SUBSCRIBER AND SERVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM EMPLOYING THE SAME - Various systems and methods for provisioning and/or unprovisioning an end point. One aspect provides a method of provisioning an end point. In one embodiment, the method include: (1) mapping the end point into a role in a service associated with a subscriber and (2) calling at least one function associated with the role, the function causing values to be transmitted to the end point to provision the end point with respect to the service. | 05-21-2009 |
20090138579 | REMOTE CONFIGURATION OF ELECTRONIC DEVICE WITH USER INTERFACE PROVIDED FROM ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An electronic device is remotely configured from a remote server using user interface information stored in the electronic device. The method comprises a server receiving user interface information stored in the electronic device via a data communication network from the electronic device, where the server is communicatively coupled to the electronic device through a data communication network. The server causes a user interface to be generated and displayed on a user computer based on the received the user interface information, where the user computer is communicatively coupled to the server through the data communication network. The server receives configuration information for configuring an application to be executed on the electronic device from the user computer, and transmits the received configuration information to the electronic device via the data communication network to remotely configure the application to be executed on the electronic device. | 05-28-2009 |
20090144402 | Storage Management for Renderfarm - Systems and methods for storing assets in storage systems external to asset management systems while still allowing the asset management systems to track the stored assets are disclosed. One method begins by first receiving an asset to be stored in an asset management system. Next, a first location on a storage managed by the asset management system is determined. A second location on a storage system external to the asset management system is then determined. The external storage system has been configured to store the asset. The asset is then stored at the second location. A logical link is then determined to the second location. Finally, the logical link is stored at the first location. The disclosed systems and methods allow for an administrator to separate the storage methods used by asset management systems from the asset tracking and logging capabilities of asset management systems. | 06-04-2009 |
20090150527 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RECONFIGURING A VIRTUAL NETWORK PATH - In general in one aspect, the invention relates to a method for reconfiguring a virtual network path. The method includes populating a virtual switching table associated with virtual network interface cards (VNICs), implementing the virtual network path using the virtual switching table, where the virtual network path includes a first virtual wire between a first VNIC located in a first computer and a second VNIC located in a second computer, placing a first network packet and a second network packet in a receive buffer associated with the second VNIC, transmitting the first network packet to the second VNIC using the virtual switching table, migrating the second VNIC from the second computer to a third computer, updating the virtual switching table based on migrating the second VNIC, and transmitting the second network packet to the second VNIC in the third computer using the virtual switching table. | 06-11-2009 |
20090150528 | METHOD FOR SETTING UP FAILURE RECOVERY ENVIRONMENT - A method for configuring failover environment, wherein the data on the configuration of the standby server device is obtained by transferring a program for obtaining configuration data to the standby server device; comparison is made in the configuration management table in the management server between the configuration of the standby server device and that of the working server device; and the working server device is started up by emulating the configuration lacking in the working server device by using the unit for emulating the server configuration when the configuration of the standby server device and that of the working server device are different from each other. | 06-11-2009 |
20090157855 | DECENTRALIZED APPLICATION PLACEMENT FOR WEB APPLICATION MIDDLEWARE - A decentralized process to ensure the dynamic placement of applications on servers under two types of simultaneous resource requirements, those that are dependent on the loads placed on the applications and those that are independent. The demand (load) for applications changes over time and the goal is to satisfy all the demand while changing the solution (assignment of applications to servers) as little as possible. | 06-18-2009 |
20090164609 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING CONFIGURATION ATTRIBUTES USING FASTREPAGE ATTRIBUTE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for updating configuration attributes by transmitting a FastRepage Attribute in a wireless communication system is provided, comprising generating a FastRepage Attribute comprising an 8 bit Length field wherein the Length field indicates a value of length of the FastRepage attribute in octets excluding the length of Length field, an 8 bit AttributeID field, an 8 bit FastRepageEnabled field wherein the FastRepageEnabled field is set to a value ‘0×01’ to indicate that FastRepage is enabled and a 16 bit FastRepageInterval field, wherein the FastRepageInterval field indicates a value of interval at which an access network pages an access terminal when the access network does not receive a response to a page and transmitting the FastRepage attribute over a communication link. A method and apparatus is further provided for receiving and processing the FastRepage attribute. | 06-25-2009 |
20090164610 | METHOD, GATEWAY, CLIENT, SOFTWARE ARRANGEMENT AND COMPUTER-ACCESSIBLE MEDIUM FOR FACILITATING A HANDOVER BETWEEN A WIRELESS LAN AND A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - Exemplary embodiments of method, gateway, client, software arrangement and computer-accessible medium are provided for a handover of a client from a local network to an access network. For example, information can be received from the client regarding the client's ability to connect directly to the access network, whereas the client is connected to a local network. A request for the handover of the client and an identification information of the client can be transmitted to the access network. Further, the handover of the client can be initiated from the local network to the access network. | 06-25-2009 |
20090177763 | DATA RESTORE DEVICE AND SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESTORING CONFIGURATION DATA - The invention provides a convenient and rapid concurrent manner to restore a group of target devices. Restore configuration data from a source device is transferred to the group of target devices by a data restore device over a network. The data restore device instructs each target device to partially cover original configuration data with the restore configuration data so as to restore the target devices. By using the present invention, it takes only a very short period of time to restore the target devices in one group even the number of target devices in this group is great. | 07-09-2009 |
20090177764 | Method, apparatus and system for modulating an application based on proximity - A method, system and apparatus for modulating an application associated with at least one of a first communication device and a second communication device is provided. Proximity between the first communication device and the second communication device is determined. The application associated with at least one of the first communication device and the second communication device is modulated based on the proximity. | 07-09-2009 |
20090187646 | IP ADDRESS ASSIGNING METHOD, VLAN CHANGING DEVICE, VLAN CHANGING SYSTEM AND QUARANTINE PROCESS SYSTEM - An IP address assigning method is used for assigning a second IP address to a computer to which a static IP address is assigned in advance. The method includes the steps of storing one temporary IP address and the static IP address of the terminal device in association with each other, and controlling the terminal device to start a communication at the layer | 07-23-2009 |
20090193103 | Method of and System for Support of User Devices Roaming Between Routing Realms by a Single Network Server - A network server provisioning at least one Local Area Network (LAN) comprising a client entry store, a packet driver module, a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) request handler. The LAN has one or more routing realms. The client entry store stores records representing a user device connecting to the LAN provisioned by the network server as a roaming visitor of the LAN to gain temporal access to an outside network through the LAN, and records representing one or more routing realm top-level devices provided on a top level of each routing realm of the LAN. The packet driver module inspects packets arriving from and directed to the user device, and interacts with the client entry store to process the packets. The DHCP request handler examines address data in DHCP packets received from the user device and the records in the client entry store. At least one of the packet driver module and the DHCP request handler detects roaming between routing realms by the user device based on the data of the packets and the records in the client entry store, and assigns a new Internet Protocol (IP) address to the user device when roaming by the user device is detected. | 07-30-2009 |
20090198800 | DHCP address conflict detection/enforcement - The present invention resolves IP address conflicts in a network with DHCP or other address assignment protocol when some host on the network uses a conflicting static IP address to an IP address assigned to another host. The preferred method involves offering a given IP address to a host/node through the address assignment protocol while also detecting any other host/node using the offered IP address on a given VLAN using address resolution protocol. If another host/node is using the IP address, the offending host/node may be blocked on that VLAN for a set amount of time. | 08-06-2009 |
20090198801 | SELF SERVICE DISTRIBUTION CONFIGURATION FRAMEWORK - A self-service distribution configuration framework integrates with a directory services and Systems Management Server (SMS) of an enterprise computing system for web based self service configuration changes on a server owner defined schedule. The framework will cross reference the SMS database with the configuration framework database and dynamically update or create SMS server collections and advertisements for each unique time and day selected. For example, all systems that have had “Monday at 8 PM” selected as their scheduled date and time would become a member of the same collection. Upon opening the web site, the system owner is presented a data grid populated with a list of servers for which the individual is responsible, enabling selection of specific days and times for each server at which configuration changes sent by the SMS will occur. | 08-06-2009 |
20090198802 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTERACTIVELY CONFIGURING A NETWORK DEVICE - A method and system for interactively configuring a network device is disclosed. A computer based method interactively configures a network device such as a router. A document is displayed to a user of a client computer, which is coupled to the network device via a network. The document contains a configuration for the network device in a text format. The user edits the document to make a change in the configuration of the network device. The change in the configuration is sent to the network device. The change can be sent without sending the entire configuration. | 08-06-2009 |
20090198803 | System and Method for Programming Point of Sale Devices - A system for programming point of sale devices is provided. The system includes a terminal programming system that can program point of sale devices provided by different manufacturers and having different proprietary operating systems. A communications interface is connected to the terminal programming system that receives update requests from the plurality of point of sale devices, such as when the point of sale devices call in to the system or when the point of sale devices respond to a poll. | 08-06-2009 |
20090198804 | System and Method for Affecting the Behavior of a Network Device in a Cable Network - A subscriber access control system (SACS) configures a network device connected to cable network to affect the behavior of that device. The SACS comprises a rules engine and a datastore that stores the current state of subscribers known to the SACS and historical request information. When the SACS receives a request to quarantine a device, it assigns attributes to a subscriber record accessed by a DHCP server to affect the configuration and behavior of that device. The actual behavior of the quarantined device is determined by the presence of the attribute and the value of the attribute. | 08-06-2009 |
20090204692 | System and Method for Network Device Configuration - Methods and systems for identifying configuration parameters for a network device are provided. The method includes generating a stream of traffic data, where the traffic data has a known characteristic. Then, applying the stream of traffic data to the network device, where the network device has a specific type, and the network device generates an output based on the traffic data. The method then includes monitoring performance of the network device while the traffic data is processed by the network device, and the monitoring is configured to generate monitoring data for the traffic data applied to the network device having the specific type. Also, the method includes analyzing the output from the network device, where the analyzing is performed to identify how the traffic data was handled by the network device, and the analyzing is configured to generate performance metrics. The method further includes saving the monitoring data and the performance metrics to a knowledge database. The knowledge database is capable of being accessed to enable configuration of other network devices based in part on the monitoring data and performance metrics. | 08-13-2009 |
20090204693 | OPTIMIZATION OF ASPECTS OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY STRUCTURES - A computer system and computer program product for optimizing an aspect of an Information Technology (IT) structure of an IT system. The aspect of the IT structure is optimized with respect to at least one control parameter. The IT structure includes a plurality of elements. Each element independently is a hardware element, a software element, or a combination of a hardware element and a software element. Each control parameter has a value that is specific to each element of the IT structure. | 08-13-2009 |
20090210520 | INFORMATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT UNIT - [Solution] Operational-policy storage means ( | 08-20-2009 |
20090210521 | METHOD OF INSTALLING SOFTWARE FOR ENABLING A CONNECTION OF A PHONE TO AN INTERCONNECTED NETWORK - Method of installing software for enabling a connection of a phone to an interconnected network A method of installing a software on a computer using an operating system in order to enable a connection of a phone to an interconnected network, said method comprising the steps of: reading ( | 08-20-2009 |
20090216865 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, SERVERS,METHOD FOR MANAGING DEVICE, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A device management system includes a first server and a second server that is different from the first server. The first server includes a first management unit configured to update and delete device information of a management target device to be managed by the first server. The second server includes a second management unit configured to update and delete device information of a management target device to be managed by the second server and a display unit configured to display device information of a device which is not to be managed by the second server. | 08-27-2009 |
20090222537 | System And Method For Interactive Instant Networking - Interactive instant networking may be achieved by receiving an indication to change from a current network mode to another network mode, disabling a collaboration authority DHCP server if the current network mode comprises a collaboration authority instant network mode, enabling the collaboration authority DHCP server if the current network mode does not comprise the collaboration authority instant network mode, issuing a DHCP IP address request to receive an IP address, and repeating the issuing until a unique IP address is received. The indication may be responsive to a user toggling an application-level user interface button. | 09-03-2009 |
20090222538 | TERMINAL FUNCTION MANAGEMENT SERVER, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - An object is to provide a terminal function management server, communication system, and communication method enabling efficient and smooth communication. A terminal function management server such as a DM server is configured as follows. When there is a modification of communication functions retained by a first mobile terminal | 09-03-2009 |
20090222539 | SELECTIVELY ROUTING PATIENT DATA BETWEEN FIELD DEVICES AND TREATMENT CENTER DESTINATIONS - Techniques for routing event data from a field device, such as an external defibrillator, to a selected subset of a plurality of possible destinations are described. The event data may include physiological data of the patient, such as a 12-lead electrocardiogram (ECG). The destinations may be associated with one of a plurality of patient treatment centers, and may include, as examples, computing device, printers, displays, personal digital assistants, or web-accessible accounts. In some examples, a server maintains user-configurable information or rules for at least some of the destinations, and uses the information or rules for determining whether event data received from a field device is routed to the destination. In some examples, the server may also make the routing determination based on an analysis of event data, such as a determination as to whether the event data indicates that the patient is suspected to be experiencing an acute myocardial infarction. | 09-03-2009 |
20090240790 | Network Switching Apparatus, Server System and Server Migration Method for Server System - A network switching apparatus, a server system and a server migration method for the server system are provided which can perform server migration easily. The server system has a physical server, a physical server having a server virtualization mechanism, a network switching apparatus having a plurality of ports and a management server connected to the network switching apparatus for managing a server migration process for using a migration destination virtual server as the physical server of a migration source, wherein the management server has a migration mechanism for transmitting setting information to be designated to the plurality of ports to the network switching apparatus during the server migration process, and the network switching apparatus changes settings of the plurality of ports in accordance with the transmitted setting information on the plurality of ports. | 09-24-2009 |
20090240791 | UPDATE MANAGEMENT METHOD AND UPDATE MANAGEMENT UNIT - A management node for managing a program update time refers to an update management table in which a plurality of managed nodes are classified into a plurality of groups and the sequence of program updating of the groups is defined. The management node sequentially selects the groups in accordance with the sequence of program updating in such a manner that after program updating processing has been completed in all managed nodes included in the selected group, the next group is selected. The management node refers to the update management table, transmits a program update request to each of the managed nodes included in the selected group, receives an update completion notification from the managed node, and notifies update management information storing means that the update processing has been completed in the managed node. | 09-24-2009 |
20090240792 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING DHCP MESSAGE VIA PPP LINK AND FOR OBTAINING CONFIGURATION INFORMATION - A method and system for transmitting DHCP message via PPP link and of obtaining configuration information are provided. In the method and the system, when an end of PPP link sends DHCP broadcasting message directly through PPP link, address of hardware desired in DHCP message is replaced by a symbol of uniquely indicating the device using PPP link, so that the PPP link can support DHCP. The symbol of uniquely indicating the device using PPP link may be identifier of devices as well as link number of PPP link and so on. Assigning strategy which binds configuration information of lower device and PPP link can make device configuration correlate to physical address. | 09-24-2009 |
20090248842 | Control-relay apparatus - A control-relay apparatus that controls a device to be controlled, according to a control request received from a management device includes a request receiving part that receives, from the management device, control request data containing data indicating a condition that a device to be controlled should satisfy, and data indicating contents of control with respect to a device that satisfies the condition, and stores the control request data in a recording part accessible from the control-relay apparatus, an information obtaining part that obtains device data relating to a device communicable with the control-relay apparatus; and a device control part that, when the device data obtained by the information obtaining part satisfy the condition indicated by the control request data recorded in the recording part, performs control including the contents indicated by the control request data, with respect to the device. | 10-01-2009 |
20090248843 | Parallel Random Proxy Usage for Large Scale Web Access - A system and method efficiently and anonymously retrieves large scale Web data through a restricted query interface. A number of proxy servers are utilized to permit parallel access to a target Web server for processing multiple queries simultaneously. Latency in the individual queries is absorbed by the proxy servers. Queries that would otherwise appear structured to the target server are assigned to the proxy server in a random fashion, obscuring the structured nature of the queries. The anonymous nature of the queries made by the proxy servers furthermore conceals the identity of the originating server. | 10-01-2009 |
20090254640 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HBA MIGRATION - In one implementation, a system includes multiple SCSI nodes configured to perform a SCSI target function. Each of the multiple SCSI nodes includes a host bus adaptor configured to connect the SCSI node with a Fibre Channel fabric. The host bus adaptor being assigned a world wide name and a network address. The system further includes a host configured to perform a SCSI initiator function. The world wide name assigned to a source host bus adaptor associated with one SCSI node is relocated to a target host bus adaptor associated with another SCSI node. After that, the network address associated with the source host bus adaptor is relocated to the target host bus adaptor. In one implementation, the system determines whether or not a network address assigned to a source host bus adaptor associated with one of the multiple SCSI nodes is shared with at least one other service. If so, the system determined whether the shared network address can be relocated to a target host bus adaptor associated with another one of the multiple of SCSI nodes. If the latter determination is in affirmative, the world wide name and network address are relocated. | 10-08-2009 |
20090259736 | LABEL-BASED TARGET HOST CONFIGURATION FOR A SERVER LOAD BALANCER - A method for configuring a server load balancer comprises receiving a user command defining a load balancing group capable of representing a plurality of target host servers within a network, and receiving user commands adding the target host servers to the load balancing group, wherein the user commands include configuration information for the target host servers. Upon receiving the user commands adding the target host servers to the load balancing group, the method includes updating a database of the server load balancer to include configuration information for the target host servers. After updating the database, the method includes receiving user commands assigning a label to a subset of the target host servers without creating a new load balancing group and without re-configuring information relating to the target host servers, wherein the label indicates the subset of the target host servers are capable of servicing a specific type of access request. | 10-15-2009 |
20090259737 | ADMINISTRATION SYSTEM AND ADMINISTRATION METHOD FOR COMPUTERS - Reconfiguration plans that cope with various events are produced for a computer system. An administration system for computers and an administration method for computers in accordance with the present invention have a constitution described below. A server system includes plural servers, and a management server that administers the server system is connected to the server system. The management server monitors an event occurring in the server system, produces reconfiguration plans for the server system on the basis of priorities assigned to the plural servers and/or application programs according to the monitored event, selects a reconfiguration plan from the reconfiguration plans under predetermined criteria for selection, and reconfigures the server system according to the selected reconfiguration plan. | 10-15-2009 |
20090259738 | ONLINE RESOURCE SERVER FOR ALLOWING DEVICE CONTROL AND ACCESS TO DIGITAL CONTENT THROUGH PLUGGABLE USER INTERFACES - An online resource server for allowing device control and access to digital content through pluggable user interfaces (PUI). Features of various embodiments of the system can also include: a system of access rights for resources; user types and their meaning; determination of mandatory and optional properties of resources; an algorithm for ranking of resources based on weights given in a resource query; registration of a PUI upon upload resulting in a unique resource name (URI); user interface socket descriptions for device classes, and extensibility of the socket descriptions through naming conventions; a universal Control Hub as a Service; an ability to allow content owners to protect their intellectual property by keeping the (protected) media over HDMI separated from the control network; an ability to track usage data and dynamically adjust the PUI without the need for user intervention; and enhanced technical support, including remote diagnostics of the consumer electronics equipment. | 10-15-2009 |
20090265450 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING COMPUTING RESOURCES OF MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for managing resources of a management system is provided. The management system is adapted for managing a network having a plurality of network devices. In one embodiment, the method includes the steps of grouping the network devices into a plurality of network device groups based on at least one characteristic associated with each of the network devices, and allocating respective portions of the resources of the management system to the network device groups. The at least one characteristic of each network device is indicative of an importance of the network device to the provider. The resources are allocated to the network device groups based on the respective importance of each of the network device groups to the provider. | 10-22-2009 |
20090265451 | ASSISTED APPLICATION DEFINITION - A system and a method for characterizing an application the method including one or more of monitoring installation of an application and recording information relating to one or more file system, registry and database resources created or modified during installation of the application, monitoring an application run and recording information relating to one or more file system, registry, database and network resources accessed during run of the application and manually entering information relating to one or more file system, registry, database and network resources employed by the application and filtering the information to provide filtered information and classifying the filtered information to obtain classified information. | 10-22-2009 |
20090265452 | APPARATUS, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR CHARACTERIZING USER-DEFINED AREAS - A method of specifying a boundary for an area is provided, which includes receiving a first input from a first user regarding a first configuration of a boundary of an area. The first input may serve to establish an area of arbitrary and possibly irregular configuration, such as an area that is apolitical or otherwise legally undetermined. A second input may be received from a second user regarding a second boundary configuration. The second input may serve to modify the boundary of an area established by the first input. A particular configuration of the boundary based at least partially on the first and second inputs can then be determined. For example, the particular configuration of the boundary may be determined, in part, by spatially averaging the first and second configurations. In some embodiments, demographic data for an area defined by the particular configuration of the boundary may be compiled. | 10-22-2009 |
20090276511 | CONTROLLING METHOD, COMPUTER SYSTEM, AND PROCESSING PROGRAM OF BOOTING UP A COMPUTER - A computer system having computers executing programs, a management computer managing said computers, and a storage system which can be accessed from said computers via a network, wherein said management computer includes: a storage unit for storing network identity information of said network which is allocated to said computers, application identity information indicating said programs, and area identity information indicating areas in said storage system in which said programs are stored, said network identity information and said area identity information being related to said application identity information, a control unit for sending to said computers said network identity information and said area identity information corresponding to said application identity information, in order to boot programs indicated by said application identity information, in response to entry of a boot request including said application identity information. | 11-05-2009 |
20090282132 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELF-ORGANIZING COMPUTER SYSTEMS - A system and method to self-configure a distributed system includes obtaining a description of a distributed system which has a plurality of computing nodes, each node being capable of performing any of a plurality of tasks in the description. At each node, a persona of that node is determined in accordance with the description such that the nodes are assigned tasks in the distributed system. Each node is reconfigured in accordance with the persona such that the nodes are linked in the distributed system to provide a self-configured distributed system for performing at least one application. | 11-12-2009 |
20090282133 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR CONFIGURING DISPARATE WORKSTATIONS - A system, apparatus, method and computer program product are provided for configuring disparate workstations. In particular, an administrative utility is provided that may allow users to upload to a configuration server individual configuration files for applications executing on workstations associated with physiological devices. Once uploaded, a user may group the configuration files into configuration groups based, for example, on similarities in configurations utilized. Once a configuration group has been created, the user may assign one or more workstations to each configuration group. Upon startup of a workstation, an application executing on the workstation may automatically transmit a request to the configuration server to load the configurations for that workstation. In response, the configuration server may determine to which configuration group the workstation has been assigned, and then download the configuration files of that configuration group to the workstation. The downloaded configuration files may then control the behavior of the application. | 11-12-2009 |
20090282134 | AUTOMATED DOUBLE FIRMWARE UPGRADE - A method of upgrading the software load of a device includes receiving a configuration file and checking if a device software load matches load information (EE) of the configuration file. If the device software load does not match the EE of the configuration file, a check is made to determine if the device software load matches new load information (NE) of the configuration file. | 11-12-2009 |
20090287802 | UPnP/DLNA device support apparatus, system, and method - An apparatus, system, and method may include a universal plug and play or digital living network alliance (UPnP/DLNA) device, a support server, and a mobile device. The mobile device may be configured to discover the UPnP/DLNA device of a UPnP or DLNA network by using a UPnP/DLNA protocol. The mobile device may further be configured to receive, using the UPnP/DLNA protocol, status-related data corresponding to the UPnP/DLNA device. The mobile device may also be configured to transmit the status-related data to the support server via a wide area network (WAN) or a wireless wide area network (WWAN) to facilitate support of the UPnP/DLNA device based on the status-related data. | 11-19-2009 |
20090292793 | AUTONOMOUS OPERATION OF NETWORKING DEVICES - A system, method, and information processing system for managing a configuration of a network device. A current state associated with at least one network device ( | 11-26-2009 |
20090292794 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING APPLICATION TERMINALS IN HOME NETWORK - A system, apparatus, and method for automatically configuring application terminals in a home network are provided. The method includes the following steps: the application terminal obtains address information of the GACS from the home gateway and sends a configuration request message to the GACS, the GACS obtains address information of a terminal automatic configuration server (TACS) through query after receiving the configuration request message and sends the address information of the TACS to the application terminal through a configuration response message, and the application terminal sends the configuration request message to the TACS according to the returned address information of the TACS from the GACS to obtain configuration information from the TACS for automatic configuration. The provided system, apparatus, and method may ensure that the application terminal securely obtains the address information of the TACS and thus obtains the configuration, without increasing the complexity of the application terminal. | 11-26-2009 |
20090307338 | Network Element Having a DHCP Lease Timer - A network element modifying the DHCP lease timer is described. According to one embodiment, an exemplary method includes maintaining, at a network element, DHCP lease time for one or more clients and in response to a DHCP renewal request from a client, on behalf of a DHCP server, providing DHCP renewal services to the client based on lease time information associated with the client without invoking the DHCP server. | 12-10-2009 |
20090313358 | System and Method for Managing Network-Based Services - Systems and methods for managing computer network based services that provide a customized service to a user via any of a plurality of access points utilizing a portable user configuration to automatically configure a selected access point, wherein the customized service is provided according to the user configuration. The systems and methods further provide management functions for operation, control, and/or monitoring of the systems to provide an integrated service solution. | 12-17-2009 |
20090313359 | Automatic switching network points based on configuration profiles - A method and apparatus to reconfigure parameters for establishing a link with a new host after a computer is moved to a new location or a new network. | 12-17-2009 |
20090319643 | AUTOMATED METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING FILES AND SETTINGS TO NEW COMPUTER - A user accesses a website to purchase a replacement computer. As part of the transaction an application is downloaded to an existing computer of the user and used to obtain personal files and settings of the existing computer, which are uploaded to an Internet server. The settings and files may be loaded onto the replacement computer prior to delivery or after delivery, over the Internet. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319644 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING COMPUTING DEVICES FOR WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Methods and apparatus are provided for configuring a first computing device and a second computing device for operation over a wireless network. A method comprises coupling the first computing device and the second computing device to establish a data communication link, and exchanging configuration information using the data communication link. The configuration information may be utilized for communication over the wireless network between the first computing device and the second computing device. The method may further comprise establishing a communication session over the wireless network between the first computing device and the second computing device using the configuration information. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319645 | Method, Apparatus, and Computer Program Product for Distributed Information Management - An apparatus for distributed information management may include a processor. The processor may be configured to select one or more network domain features and one or more information domain features. In this regard, the network domain features may be based on the connectivity of a network, and the information domain features may be based on meta-data associated with information stored within the network. The processor may also be configured to determine a network domain covariance based on the one or more network domain features and determine an information domain covariance based on the one or more information domain features. Further, the processor may be configured to combine the network domain covariance and the information domain covariance to determine a path update. Associated methods and computer program products may also be provided. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319646 | NAMING SYSTEM LAYER - A facility for publishing information in a distributed network without a central management infrastructure is described. In various embodiments, the facility receives an indication of a new node and a destination node, the new node omitted from a contact list associated with the destination node, the contact list having an approximately logarithmic distribution of neighboring nodes; introduces the new node to the destination node via a permanent circuit; and causes the destination node to add the new node to the contact list when adding the new node improves the logarithmic distribution of neighboring nodes. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319647 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATED BUILDING OF A SIMULATED NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Systems and methods for a system for automatically building a simulated network environment creating device profiles with device level metadata, segment profiles that utilize one or more of the created device profiles and that includes segment metadata, and a network environment profile that is created from segment profiles and that includes network environment metadata and a hierarchy based on dependencies with other segments within the network environment profile. | 12-24-2009 |
20090319648 | Branded Advertising Based Dynamic Experience Generator - Methods and apparatus are provided to provide served ads to one or more clients based on dynamic-community information, ad-related information, service features, service activity, country of origin, and device-related information. Dynamic communities are formed based on a trigger, which may be a command, a request for information, a change in context, or an event notification. After receiving the trigger, a served ad may be piggybacked onto a response to the trigger. The served ad may include graphical, audio, textual, and/or other information. Additionally, served ads may be sent in response to ad requests. A served ad may be selected based on ad-screening rules and/or conflict resolution between advertisers competing to provide the selected ad. | 12-24-2009 |
20090327456 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING FUNCTIONALITY OF NETWORKED DEVICES - Disclosed are methods for providing extended functionality to a networked device, the networked device connected in a network, as well as corresponding apparatus and computer-readable medium. The embodiments intercept data communications in which the networked device is a party, the data communications being intercepted by an interdictor, receive at the interdictor a subscription registration for notification of a networked device event which is to be altered, the subscription registration being received from an extension service, determine whether the data communications in which the networked device is a party corresponds to the subscription registration of the networked device event which is to be altered, and modify the data communications in which the networked device is a party to provide the extended functionality when the data communications are determined to correspond to the subscription registration of networked device event to be altered. | 12-31-2009 |
20090327457 | Distributed Configuration Management Using Loosely-Coupled Action-Style Documents - Described is a technology in a distributed configuration network management environment, in which action-style documents are used as guides in processing structured documents to perform management tasks. For example, the action-style documents may be used by a standard stylesheet processor to validate a constitutional document, and process input lines of that constitutional document into output lines of a document. When executed, the output lines perform a management task. In this manner, for example, policy statements of an administrator are transformed into a single type of self-contained document that is consistently interpreted, and thus consistently executed, regardless of its source or when it was authored. | 12-31-2009 |
20090327458 | ONLINE PREDICATE CHECKING FOR DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS - Exemplary methods, computer-readable media, and systems describe detecting a performance bug or a nontrivial correctness in a distributed system. The techniques describe using an online predicate checker by specifying a predicate on distributed properties of the distributed system. The process describes monitoring and checking the predicate when the system is deployed and providing a service. In response to detection of the performance bug, the process describes performing modifications of the predicate or installing new predicate. | 12-31-2009 |
20090327459 | On-Demand Capacity Management - Dynamically upsizing and/or downsizing a network farm in response to network demand. An application message router routes messages to the network farm. When the network farm approaches or is anticipated to be approaching capacity, a group of one or more servers may be added to the network farm. When the added server(s) are capable of participating in the network farm, the application message router is triggered to route also to the added servers. When the network farm has excess capacity, a group of one or more servers may be dropped from the network farm. This may be accomplished by triggering the application message router to no longer route messages to the removed servers. The removed servers may be either immediately or gracefully removed from service. | 12-31-2009 |
20090327460 | Application Request Routing and Load Balancing - An application request router that routes incoming application message to various servers in a network farm, even though the original network request itself does not directly specify which server is to handle the request. The application request routing module uses intra-farm routing policy and characteristics of the request itself to identify which of the servers is to handle the message and then dispatches the message to the appropriate server. This allows a user to reconfigure the network farm by reconfiguring the capabilities of the servers in the network farm, and then altering the routing policy accordingly to take advantage of the reconfigured network farm capabilities. | 12-31-2009 |
20090327461 | COMPUTING APPARATUS - A reconfigurable computing apparatus includes plural computing element networks respectively formed of computing elements of an identical bit width, the bit width of each of the computing element networks differing according to computing element network; a bit width converting element that converts bit widths between the computing element networks; a control signal-dedicated network that is formed of computing elements, is reconfigurable, and controls each of the computing element networks; and a sequencer that controls a timing at which circuit configurations are switched with respect to the computing element networks, the control signal-dedicated network, and the bit width converting element. | 12-31-2009 |
20100005159 | DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A data transmission apparatus which transmits data includes an acquisition unit configured to acquire information including a transmission destination of the data from an information providing apparatus on a network, a transmission unit configured to transmit the data to the transmission destination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a request unit configured to request the information providing apparatus to update the information during transmission of the data by the transmission unit. | 01-07-2010 |
20100017504 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING RICH MEDIA CONTENT - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving rich media content. A creator creates configuration information of each node formed in a hierarchical structure in a changeable format in which a driver can change the configuration information, and transmits content including the configuration information of each node to the driver. A driver receives the content, determines whether configuration information of each node formed in a hierarchical structure in the received content is created in the changeable format, reconfigures each node when the configuration information is created in the changeable format, and performs an application on the reconfigured node. | 01-21-2010 |
20100017505 | APPLICATION UPDATING MANAGEMENT TERMINAL DEVICE, SYSTEM AND PROGRAM - A use frequency communicating unit | 01-21-2010 |
20100023604 | Method and system for providing operator guidance in network and systems management - An operator guidance system is provided for an administrator managing a computer network such as a distributed computer system. Fault events reported by a fault management system in the network are enhanced to include topology information about other nodes (such as neighbor nodes, path nodes and/or service nodes) that may have been responsible for the fault. The enhanced events are correlated with configuration commands used in the past to correct faults. A set of guidance rules are developed based on the actions that were taken by the operator in handling previous faults of a similar nature. The guidance rules can be displayed to the administrator to facilitate network fault resolution. Using a set of predefined policies, some of the corrective actions can be performed automatically. | 01-28-2010 |
20100023605 | System and method for synchronizing configurations in a controller network - A method is disclosed for synchronizing configuration data. The method may include providing a controller network that includes a plurality of control modules and each control module may have registration information stored thereon. The method may include detecting a registration information change associated with a control module and receiving current configuration data from the control module, if the registration information change is detected. The method may also include creating new configuration data for each control module in the controller network based on the received current configuration data, and synchronizing the configuration of each control module with the created new configuration data. | 01-28-2010 |
20100023606 | Method for Providing Composed Services in a Peer-To-Peer Network - A method for providing a service containing facilities in a peer-to-peer network comprising peer devices is provided. The peer devices may be associated with groups, each group being defined by a pre-determined facility. The pre-determined facility may be executed by each peer device associated with a respective group, and a selected peer device of a group executes the respective facility. A sequence of facilities and specifications to be executed is publicized in the peer-to-peer network, on the peer devices executing the respective facility by a peer device requesting the combined service, and the selection of the selected peer devices is carried out according to the publicized sequence and the publicized specifications. | 01-28-2010 |
20100023607 | DETERMINING COLLOCATIONS WITH AN ACCESS TRANSPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (ATMS) - A device receives network configuration information from a network, determines a new capacity model of the network based on the network configuration information, and constructs a mixed integer programming (MIP) model based on the new capacity model. The device also calculates an optimal baseline solution, that minimizes network costs, using the mixed integer programming (MIP) model, performs a collocation optimization procedure on the optimal baseline solution to produce an optimal collocation solutions for the network, and provides the optimal network collocation solutions to the network for implementation. | 01-28-2010 |
20100023608 | DEVICE SETTING ALTERATION SYSTEM, NETWORK DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A device setting alteration system comprises a plurality of network devices connected to one another via a network. Each of the plurality of network devices comprises: a device main body that requests a setting alteration with respect to its network device that comprises the device main body itself; a data analysis unit that determines whether or not a setting alteration is being performed through another device main body of another network device when the device main body requests the setting alteration; a processing execution unit that uses, when the data analysis unit determines that a setting alteration is not being performed through another device main body, the setting alteration performed through the device main body upon its network device; and a network communication unit that transmits a content of the setting alteration to another network device. | 01-28-2010 |
20100023609 | FMC Architecture for CDMA Network - A method and apparatus are provided for connecting a mobile device to a subscriber access network, such as 3G network over an untrusted network, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN). SIP signaling is performed to authenticate and establish a connection to the subscriber access network. A unique identifier may be assigned to the mobile device for transmitting data to and receiving data from the subscriber access network. | 01-28-2010 |
20100030876 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING USER AGENT DNS SETTINGS - A method, system and apparatus including receiving a request from a network device, the request including an IP address of said network device, generating and sending to the network device a domain name for locating a device configured to process a DNS query, the domain name corresponding to the IP address, the network device generating and sending a DNS query including the domain name and at least one local DNS setting of the network device to the device configured to the process the DNS query, and the device processing an association between the IP address and the at least one local DNS setting of the network device. | 02-04-2010 |
20100030877 | VIRTUAL SERVER SYSTEM AND PHYSICAL SERVER SELECTING METHOD - By using resource information of a physical server and a virtual server and capacity information of the physical server, a virtual server system and a physical server selecting method extract a physical server in which the utilization rate of resources is more than a high load threshold value or lower than a low load threshold value; with respect to moving candidates comprised of all combinations of a plurality of operating virtual servers in the extracted physical servers and physical servers to where the virtual servers move, seek an evaluation value of an index to level the utilization rate of resources for each server after virtual servers move; determine virtual servers are to be moved, original physical servers and destination physical servers to where virtual servers are to be moved in accordance with the evaluation value; and move the determined virtual servers to the destination physical servers. | 02-04-2010 |
20100042704 | AUTOMATING APPLICATION STATE OF A SET OF COMPUTING DEVICES RESPONSIVE TO SCHEDULED EVENTS BASED ON HISTORICAL DATA - A programmatic event related to a meeting can be detected. At least one previous meeting similar to the meeting can be determined. A pattern relating to an application state of a set of at least one computing devices can be ascertained for at least one previous meeting. A difference between a current application state of the set of computing devices and an application state indicated by the ascertained pattern can be determined. The current application state of the set of computing devices can be automatically adjusted to lessen the determined difference. | 02-18-2010 |
20100042705 | MAPPING OF LOGICAL VOLUMES TO HOST CLUSTERS - A method for data storage includes defining a host cluster within a group of host computers, which access a storage system that includes multiple logical volumes. The host cluster includes two or more of the host computers. A single mapping instruction, which specifies the host cluster and a set of one or more of the logical volumes, is accepted. Responsively to the single mapping instruction, each of the host computers in the host cluster is mapped to access the logical volumes in the set. In another disclosed method, a single control instruction, which specifies the host cluster and a configuration operation to be applied to the host computers in the host cluster, is accepted. Responsively to the single control instruction, the configuration operation is applied to each of the host computers in the host cluster. | 02-18-2010 |
20100042706 | System and Method for Improving Productivity - In some aspects, a method of the present disclosure includes collecting user activity data from a client device. The method also includes defining an activity-productivity map that defines a rule for determining a unit of productivity based on the activity data. A productivity metric may be determined using the user activity data and the rule for determining the unit of productivity. Upon determining the productivity metric, a visual representation of the productivity metric may be provided. | 02-18-2010 |
20100042707 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REQUESTING AND ALLOCATING CONNECTION POINT ADDRESS - The present invention relates to mobile communications, and discloses a method and device for requesting and allocating connection point addresses. Therefore, transmission errors of subsequent messages of a terminal are avoided when the MIP registration of the terminal fails. The method includes: receiving a request for an IP address from a terminal and a MIP registration result of the terminal; and returning a response indicative of IP address allocation failure if the registration result is registration failure. | 02-18-2010 |
20100042708 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PROVIDING AUTOMATIC CONNECTION ANNOUNCEMENT FROM A MODULAR NETWORK DEVICE TO A NETWORK MANAGEMENT POINT - A method of provisioning modular network devices is described. A generic configuration is placed on a device; the configuration comprises commands for configuring interfaces associated the device. At the device, each interface associated with the device is configured with at least one command associated with the configuration. The device then attempts to connect with a management point through the current interface. If the current interface can connect to the management point, then an inventory of all interfaces associated with the device is self-initiated and automatically communicated by the device to the management point. In other embodiments, based on the inventory information, a configuration template containing relative interface references may be resolved into a permanent device configuration that includes absolute interface references. As a result, modular network devices in which interfaces of various types are installed at different slot locations may acquire a permanent configuration automatically from a remote management station. | 02-18-2010 |
20100049838 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR AUTOMATICALLY REGISTERING NEW MACHINES IN A SOFTWARE PROVISIONING ENVIRONMENT - A provisioning server can be configured to include an inventory module. The inventory module can be configured to automatically detect new target machines that are connected to the provisioning environment. Once detected, the inventory module can be configured to determine identification information for the detected target machines. The identification information can include information that uniquely identifies the detected machines and information describing the detected machines. The inventory module can be configured to enter the identification information in an inventory of machines in the provisioning environment. Once registered, the provisioning server can perform provisioning processes on the detected machines. | 02-25-2010 |
20100049839 | RAPID DEPLOYMENT REMOTE NETWORK MONITOR - A method and apparatus for imaging a network monitor. In one embodiment, the method includes receiving information concerning a customer network to be monitored by a network monitor, and selecting a bootable image for the network monitor using the network information. The bootable image contains network monitoring software and an operating system, and can be booted on any computing device of the customer network. The method further includes providing the bootable image of the network monitor to a requester, and then receiving a fixed IP address of the network monitor from a computing device on the customer network that is designated to host the network monitor. | 02-25-2010 |
20100049840 | Method For Automatically Re-Connecting Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) Web User Interface (UI) - The present invention relates to a method for automatically re-connecting customer premises equipment (CPE) web user interfaces (UIs), capable of continuously sending a login request to a HTTP server to reduce the time for the user to wait, the method comprising: inserting a frame into a web page in a system to be re-connected and logged in; requesting a HTTP server to send a new web page through the frame after a customer premises equipment (CPE) completes software update and receives a response requesting the system to reboot; issuing a re-login request if the new web page is received, indicating the HTTP server has been started up and a new connection is made; and logging in the system. | 02-25-2010 |
20100057893 | SERVER, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC DOMAIN NAME SERVICE - Provided are a server, a system, and a method of distributing a load caused by health checks in a dynamic domain name server (DDNS) by separating a health check unit which causes the most load on the dynamic domain name server and a unit for processing a client query and registering equipment. The dynamic domain name server (DDNS) includes a main dynamic domain name server (DDNS that registers an identifier and a dynamic IP address for a piece of the equipment and responds to a client query request with the dynamic IP address of the piece of equipment; and at least one sub-DDNS for updating a status of the piece of equipment in response to a status notifying message sent from the piece of equipment. | 03-04-2010 |
20100064035 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SHARING PERFORMANCE DATA BETWEEN DIFFERENT INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY PRODUCT/SOLUTION DEPLOYMENTS - A method and system for dynamically sharing performance information among multiple computing nodes. One implementation involves dynamically obtaining performance information from deployments of an information technology (IT) product/solution at said computing nodes, and transmitting the obtained performance information to a server over a communication network for storing the obtained performance information in a knowledge database. The server operates to dynamically determine new configuration information based on the information in the database, store the new configuration in the database, and provide the new configuration information to said deployments by transmitting the new configuration information over the network. | 03-11-2010 |
20100070618 | UBIQUITOUS SENSOR NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONFIGURING THE SAME - In a ubiquitous sensor network (USN) system having a router and a sensor node connectable to a detachable memory device, a sensor network configuration information including a sensor network identification is received from the detachable memory device under control of the router. The sensor network configuration information including the sensor network identification is received from the detachable memory device under control of the sensor node. A sensor network is configured based on the sensor network identification under control of at least one of the router and the sensor node. Accordingly, the USN system may be automatically configured by using the detachable memory devices including the sensor network configuration information. | 03-18-2010 |
20100077063 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EMULATING A COMPUTING DEVICE - A system apparatus and method for emulating a computing device are provided. Operational parameters of a server may be obtained and provided to an emulating computing device. An emulating device may emulate the server. While being emulated, a server may operate in a reduced functionality mode. Emulation of a server may be transparent to client or other machines associated with an emulated server. Conditions requiring a termination of an emulation of a server may be detected. Upon detecting conditions requiring a termination of an emulation of a server, operational or other parameters may be provided to the server and the server may assume full, or other, operational mode. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-25-2010 |
20100077064 | METHOD FOR MANAGING ADDRESS SPACES AT AN OPENING OF A COMMUNICATIONS TUNNEL, CORRESPONDING TUNNEL END-POINT, AND STORAGE MEANS - A method is proposed for providing a remedy to the problem of address conflict when setting up a communications tunnel between a first tunnel end-point of a first communications sub-network and a second tunnel end-point of a second communications sub-network distinct from said first sub-network, in proposing an efficient method for the dynamic management of the address spaces of each sub-network, implemented by a tunnel end-point upon detection of a request for linking two sub-networks by a tunnel. | 03-25-2010 |
20100077065 | COMMUNICATING SYSTEM, COMMUNICATING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATING METHOD, RECORD MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - A server system in the form of an automatic vending machine is disposed in a store. A distributor has a main server. A reproducing and connecting device is disposed in a home. The server system and the main server are connected through a bi-directional dedicated line and whole music information (music data and additional information) is transmitted therebetween. The main server | 03-25-2010 |
20100082780 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURING A WEBSITE HAVING A PLURALITY OF OPERATIONAL MODES - A plurality of affiliated network of websites may be configured to log user interactions thereon. The respective logs may comprise user identification information to allow a profile aggregation service to correlate user interactions across the plurality of websites and to generate respective user profiles, which may be used to configure the websites. A context aware platform (CAP) website may be configured to provide web services for entities in a business hierarchy. The CAP website may capable of presenting content in one of a plurality of operational modes associated with a geographical granularity of the franchise hierarchy. In addition, the CAP website may be configurable according to a user profile generated using user interactions across a plurality of websites and/or on the CAP website. | 04-01-2010 |
20100082781 | NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - A method for managing a computer or communication network by obtaining connectivity configuration information from a plurality of networked devices; analyzing the connectivity configuration information from the plurality of networked devices; and, determining a state of connectivity between any two of the plurality of networked devices. | 04-01-2010 |
20100088399 | Enterprise security setup with prequalified and authenticated peer group enabled for secure DHCP and secure ARP/RARP - The method enables prevention of attacks on the network using layer-2 to layer-4 internet protocols. A secure local area network (LAN) is established having a secure peer group (SPG) of member entities with each member entity having its media access control (MAC) address locked to its own identity. A secure server within the LAN is configured as administrative and dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server enabled to issue IP addresses. When using DHCP, address resolution protocol (ARP), and reverse address resolution protocol (RARP), the identity of the requesting entity is verified and entity is confirmed as legitimate. Data sent during transactions is encrypted using the public key of the receiving entity. These steps enable verified and secure establishment of IP to MAC binding during DHCP and ARP, and an enabler for secure connectivity between members of the SPG for eliminating attacks on the secure LAN. | 04-08-2010 |
20100094978 | NAT Traversal Method and Apparatus - According to an embodiment of network address translation traversal, a server agent interfaces a private network to a public network. Private IP addresses for servers located in the private network are mapped to corresponding identifiers known to clients located outside the private network. A request message sent over the public network by a client located outside the private network is received by the server agent. The request message includes a host identifier having a first portion that identifies the server agent to the public network and a second portion that identifies a server located in the private network. The second portion of the host identifier is unknown to the public network. The request message is sent to the server identified by the second portion of the host identifier using the private IP address that maps to the second portion of the host identifier. | 04-15-2010 |
20100094979 | Network System, Server Apparatus, and Printer Driver - A network system includes a first server on a service providing side, a second server on a service receiving side, and printer hosts and printers connected to a local network on the second server side. The second server stores information on printer driver versions installed to its printer hosts and firmware installed to its printers, and determines whether these are the latest versions by transmitting version information and the second server's company information to the first server. The first server stores the latest printer driver and firmware versions and information on companies to which they may be provided, and provides the second server with the latest versions when permitted and when they are newer than the version information transmitted from the second server. | 04-15-2010 |
20100094980 | MANAGING AND PROVISIONING VIRTUAL ROUTERS - Methods and systems are provided for provisioning and managing network-based virtual private networks (VPNs). According to one embodiment, virtual routers (VRs) distributed among service processing switches are provisioned by a service management system (SMS) to support network-based customer virtual private networks (VPNs) by generating a routing configuration based on (i) site reachability information for the service processing switches and (ii) a global customer routing profile for at least one customer. A custom routing profile is received by the SMS from a customer network management system (CNMS), the custom routing profile identifies one or more routing protocols to be used for one or more segments of a network-based customer VPN. The network-based customer VPN is reconfigured by the SMS generating appropriate routing configurations for VRs partitioned to the customer based on a subset of the site reachability information associated with sites of the customer and the custom routing profile. | 04-15-2010 |
20100100611 | COMPUTER SYSTEM AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREFOR - Provided is a computer system that requires only a server administrator for construction thereof and configuration change thereof. A management server acquires connection destination interface identifiers set for external apparatuses, stores the connection destination interface identifiers into a first table, acquires specifications of server computers and identifiers of the server computers, stores the specifications and the identifiers into a second table, acquires specifications of external apparatuses, stores the specifications into the first table, receives a profile to be deployed onto one of the server computers, acquires a server computer satisfying the profile from the second table, acquires an external apparatus satisfying the profile from the first table, acquires a connection destination interface identifier from the first table, and notifies the server computer acquired from the second table of the acquired interface identifier, and the server computer updates an interface identifier of an interface by the received interface identifier. | 04-22-2010 |
20100106812 | AUTOMATING DEPLOYMENT OF SERVICE APPLICATIONS BY EXPOSING HOSTING ENVIRONMENT CONSTRAINTS - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media for automating deployment of service applications by exposing environmental constraints in a service model are provided. In general, the methods are performed in the context of a general purpose platform configured as a server cloud to run various service applications distributed thereon. Accordingly, the general purpose platform may be flexibly configured to manage varying degrees of characteristics associated with each of the various service applications. Typically, these characteristics are provided in the service model that governs the environmental constraints under which each component program of the service application operates. As such, hosting environments are selected and adapted to satisfy the environmental constraints associated with each component program. Adapting the hosting environments includes installing parameters transformed from configuration settings of each component program via map constructs, thereby refining the hosting environment to support operation of the component program. | 04-29-2010 |
20100106813 | QUORUM BASED TRANSACTIONALLY CONSISTENT MEMBERSHIP MANAGEMENT IN DISTRIBUTED STORAGE SYSTEMS - Systems and methods that restore a failed reconfiguration of nodes in a distributed environment. By analyzing reports from read/write quorums of nodes associated with a configuration, automatic recovery for data partitions can be facilitated. Moreover, a configuration manager component tracks current configurations for replication units and determines whether a reconfiguration is required (e.g., due to node failures, node recovery, replica additions/deletions, replica moves, or replica role changes, and the like.) Reconfigurations of data activated as being replicated from an old configuration to being replicated on a new configuration may be performed in a transactionally consistent manner based on dynamic quorums associated with the new configuration and the old configuration. | 04-29-2010 |
20100115067 | METHOD OF DISCOVERY AND COMMUNICATION WITH INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT - A method, a computer-readable medium, a software application, and a computer-based apparatus for initially establishing communication with a device on a local area network (LAN) in a substantially automated manner. A broadcast discovery request is transmitted over the network and the network is monitored for responses from devices connected to the network. A responding device is selected and a determination is made as to if a primary IP address of the selected device is within a predetermined subnet. Otherwise, a determination is made as to if a current alternate IP address of the selected device is within the predetermined subnet. Otherwise, a new alternate IP address is generated and may be conditionally assigned to the selected device. One of the primary IP address, the current alternate IP address, or the new alternate IP address is used to connect to the selected device for the purpose of communicating with the selected device. | 05-06-2010 |
20100115068 | Methods and systems for intelligent reconfiguration of information handling system networks - Methods and systems for automatically and/or intelligently reconfiguring a configuration of networked information handling systems based on change/s in user requirement values. A user may be allowed to adapt a system configuration originally recommended, for example, by a conventional configuration tool in order to meet a given set of user requirement parameters, or to optimize such a recommended configuration for the user. A user may be provided with a recommendation of which user requirement parameter/s needs to be changed (and optionally by how much a value of the user requirement parameter/s needs to be changed) in order to achieve a targeted networked system configuration, i.e., by changing a specific information handling system configuration variable/s. | 05-06-2010 |
20100115069 | Apparatus and method for adjusting a duty cycle to save power in a computing system - A method and system for adjusting a duty cycle to save power in a computing system is described. The system includes a network interface card (NIC) that has an active mode and a sleep mode. The NIC is coupled to an adjusting element that adjusts a duty cycle of the active time to the sleep time based at least in part on minimizing power consumption. | 05-06-2010 |
20100131621 | Session Controller and Method of Operating a Session Controller - A method of operating a Session Controller is provided. The Session Controller communicates with a client ( | 05-27-2010 |
20100131622 | UNIFIED STORAGE FOR CONFIGURING MULTIPLE NETWORKING TECHNOLOGIES - A network and connection provisioning framework for configuring and provisioning multiple aspects of network connectivity (e.g., multiple networks, media types, and/or connections). The framework may comprise a unified configuration interface that enables an administrator to configure multiple different types of network connectivity. A single configuration file comprising settings for multiple aspects of network connectivity may be generated based on preferences entered by a system administrator, or by exporting current settings from a particular computing device. Global configuration policies or other configuration settings that span multiple types of network connectivity may be also created and stored in one or more configuration files. Stand-alone media managers and/or plug-in modules may implement one or more standardized application programming interface functions so that they may interoperate with the network and connection provisioning framework. The standardized API may be used to ensure that configuration information is handled and stored in a standardized manner by different media managers and/or plug-in modules. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131623 | Configuring Display Properties Of Display Units On Remote Systems - An administrator system provided according to an aspect of the present invention enables the configuration of display properties of display units on remote systems to desired values. In an embodiment, the user can specify the desired values for multiple systems together. The remote systems may further enable the previously configured values of the display properties to be displayed on the administrator system. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131624 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIPLE CLOUD MARKETPLACE AGGREGATION - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for multiple cloud marketplace aggregation. An aggregation engine communicates with a set of multiple cloud marketplaces, each of which communicates with an associated set of clouds. A requesting entity, such as a user requesting the instantiation of a set of virtual machines, can transmit a resource request to the aggregation engine. The aggregation engine can fan out or distribute a replicated request to the set of multiple cloud marketplaces. Each cloud marketplace can receive the request and respond to indicate available resources that can be produced from their respect set of clouds. The aggregation engine can collect the responses of the various marketplaces, and can generate one or more selections based on selection logic such as best match, cost factors, or other criteria. In embodiments, a user can manually select the desired marketplace(s) to instantiate or update their virtual machine or other target objects. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131625 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REMOTE NETWORK MANAGEMENT HAVING MULTI-NODE AWARENESS - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for remote network configuration management having multi-node awareness. A management server can communicate with a set of hosts in a network, each of which can have associated target machines such as computer clients. The configuration details of the set of hosts can be stored in a set of configuration files. The configuration files can specify, for example, processor, memory, hardware, I/O, and other resources of the hosts or targets associated with the hosts. When a systems administrator or other user wishes to push an updated configuration or send new data to the set of hosts, the management server can identify versions of software and other resources to transmit and install to hosts in the set of hosts based on their particular configuration details reflected in the corresponding configuration files(s), without having to manually identify versions to be distributed to individual hosts or resolve dependencies. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131626 | Information Processing Apparatus and Method of Operating the Same - Using a service server list containing addresses of servers within a service system and an application list containing names of active applications within the service system, addresses of servers on which the active applications are running, and communication source addresses and communication destination addresses of the active applications, the following processes are carried out: specifying applications of a first layer in the service system from among applications lying within the service system; specifying applications of a second or subsequent layer in the service system from the application list and from addresses of servers on which the applications of the first layer are running; and judging applications having the same application name among applications belonging to the same layer as being of the same role for aggregation. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131627 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECONFIGURING APPLICATION SERVICES IN HOME NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method for reconfiguring services in a home network environment where plural devices included in a device group operate in conjunction with application services includes analyzing an application service script; collecting home network status information through the home network environment; and matching the application service script with the home network status information to generate a corrected application service execution plan. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131628 | MOBILE BASE STATION AND HARDWARE PLATFORM RECONFIGURING METHOD FOR THE SAME - Provided is a hardware platform reconfiguring method for a mobile base station. A control signal for controlling the download of a program is generated based on an SDR technique. A program is received from an external device. The program from the external device is downloaded to a hardware module of the mobile base station based on the SDR technique according to the control signal. | 05-27-2010 |
20100138521 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING A RESCUE ENVIRONMENT IN A SOFTWARE PROVISIONING ENVIRONMENT - A provisioning server can remotely deliver a rescue environment to a malfunctioning target machine. The provisioning server can operate in conjunction with a network management server in order to identify malfunctioning target machines, for example, target machines with damaged operating systems. Once a malfunctioning target machine is identified, the provisioning server can be configured to identify a rescue environment to repair the malfunctioning target machine and provide the rescue environment to the malfunctioning target machine. | 06-03-2010 |
20100138522 | MAPPING TOOL FOR CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS ENVIRONMENTS - Configuring of a communications environment is facilitated. A mapping tool is provided that aids in the configuring of various components of a communications environment, such as an input/output (I/O) subsystem of the environment. Data generated from an order process and a logical configuration definition are used as input to the mapping tool. The tool performs mapping and generates as output a physical configuration definition, and optionally, one or more reports. The mapping tool has a manual function, as well as an automatic function. | 06-03-2010 |
20100146086 | USING ROUTING PROTOCOLS TO MIGRATE A HOSTED ACCOUNT - Systems and methods of the present invention provide for migrating a shared hosting account and shared hosting IP address among shared hosting resources using a routing protocol by migrating a hosted account and an associated IP address from a first network resource to a second network resource. | 06-10-2010 |
20100146087 | DYNAMIC INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION SYSTEM OF RENEWABLE ENERGY FARM HARDWARE - A system for dynamic installation or uninstallation of a plurality of hardware components of a renewable energy software system, including a reviser including a hardware configuration database, at least one communication device that allows the plurality of hardware components to communicate with the hardware configuration database containing hardware configuration data for the plurality of hardware components, and a plurality of real time objects in the renewable energy software system that represent the plurality of hardware components, wherein the plurality of real time objects are automatically updated by the hardware configuration database at runtime. | 06-10-2010 |
20100153524 | ISOLATED APPLICATION SERVER - Dynamically isolating application servers, wherein only active application servers are indicated to client applications to prevent access to inactive application servers by the client applications. A central server of a distributed system determines a state of application servers in a system, and generates a list of application servers that includes all application servers of the system including an indication of the state of the application servers. The central server also generates a filtered list of application servers that excludes inactive application servers or application servers in an inactive mode. The filtered list is passed to client applications, which enables the client applications to only access the active application servers, but not access the inactive application servers. | 06-17-2010 |
20100153525 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING IP ADDRESS PROFILES - A method and server for generating an IP address profile are provided. The method may include first gathering information about an IP address associated with an Internet user based at least in part on the Internet user's activity with respect to one or more Internet sites. The information may be stored in a database in association with the IP address, and a profile associated with the IP address may be generated based at least in part on the stored information. At some point, a request may be received for the profile from a web server in response to the Internet user requesting access to an Internet site associated with the web server. In response, the profile may be transmitted to the web server, such that the web server can dynamically alter one or more configurations of the Internet site based at least in part on the profile. | 06-17-2010 |
20100161769 | Method and System for Virtual LAN Media Access Control Trouble Diagnostics - Described herein are systems and methods for automatically troubleshooting problems related to Media Access Control (“MAC”) address limit problems within a virtual local area network (“VLAN”). An exemplary method includes identifying a media access control (“MAC”) address alert within a network, referencing a translation table of a plurality of MAC addresses to detect a whether a number of MAC addresses in the network exceeds a threshold number, and providing a solution for the MAC address alert. An exemplary system includes a rules building engine for identifying a media access control (“MAC”) address alert within a network, referencing a translation table of a plurality of MAC addresses to detect a whether a number of MAC addresses in the network exceeds a threshold number, and providing a solution for the MAC address alert. A further exemplary embodiment is related to a computer readable storage medium storing a set of instructions executable by a processor, the set of instructions being operable to identify a media access control (“MAC”) address alert within a network, reference a translation table of a plurality of MAC addresses to detect a whether a number of MAC addresses in the network exceeds a threshold number, and provide a solution for the MAC address alert. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161770 | USER-CONTROLLED NETWORK VIDEO MANAGEMENT - A process and system for user-controlled configuration of an Internet protocol network. The user may supply input for generating a network classification profile, which includes a number of classes of service (COSs) for prioritizing network traffic, including video transmission. A quality of service (QOS) may be measured and compared with a COS for video transmission. Depending on the measured QOS, a network alert may be issued and a priority of packets associated with the COS for video transmission may be increased. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161771 | INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) ADDRESS VIRTUALIZATION FOR TERMINAL SERVER SESSIONS - Techniques are disclosed for virtualizing internet protocol (IP) addresses in terminal server sessions. A client component comprises a layer service provider (LSP) and a name service provider (NSP) that intercept a socket call to associate a port with a socket for a terminal server session. The client component queries a server component for a virtual IP address, and the server component determines whether the terminal server session can use a virtual IP address. Where the session can use a virtual IP address, the server returns a virtual IP address and the client component binds the socket call to the virtual IP address. Where the session cannot use a virtual IP address, the server returns an indication of that, and the client component acts as a proxy for that socket call and any future calls for that socket. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161772 | CONTROL ASSISTANCE SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM HAVING A COMPUTER PROGRAM - A control assistance system and method include transmitting identification information and part identification information of a managed apparatus, storing identification information of the managed apparatus and the part identification information in a correspondence manner, specifying a combination of parts of the managed apparatus based on a correspondence between the identification information received from the managed apparatus and the identification information stored in the database, writing the received identification information in the database according to the specified combination of parts of the managed apparatus and transmitting a signal of restricting an operation to the specified managed apparatus. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161773 | DECOUPLED INSTALLATION OF DATA MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for providing decoupled installation of data management systems used in conjunction with computer networks are disclosed. The method comprises installing data storage software in order to facilitate communication with a second computer in order to perform data storage operations. The software may be installed without knowledge of the second computer and/or the ability to communicate with the second computer. During the installation process, configuration parameters are obtained by the first computer and stored in a data structure. At least a portion of the configuration parameters recorded in the data structure is also provided to the second computer. The first and second computers subsequently communicate in order to register the first computer for use with the second computer. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161774 | Self-Cleansing Secure DNS Server - Disclosed is a self-cleansing intrusion tolerance-domain name systems system comprising at least three DNS servers, at least four storage systems accessible by the DNS servers, a communications link, a message transfer mechanism, and a self-cleansing mechanism. The storage systems include at least three online storage systems and at least one offline storage system. The communications link can connect the DNS servers with the storage systems, as well as connect the DNS servers with a local area network, which can connect the DNS servers with an external network. The message transfer mechanism can rotate the DNS servers into a plurality of roles, including a primary role, a secondary role, a designated role, and a self-cleansing role. The self-cleansing mechanism can be used to perform the self-cleansing role. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161775 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE MULTIMEDIA RECEPTION AND TRANSMISSION IN COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENTS - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for configuration of adaptive integrated circuitry, to provide one or more operating modes or other functionality in a communication device, such as a cellular telephone, a GSM telephone, another type of mobile telephone or mobile station, or any other type of media communication device, including video, voice or radio, or other forms of multimedia. The adaptive integrated circuitry is configured and reconfigured for multiple tasks, such as channel acquisition, voice transmission, or multimedia and other data processing. In the preferred embodiment, the configuration and reconfiguration occurs to adaptively optimize the performance of the particular activity over time, such as to increase the speed of channel acquisition, increase throughput rates, increase perceived voice and media quality, and decrease the rate of dropped communication sessions. | 06-24-2010 |
20100174807 | System and method for providing configuration synchronicity - Systems and methods for providing configuration synchronicity is provided. In exemplary embodiments, a configuration file is generated based on received configuration information. The configuration file may then be stored and queued up for download to at least one communication server to configure the communication server. Subsequently, a verification process is performed to confirm that the configuration file is correctly written to disk by the communication server. | 07-08-2010 |
20100174808 | NETWORK PRESENCE OFFLOADS TO NETWORK INTERFACE - A computing device that has a network interface that performs a subset of possible networking functions while the computing device is in a sleep mode. The subset of functions may be simply implemented on the network interface, yet to substantially reduce the frequency with which the computing device has to wake up to perform networking functions. The subset of functions may be selected to maintain a network presence of the computing device while the device is in sleep mode, and may include responding to requests for MAC information, sending keep-alive messages or exchanging security information that, in accordance with network protocols, has a limited lifetime that would otherwise expire while the computing device is in sleep mode. | 07-08-2010 |
20100174809 | METHOD OF UPDATING REPEATEDLY-TRANSMITTED INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of updating repeatedly-transmitted information from a network to a user equipment in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The network transmits an indicator to the user equipment, the indicator indicating that repeatedly-transmitted information has been updated, and transmits the updated repeatedly-transmitted information to the user equipment in accordance with the indicator. The user equipment receives the updated repeatedly-transmitted information only if it receives an indicator from the network, the indicator indicating that the repeatedly-transmitted information has been updated. | 07-08-2010 |
20100185755 | Systems and Methods for Changing The Address of an Interface - In one aspect, the invention provides a method of reconfiguring a network interface. In some embodiments, this method includes the following steps: receiving information indicating that an operator desires to remove a first network address from the network interface and assign a second network address to the network interface; and in response to receiving the information, providing a notification to at least one computer program executing in the node such that the computer programs can take a necessary measure (e.g., close a connection that uses the first network address). | 07-22-2010 |
20100185756 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE NODE, SERVER AND NODE - A technique is disclosed of, when a mobile node has moved outside of a domain using a local address, enabling an old path of the mobile node in the domain to be torn down without using special means such as a STUN server. According to this technique, a MN | 07-22-2010 |
20100191840 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INITIALIZING CABLE MODEMS - A system includes a first device and a second device. The first device is configured to transmit a discover message on a first upstream channel, where the discover message includes information representing capabilities of the first device. The second device is configured to receive the discover message from the first device and determine whether to switch the first device to a second upstream channel based on the capabilities information in the discover message. The second device makes the determination before a registration of the first device. The second device transmits a message to the first device instructing the first device to switch to the second upstream channel based on a result of the determination. | 07-29-2010 |
20100198947 | System and Method for Dynamically Processing Electronic Data Between Multiple Data Sources - According to an embodiment of the disclosure, a method for dynamically processing electronic data between multiple data sources comprises obtaining a first data set from a data source. A run-time updateable configuration file is consulted to determine a first destination for the first data set. The first data set is transmitted to the first destination and the run-time updateable configuration file is again consulted at the first destination to determine instructions for processing of the first data set, the instructions for processing the first data set comprising conversion information and the first destination being a data translator. The data translator converts the first data set according to the conversion information to yield a processed first data set. The run-time updateable configuration file is again consulted to determine a second destination for the processed first data set, whereupon the processed first data set is transmitted to the second destination. A remote administrator computer may update the run-time updateable configuration file. | 08-05-2010 |
20100205283 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for updating system information in a broadband wireless communication system in which data is transmitted and received via a superframe, includes: receiving information from a base station by means of superframes including a primary superframe header (P-SFH) and a secondary superframe header (S-SFH), wherein the information including control information transmitted via an information element of the P-SFH (P-SFH IE) and system information transmitted via at least one of information element of a subpacket (SP) of the S-SFH (S-SFH SP IE); decoding the P-SFH IE, wherein the P-SFH IE including a scheduling information bitmap indicating a transmitted S-SFH SP IEs in the superframe, a change count (CC) of the S-SFH, and a SP change bitmap indicating changing status of the S-SFH SP IEs; comparing the received CC with a previously stored CC; checking the S-SFH SP change bitmap, if there is a difference between the received CC and the stored CC; and decoding and updating corresponding SP IE of the S-SFH based on the checking result. | 08-12-2010 |
20100211657 | Automatic Extension of Distributed Managed Ranges in a Multi-Master System - A method and system for automatic extension of a distributed numeric range in a multi-master system are described. In one embodiment, each of a plurality of master servers is provided with a unique range of numeric values that can be assigned to clients. Each master server can dynamically extend its associated range when the range is about to be exhausted. For example, a first master server can send a range request to a second master server to obtain additional numeric values when the number of values in its associated range is below a threshold. After receipt of the additional numeric values from the second master server, the first master server updates its associated range and assigns the additional numeric values to the clients. | 08-19-2010 |
20100211658 | DYNAMIC FIREWALL CONFIGURATION - A method is disclosed that includes detecting a network entity and determining a type of the detected network entity. The method includes retrieving firewall configuration information based on at least the type of the network entity. Based on the firewall configuration information, a configuration of a firewall at a host is automatically and dynamically modified. | 08-19-2010 |
20100211659 | Router and method for avoiding IP address conflicts - A router and a method for avoiding the IP address conflict are disclosed. The method includes the following steps. First, once the router obtains an IP address as its WAN IP address, the network bits of the WAN IP address and the network bits of an IP pool of the router are retrieved. Then, it follows to determine whether the network bits of the WAN IP address is identical to that of the IP pool, and if yes, modify the network bits of the IP pool together with a LAN IP address of the router to be different from that of the WAN IP address. After that, an instruction is transmitted to the client terminals associated with the router. Upon reception of the instruction, the client terminals replace the old IP addresses with the new IP addresses assigned from the router in accordance with Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. | 08-19-2010 |
20100211660 | System and method for pushing content to a terminal utilizing a network-initiated data service technique - A system is provided for pushing content to a terminal located within a mobile network or a private network. The system includes a network node, such as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) proxy, located across a public network from the network including the terminal. The network node is capable of subscribing to a push service on behalf of the terminal such that the network node is also capable of receiving push content in accordance with the push service. Thereafter, the network node is capable of establishing a network-initiated data session with the terminal. In response to the network-initiated data session, the network node is further capable of registering the terminal such that the terminal is capable of receiving the push content based upon the registration. | 08-19-2010 |
20100217843 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COLLECTING AND ALTERING FIRMWARE CONFIGURATIONS OF TARGET MACHINES IN A SOFTWARE PROVISIONING ENVIRONMENT - A provisioning server can provide and interact with a firmware tool on target machines. The firmware toot can communicate with the firmware of the target machines and collect data representing the configuration of the firmware of the target machines, independent of the types of the target machines. To communicate independent of the type of target machine, the firmware tool can include a translation library. The translation library enables the firmware tool to receive common instructions for interacting with firmware and convert those common instructions into specific instructions that are compatible with different types of the target machines. | 08-26-2010 |
20100217844 | DEVICE CONNECTABLE TO NETWORK AND METHOD - A device that is connectable to a network includes a storage unit that stores first setting information related to a accessible website in association with an identifier of the website, and a determination unit that determines whether or not the website is accessible by comparing the first setting information to second setting information that is set in the device before access to the website is performed while the device is connected to the network. | 08-26-2010 |
20100217845 | Coordinated Reboot Mechanism Reducing Service Disruption in Network Environment - In one embodiment, a method includes identifying a plurality of network elements for reinitiation, wherein the network elements are operative to manage at least one child element; selecting a first network element from the plurality of network elements, transmitting a disable message to the first network element; determining whether the at least one child element has migrated to one or more alternate network elements; and conditionally transmitting a reinitiation message to the first network element. | 08-26-2010 |
20100217846 | MANAGING CLIENT CONFIGURATION SETTINGS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A GUI (Graphical User Interface) Manager is used by a network administrator to fill-in predefined templates. The administrator does not need to compile, debug or write a single line of scripting code. The GUI manager has a “select the box” and “point and click” and “fill-in the blank” approach for selecting computer settings. The predefined configuration and/or template(s) are used by a logon script program on a client system to manage the configuration of resources on at least one client. There are three levels of resources that can be managed. The first type of resource is an operating system. The second type of resource is an application resource. And the third type of resource is to redirect a resource on the client to a resource on a network such as a drive letter mapping. | 08-26-2010 |
20100223365 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PROXY BINDING OF A MOBILE NODE - A method for controlling proxy binding of a mobile node in a network that supports network-based mobility management, wherein the mobile node includes at least one network interface that is employed for attaching to the network via an access router, wherein a mobile node's binding for a network interface is initiated by a binding request, is characterized in that the mobile node's binding for a new network interface is qualified as a preliminary binding, which is not employed for downlink data transmission, and that the mobile node's preliminary binding is activated, after the mobile node's new network interface has been configured. | 09-02-2010 |
20100228839 | EFFICIENT ON-DEMAND PROVISIONING OF SERVERS FOR SPECIFIC SOFTWARE SETS - An administrator system provided according to an aspect of the present invention facilitates efficient provisioning of servers for specific software sets. In an embodiment containing clusters of servers requiring execution of corresponding set of software, an administrator system selects a server from a free server pool and installs on the selected server only those of the required set of softwares that are not already installed on the selected server. As a result, the selected server can quickly be added to a desired cluster. Such a feature is particularly useful in an environment where different application environments are provided in different cluster of systems and many servers are available in the form of free server pools for addition to the desired clusters. | 09-09-2010 |
20100228840 | PORT POOLING - In one embodiment, methods and systems for port pooling are described. An interface may communicate with at least one physical server. The at least one physical server may host a plurality of virtual servers and be connectable via a plurality of gateway ports to a storage area network (SAN). A virtual server manager configured to arrange the plurality of gateway ports in a plurality of port pools, define a virtual server group including a plurality of virtual servers, associate each virtual server with one or more port pools, the one or more port pools defining available gateway ports for access by the particular virtual server; and provide configuration instructions to allow the particular virtual server to communicate with the SAN through the available gateway ports. | 09-09-2010 |
20100235479 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING ENTITIES TO BE UPGRADED, ADDED OR REMOVED - Node, computer software and method for identifying a target set of entities associated with a first configuration of a computer system that are to be modified for arriving at a second configuration of the computer system. The method includes selecting a single service, determining a characteristic of the single service, wherein the characteristic of the service is indicative of whether the single service is provided in both the first and second configurations, only in the first configuration or only in the second configuration, identifying, based on the selected service and its characteristic, one or two corresponding entity groups that are related to the single service, and mapping subsets of entities associated with the identified corresponding entity groups for transitioning the computer system from the first configuration to the second configuration. | 09-16-2010 |
20100235480 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIMPLY CONFIGURING A SUBSCRIBER APPLIANCE FOR PERFORMING A SERVICE CONTROLLED BY A SEPARATE SERVICE PROVIDER - A method and apparatus for configuring an appliance, such as a network node, for performing s service, such as communicating with a network, controlled by a service provider include inserting into an Ethernet port on the appliance an Ethernet couple on a device that is usually small compared to the appliance. The device is configured to send through the Ethernet couple without human intervention an Internet Protocol (IP) data packet that is directed to a logical port of an established standard, such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) port | 09-16-2010 |
20100250716 | NETWORK COMPRISING A PLURALITY OF DEVICES AND ROOT DEVICE AND METHOD FOR ASSIGNING A NETWORK ADDRESS - The present invention relates to a network comprising one or more devices, each device having an address, said address comprising a device address being unique for each device within said network and a network address being common to all devices within said network. | 09-30-2010 |
20100250717 | SERVER SYSTEM, COLLECTIVE SERVER APPARATUS, AND MAC ADDRESS MANAGEMENT METHOD - Provided is a server system, a collective server apparatus, and a MAC address management method that enables to change a MAC address and a flexible assignment of a MAC address. A server system according to the present invention includes a plurality of network control units that control communication performed with another device via a network, an address storage unit that stores a MAC address to be assigned to the network control unit, an assignment change processing unit that changes an assignment of the MAC address stored in the address storage unit and writes in the address storage unit, and an assignment execution unit that specifies the assignment stored in the address storage unit to each of the network control units. | 09-30-2010 |
20100250718 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LIVE REPLICATION - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for live replication. In one embodiment, the method comprises replicating a source server to create a replica server, assigning a routable Internet Protocol (IP) address to the replica server; and migrating one or more, but not all, on-going connections from the source server to the replica server. | 09-30-2010 |
20100262681 | REMOTE WAKE-UP METHOD, HOST TO BE REMOTELY AWAKED, AND WAKE-UP MANAGEMENT SERVER - A remote wake-up method is used between a first host, a second host, a server and the internet. The remote wake-up method includes the following steps. Firstly, the first host communicates with the server through the internet and an identity register procedure is performed. Then, the second host communicates with the server through the internet, an identity authentication procedure is implemented, and the server is triggered to issue a wake-up packet to the first host when the first host is in a wake-up waiting status. Afterwards, the first host enters a normal working status in response to the wake-up packet. | 10-14-2010 |
20100262682 | METHOD FOR SELECTING AN AIR INTERFACE ON A MULTI-MODE WIRELESS DEVICE - A method for selecting an air interface on a multi-mode wireless device capable of communicating over a plurality of air interfaces. The method comprising starting a first application and selecting a first application specific access list of a set of application specific access lists, the first application specific access list corresponding to the first application. The method also comprising selecting a first active network from the first application access specific list, the first network representing an available and most desirable network for the first application in the first application specific access list. The method further activating the first active network for use by the first application and switching from the first active network to a second active network if a user switches from the first application to a second application, wherein the first active network and the second active network are ascertained based on the set of application specific access lists. | 10-14-2010 |
20100268803 | RAPID PROVISIONING OF NETWORK DEVICES USING AUTOMATED CONFIGURATION - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving a selection of a configuration template and a second network node to serve a first network node, the configuration template including at least one template field; receiving at least one value for the at least one template field of the configuration template; configuring the first network node according to the configuration template and the at least one value; receiving, in the network management system, configured device information from the first network node; using the configured device information to identify at least one configuration operation to perform on the second network node to provide connectivity to the first network node; generating at least one configuration module for performing the at least one configuration operation; and applying the at least one configuration module to the second network node. | 10-21-2010 |
20100274876 | NETWORK INTERFACE DEVICE WITH MEMORY MANAGEMENT CAPABILITIES - An input/output (I/O) device includes a host interface for connection to a host device having a memory and a network interface, which is configured to receive, over a network, data packets associated with I/O operations directed to specified virtual addresses in the memory. Packet processing hardware is configured to translate the virtual addresses into physical addresses and to perform the I/O operations using the physical addresses, and upon an occurrence of a page fault in translating one of the virtual addresses, to transmit a response packet over the network to a source of the data packets so as to cause the source to refrain from transmitting further data packets while the page fault is serviced. | 10-28-2010 |
20100281142 | System and methods for buffering of real-time data streams - A computer-implemented system and methods for buffering of real-time data streams are disclosed. The apparatus and method in an example embodiment includes: configuring a content server for an initial content quality type associated with a content stream; receiving the content stream with the initial content quality type from a content feed; detecting a low watermark condition as the content stream is played on a playback device; reconfiguring the content server for a modified content quality type associated with the content stream while receipt of the content stream is in progress; and receiving the content stream with the modified content quality type from the content feed. | 11-04-2010 |
20100281143 | MAINTAINING MOBILE DEVICE OPERATIONS - Systems, methods, and computer program products are provided for synchronizing device settings at a mobile device with settings held at a database in a synchronization server. This settings exchange mechanism is further extended to provide versioning information used in an auto upgrade process, in which the synchronization server is configured to push updates to the mobile device. Additional systems, methods, and computer program products are provided for configuring logging preferences on the mobile device from a server, and further for silently retrieving logs generated on the mobile device to the server. | 11-04-2010 |
20100281144 | CONTROL DEVICE FOR A SYSTEM-ON-CHIP AND CORRESPONDING METHOD - A system such as a “System-on-Chip” includes an interconnection network, a set of initiator modules for transmitting data towards the interconnection network and at least one communication arbiter for deciding, as a function of a set of configuration values, which transmissions of the initiator modules have access to the interconnection network. At least one configuration value is associated with each initiator module. A control device coupled to at least one of the initiator modules detects a communication status associated with the transmissions of the coupled initiator and generates a communication status signal whose value is representative of such status, determines a filtered value representative of a series of the values of the communication status signal, and selectively varies one of the configuration values as a function of the filtered value. | 11-04-2010 |
20100281145 | AUTONOMOUS CONTROL IN A PROGRAMMABLE SYSTEM - A programmable system includes a programmable analog system that is reconfigurable to perform various analog operations, and includes a programmable digital system that is reconfigurable to perform various digital operations. The programmable system also includes a microcontroller capable of reconfiguring and controlling the programmable analog system and the programmable digital system. The programmable digital system is configured to control the programmable analog system autonomously of the microcontroller. | 11-04-2010 |
20100281146 | DYNAMIC DOMAIN NAME SERVICE SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION METHOD - A dynamic domain name service (DDNS) system and an automatic registration method are described. The system includes a network device and a dynamic domain name server (DNS). The method includes the following steps. Account information is input through a user interface of the network device. The network device is connected to a corresponding dynamic DNS through Internet according to the account information and is registered. The registered network device continuously updates an IP address automatically for the dynamic DNS. | 11-04-2010 |
20100287263 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR APPLICATION MIGRATION IN A CLOUD - A method and system for managing an application in a cloud data center by monitoring the bandwidth of a subnet of which the primary operating instance of an application is a member. If a severe deterioration in the bandwidth caused by an over consumption of the subnet resources from other subnet constituents is detected, a suitable secondary instance in an alternate, uncompromised subnet is located and primary operation of the application is transferred from the former primary operating instance to the secondary instance. The secondary instance can be pre-launched or dynamically requisitioned in the cloud data center. | 11-11-2010 |
20100287264 | ENHANCED NETWORK ADAPTER FRAMEWORK - An enhanced network adapter framework, in which parameters are stored in a configuration table, the parameters being customized for a network and an application. A network adapter customized for the network and the application is instantiated based on invoking a generic network adapter which externally references the configuration table, and communication between the application and the network is effected using the instantiated network adapter. | 11-11-2010 |
20100287265 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RESTORING AT LEAST ONE SETTING - A method and devices for restoring at least one setting are provided, the client device receives a code generated by a management device based on a time value and a parameter value that uniquely identifies the client device; the client device determines whether the code is valid; and if the code is valid the client device restores the at least one setting of the client device. It provides a convenient way to restore at least one setting of a client device. | 11-11-2010 |
20100293257 | ACTIVELY UPDATING CLIENTS WITH SELECTED DATA - In an embodiment, a data processing apparatus comprising one or more electronic digital processors; Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server logic coupled to the one or more processors; an active leasequery channel response logic coupled to the DHCP server logic which when executed causes the one or more processors to perform receiving, from a particular DHCP client among a plurality of DHCP clients, an active leasequery initiation message requesting the DHCP server logic to actively send update messages about changes in network address leases that the DHCP server logic manages; wherein the active leasequery initiation message comprises a channel identifier value; determining whether the channel identifier value matches a client class that the DHCP server logic manages; in response to determining that the channel identifier value does match a client class identifier that the DHCP server logic manages, sending, to the particular DHCP client, one or more DHCP response messages describing any changes in network address leases that the DHCP server logic performs only for a subset of the DHCP clients that are in the matched client class. | 11-18-2010 |
20100293258 | DYNAMIC OPTIMIZATION OF MOBILE SERVICES - A method, system, and article of manufacture are disclosed for transforming a service process definition. This service process definition is comprised of computer readable code. The method comprises the steps of expressing a given set of assumptions in a computer readable code; and transforming said process definition by using a processing unit to apply said assumptions to said process definition to change the configuration of the process definition. The process definition may be transformed by using factors relating to the specific context in or for which the process definition is executed. Also, the process definition may be transformed by identifying, in a flow diagram for the service process definition, flows to which the assumptions apply, and applying program rewriting techniques to those identified flows. | 11-18-2010 |
20100293259 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PROVIDING MULTI-LAYERED EXTENSIBLE PROTOCOL INTERFACE AND RELATED METHODS - A communications system may include data storage devices each using at least one of a plurality of different operating protocols, and mobile wireless communications devices (MWCDs) for accessing the data storage devices and each using at least one of the different operating protocols. The system may further include a protocol interface device, which may include a protocol engine module for communicating with the data storage devices using respective operating protocols. The protocol interface device may further include a front-end proxy module coupled to the protocol engine. The front-end proxy module may include a respective proxy module for communicating with the MWCDs using each different operating protocol. The front-end proxy module may also include one or more common core service modules coupled to the proxy modules and communicating therewith at a first layer, and communicating with the protocol engine module at a second layer lower than the first layer. | 11-18-2010 |
20100299416 | SYSTEM FOR LOCATING COMPUTING DEVICES - Provided embodiments include a device, a system, an article of manufacture, and a method. A system is provided. The system includes a transmit module, an interface module, and a control module. The transmit module receives first data for transmitting the first data over a network. The interface module interfaces the transmit module to the network. The interface module has a network address that identifies the interface module on the network. The control module receives a control signal to transmit the first data over the network. The control module outputs the network address to the transmit module when the control signal is received. The transmit module transmits the first data that includes the network address over the network. | 11-25-2010 |
20100299417 | CONFIGURING A NETWORK CONNECTION - A communication system for accessing media items via a display device. A receiver is coupled to the display device and a transmitter is coupled to a computer system. Media items stored locally on the computer system and/or remotely on a remote server may be wirelessly transferred from the transmitter to the receiver for display on the display device. In addition, the transmitter and the receiver may be pre-paired prior to delivery to the user, allowing for the network to be configured without any user input. Advantageously, embodiments provide a user with the ability to conveniently view content stored on a computer or a web server without the user having to perform any wireless network setup procedures. | 11-25-2010 |
20100299418 | CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OVER NOTIFICATION PROCESSING IN OMA DM - A method and a device are configured to receive a signal from a server to perform administrative and configuration control. During Open Mobile Alliance (OMA) Device Management (DM) session, the device receives either an administrative or configuration signal from the server. The administrative signal may instruct the device to inhibit or allow a trigger processing capability. The configuration signal may instruct the device to apply a set of parameters to the device settings that are related to notification processing. | 11-25-2010 |
20100299419 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A SELF ORGANIZING NETWORK - Systems and methods are disclosed that provide self management of network devices in a communication network. These management abilities allow a network device to perform functions, for example, that improve resource distribution, allow for maintenance and upgrades, and provide session management and policy enforcement in a coherent and organized fashion. In a self organizing network (SON), some network devices can be configured to provide self-configuration and self-optimizing capabilities to provide the ability to automate certain operations and management functions and system management functions. The SON incorporates self-configuration, self-optimization, monitoring, and operation management to allow the network devices to be inserted into the network and operate with little to no human intervention. | 11-25-2010 |
20100306352 | NETWORK DEVICE PROVISIONING - Systems, methods and other embodiments associated with network device provisioning are described. One example method includes storing a set of device specific identification data in a network device. The example method may also include storing an association between the network device and a set of device specific provisioning data. The example method may also include providing the set of device specific provisioning data to the network device. The set of device specific provisioning data may be provided in response to receiving a provisioning data request from the network device. | 12-02-2010 |
20100306353 | CAPACITY MANAGEMENT FOR DATA NETWORKS - A method of processing capacity information is disclosed. The capacity information relates to data capacity in a data network in which a consumer circuit is carried on, and consumes bandwidth made available by, a bearer circuit. The method comprises storing, in a network information database, an entity representing the bearer circuit, and associating capacity information with the bearer circuit entity specifying a first bandwidth quantity defining a quantity of bandwidth made available by the bearer circuit. Also stored is an entity representing the consumer circuit, and capacity information is associated with the consumer circuit entity specifying a second bandwidth quantity defining a quantity of bandwidth allocated to the consumer circuit. The consumer capacity information is then associated with the bearer capacity information in the database to indicate that the second bandwidth quantity allocated to the consumer circuit is to be consumed from the first bandwidth quantity made available by the bearer circuit. The resulting capacity model can be used to support service provisioning, service assurance and SLA management, network engineering and network planning processes. | 12-02-2010 |
20100312865 | ASYNCHRONOUS UPDATE OF VIRTUALIZED APPLICATIONS - A determination is made as to whether an updated image for an outdated virtualized application is available on a server. If it is determined that the updated image is available, then a background download operation configured to retrieve the updated image from the server is initiated. Another determination is made as to whether the outdated virtualized application is being utilized. After the background download operation is complete, if it is determined that the outdated virtualized application is not being utilized, then the outdated virtualized application is transformed to a current virtualized application by replacing at least a portion of the outdated virtualized application with the updated image. The outdated virtualized application and the current virtualized application are configured to be executed on the computer without installation on a computer. | 12-09-2010 |
20100312866 | REDUNDANCY PAIR DETECTING METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RECORDING MEDIUM FOR RECORDING REDUNDANCY PAIR DETECTION PROGRAM - A communication device to detect combinations of redundantizable network adapters from among a plurality of network adapters includes an acquiring unit for acquiring respective MAC addresses, a transmitting unit for setting a first network adapter included in the plurality of network adapters as a transmit source and the respective network adapters as transmit destinations and transmitting a probe packet from the transmit source to the transmit destinations at the layer 2 level using the MAC addresses, an extracting unit for extracting an second network adapter, that is, the network adapter which has received the probe packet from among the network adapters other than the first network adapter, and a detecting unit for detecting the first network adapter and the second network adapter as combinations of the redundantizable network adapters. | 12-09-2010 |
20100312867 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A device management apparatus that enables an information obtaining apparatus to obtain device information from a device management apparatus connected to a first network other than a second network to which the information obtaining apparatus is connected, and manage devices. A communication protocol that can be used by the information obtaining apparatus is extracted from a device information obtaining request from the information obtaining apparatus. When a device connected to the first network is not operating using the communication protocol and is able to activate the communication protocol, the device is requested to activate the communication protocol. When the communication protocol has been successfully activated, and it is necessary to change access settings for the device, the device is requested to change the access settings. When the access settings have been successfully changed, a response concerning device information is created and sent to the information obtaining apparatus. | 12-09-2010 |
20100318637 | PROCESS FOR OPTIMIZING SOFTWARE COMPONENTS FOR AN ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING (ERP) APPLICATION SAP ON MULTIPROCESSOR SERVERS - In a three-tier ERP implementation, multiple servers are interconnected through one or more network infrastructure. Users may observe poor performance due to the complexity and the number of interconnected components in the implementation. Herein is devised a process for tuning the software component by applying tuning techniques to the OS, SAP application and Database Management System software. For each component, the process identifies potential tuning opportunities of various subcomponents. The process is iterated numerous times through all software components while applying the tuning techniques to derive the most optimal performance for the ERP implementation. | 12-16-2010 |
20100325249 | PLUGGABLE CONTACT RESOLUTION - Methods, devices, and systems are provided for taking a pluggable extension and applying it to a unique set of a user population to handle their preferred and user-centric alerting relationships. More particularly, the pluggable extension allows a user to have their personalized contact resolution algorithm applied by a server to calls initiated by them or directed toward. The contact resolution algorithm is pluggable to any server and does not need to be built into the server itself. Moreover, multiple users can refer to and use the same pluggable contact resolution algorithm. | 12-23-2010 |
20100325250 | CHARACTERIZING UNREGISTERED DOMAIN NAMES - Methods and apparatus for characterizing unregistered domain names are provided. One embodiment includes obtaining a list of a plurality of resolution requests for the unregistered domain names, determining a number of occurrences of each of the unregistered domain names, computing a plurality of groupings based on the number of occurrences, and associating a score with each of the unregistered domain names. | 12-23-2010 |
20100325251 | COMPUTER LINK METHOD AND COMPUTER SYSTEM - A computer system includes: a load information exchanging unit that exchanges load information on a regular basis to find a problem in a load distribution server on the other end of a link; a problem information communicating unit that transmits the information about the problem to a directory server ( | 12-23-2010 |
20100332629 | SECURE CUSTOM APPLICATION CLOUD COMPUTING ARCHITECTURE - A secure custom application cloud computing architecture which facilitates virtually seamless migration of custom applications to and from a cloud computing environment in response to user needs. The architecture identifies the custom applications and the associated network architecture needed to support the applications. The network architecture is then replicated in the cloud and the custom applications are migrated thereto. In some embodiments, the application can be archived while in the cloud and disabled, then later reenabled when needed. | 12-30-2010 |
20100332630 | Managing Computer Network Resources - Software agents are assigned goals in accordance with network policies that define a desired operational characteristic of a computer network. A software agent achieves its assigned goal by executing a predefined task. An assigned goal may be dynamically modified as necessary based on the actual operational characteristics of the network. The software agent may request further policy if it cannot achieve its assigned goal by performing the predefined task. | 12-30-2010 |
20110004676 | VIRTUAL APPLIANCE DEPLOYING SYSTEM - In deployment of a virtual appliance to a physical server, a setting file required for the virtual appliance to operate is automatically generated based on a configuration of the physical server and a network configuration, and connection relation between the virtual appliances. Specifically, resource data assigned to the virtual appliance and connection data are registered on a configuration data database, and a template of the setting file is set in advance to a virtual machine image for the virtual appliance. In the deployment of the virtual appliance to the physical server, optional attributes described in the template of the setting file are replaced by specific setting values (actual data) by using the resource data and the connection data stored in the configuration data database, to generate the setting file. | 01-06-2011 |
20110004677 | System and method for Implementing PNRP Locality - A method is provided for a host node in a computer network to determine its coordinates in a d-dimensional network space, comprising discovering an address of a peer node in the network, measuring network latency between the host node and the peer node, determining whether network latency has been measured for at least d+1 peer nodes, where, if network latency has not been measured for at least d+1 peer nodes, estimating the network coordinates of the host node, and where, if network latency has been measured for at least d+1 peer nodes, calculating the network coordinates of the host node using d+1 measured latencies. | 01-06-2011 |
20110010436 | CONFIGURATION-INFORMATION SETTING METHOD AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - According to an aspect of the embodiments, a configuration-information setting method and apparatus is provided for setting system configuration information of a computer server within an information processing device by recognizing a mounted hardware configuration in the information processing device using a computer processor within the information processing device, using the computer processor to read device configuration information of the information processing device and input-and-output configuration information of an input-and-output unit to be used in the information processing device from a storage unit and to compare device configuration information with input-and-output configuration information, and to set the system configuration information by using the computer processor when the mounted hardware configuration satisfies the device configuration information indicated in the device configuration information file and/or the input-and-output configuration information indicated in the input-and-output configuration information file. | 01-13-2011 |
20110022689 | MANAGING LINEAR MULTIMEDIA CONTENT DELIVERY - Users are assigned to virtual groups. Virtual groups are associated with server assets. Achieving load-balancing during the delivery of linear multimedia content, for example, may be achieved through reassigning users to different virtual groups. Server assets can include server clusters that are assigned to the virtual groups. New hardware can be added to server assets without having to directly associate users to the new hardware. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022690 | COMMUNICATING DATA FROM A SOURCE DEVICE TO A TERMINAL - In a method for receiving data from a source device in a terminal having a terminal identifier, a code section lookup table is received from the source device, in which the code section lookup table contains a correlation between terminal labels and specific code sections. In addition, a determination as to whether the terminal identifier of the terminal matches a terminal label listed in the code section lookup table is made, and if there is a match, the specific code section corresponding to the matching terminal label is identified and downloaded from the source device. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022691 | OPTIMIZING FIBRE CHANNEL ZONESET CONFIGURATION AND ACTIVATION - In an example embodiment, a new qualifier is added to members in a Fibre Channel zone to specify whether each member is a target or initiator and in another embodiment a time-range attribute is added to a zone in the zoneset. When the zoneset is applied the number of ACL entries that must be programmed is reduced from k×(k−1) entries to 2(k−1) entries for a zone with k members where k−1 members are of one type (e.g. initiators) and one of the members is of a different type (e.g., a tape device). The time-range attribute is enforced by zone server software and enhances security by, for example, limiting access to sensitive data to specified times. In another embodiment, an incremental zoneset activation protocol is implemented where a hash of a zoneset is created by a switch updating the zoneset and the hash and ID of the switch updating the zoneset are sent to all other switches in the fabric when the zoneset is propagated. The hash and switch ID are stored in persistent storage at all switches in the fabric. When a target zoneset is updated by a source switch only the incremental change is propagated to other switches in the fabric along with the hash and switch ID of the target zoneset. Each switch checks a received hash and switch ID against its stored hash and switch ID to assure that the stored local zoneset is the same as the target zoneset before applying the incremental change. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022692 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING AND CONTROLLING USER EXPERIENCE IN A NETWORK - Aspects of a method and system for determining and controlling user experience in a network may comprise a management entity that coordinates operation of one or more endpoint devices. One or more parameters associated with a content type may be received from the one or more endpoint devices by the management entity. The management entity may utilize the received one or more parameters associated with the content type to determine configuration information for the one or more endpoint devices. The content type may specify a type of media content that is handled by the one or more endpoint devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110029645 | SECURE DHCP PROCESSING FOR LAYER TWO ACCESS NETWORKS - In general, this disclosure describes network security techniques that may accommodate legitimate movement of a subscriber device while preventing MAC collisions that may result from configuration errors or MAC spoofing attempts. MAC spoofing may result in packets directed to one subscriber device being sent instead to another subscriber device. By modifying an access node or a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server to allow only authorized subscriber devices on the access network, layer two collisions (“MAC collisions”) may be prevented. | 02-03-2011 |
20110035472 | DESKTOP SECURE VIDEO TELECONFERENCING - Method, system, and computer program product example embodiments of the invention are disclosed to provide multi-network secure video teleconferencing (VTC) for VTC endpoints. The embodiments of the invention provide distributed components to perform the necessary operations, rather than co-locating the components in the VTC endpoint. Some system components are located with the VTC endpoint, other components are placed in a network operations center (NOC) and still other components are distributed on the various networks. | 02-10-2011 |
20110035473 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING FUNCTION UNIT OF COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH A COMPUTER - A communication device is capable of communicating with a computer, and includes a function unit, a storage unit, a determining module, and a sending module. The storage unit stores a driver of the function unit therein, and the driver is capable of making the function unit compatible with the computer after installed to the computer. The determining module is capable of determining the function unit to be compatible with the computer. The sending module is capable of sending the driver to the computer when the function unit is determined by the determining module. | 02-10-2011 |
20110035474 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MATCHING AND REPAIRING NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Aspects of a method and system for matching and repairing network configuration are provided. In this regard, one or more circuits and/or processors may be operable to determine a configuration of one or more parameters in a plurality of devices along a network path, and detect whether any of the one or more parameters are configured such that communication between the plurality of devices is disabled and/or suboptimal. The devices may comprise at least one server and one or more of a network switch, a network bridge, and a router. In instances that one or more parameters are incompatibly or sub-optimally configured, a notification of the incompatibility may be communicated to a network management entity and/or one or more messages may be generated to reconfigure the one or more parameters in one or more of the plurality of devices. The determining and/or detecting may be performed automatically in response to various events. | 02-10-2011 |
20110035475 | EFFICIENT SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD TO CONFIGURABLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An efficient software download to a configurable communication device is disclosed herein. The method of efficiently downloading software begins with a step of receiving a request to configure a communication device to run a communication application. The communication device being configured has a plurality of function blocks with a fixed portion of hardware and a flexible portion of hardware, wherein the same plurality of function blocks is capable of operating a plurality of communication applications. In a next step, the capability of the fixed portion and the flexible portion of hardware of the communication device is evaluated for a capability of implementing the communication application. Next, configuration information only for the flexible portion of hardware of the communication device is transmitted to the communication device to enable it to operate the communication application. An identification of the communication application is also transmitted to the communication device for purposes of tracking its implementation. | 02-10-2011 |
20110040856 | AUTOMATIC RECONFIGURATION DEVICE - The present invention provides a method and device that can easily configure an entertainment system automatically or semi-automatically. The reconfiguration of the entertainment system can be achieved by cycling through the possible configurations of the entertainment system (i.e. different combinations of operational states of the components that make up the entertainment system) by changing various operational states of certain components until an operable configuration is found. The invention may be implemented in any component of the entertainment system including a set-top-box, satellite receiver or a remote control. | 02-17-2011 |
20110047253 | TECHNIQUES FOR CONTROLLING GATEWAY FUNCTIONALITY TO SUPPORT DEVICE MANAGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for operating a Device Management (DM) gateway in a communication system including the DM gateway, a DM server, and an end device, which cannot be directly controlled by the DM Server, to enable the device to be managed by the DM server, via the DM gateway, a method for a DM gateway in a communication system to update the bootstrapping information for a certain class of devices, a method for a DM gateway in a communication system to process DM commands, a method for a DM gateway in a communication system to process trap messages, a method for a DM gateway in a communication system to process a periodic service/capability advertisement message, and a method for a DM gateway in a communication system to process a heartbeat timeout are provided. The method for operating the DM gateway in the communication system including the DM gateway, the DM server, and the device includes receiving, by the DM gateway, a service/capability advertisement message from the device, determining, by the DM gateway, one or more characteristics of the device based on information included in the received service/capability advertisement message, and invoking, by the DM gateway, an algorithm based on the determined one or more characteristics of the device, wherein the DM gateway operates according to the invoked algorithm, so that the DM Server can subsequently manage the device, by sending management commands to the device, via the DM gateway, and by processing alerts received from the device, via the DM gateway. | 02-24-2011 |
20110055361 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GENERATING MANAGEMENT AGENT INSTALLATIONS - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for installation of management agents on target machines. In embodiments, a central management server can scan a managed network to identify different types and configurations of target machines. Different types of target machines may require different types of management agent software in order to invoke different types of management services, such as configuration management or performance monitoring services. The necessary types of management agent may depend, for instance, on the operating system and/or applications installed on individual targets. In embodiments, different types or classes of management agents can register or communicate with different types of remote management servers. The management agent(s) on individual targets can thereby initiate and manage the installation of agents or other resources that may be needed to register to the remote network services, without a requirement to install or use specific package management tools for specific products. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055362 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MODIFYING AND/OR CHANGING A MAC ID UTILIZING AN IPV6 NETWORK CONNECTION - A system that facilitates enhancing security for a computer device utilizing an IPv6 network connection. The system includes a computer device having a software module, which performs the following steps: capturing outgoing IPv6 packets, the outgoing IPv6 packets having a stateless autoconfiguration IPv6 address, which is configured at least partially based on a computer device identifier; modifying the IPv6 address associated with the computer device identifier to generate a modified IPv6 address; and returning the outgoing IPv6 packet with the modified IPv6 address to a network layer of the Internet Protocol of the computer device. In accordance with an example, the computer device is an image forming apparatus. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055363 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SELECTION METHOD - A wireless communication terminal and a communication system selection method are capable of selecting a communication system having high battery usage efficiency by keeping battery remaining time long and satisfying throughput required by the application depending on scenes. The wireless communication terminal | 03-03-2011 |
20110060815 | AUTOMATIC ATTACHMENT OF SERVER HOSTS TO STORAGE HOSTGROUPS IN DISTRIBUTED ENVIRONMENT - A system, method and program product for for automatically configuring a storage device for a server. A method is provided that includes:preconfiguring the storage device with a set of LUNs and a hostgroup; preconfiguring the server to include a storage configuration package; connecting the storage device to the server; launching the storage configuration package on the server to run a set of scripts to perform the actions comprised of: installing a set of drivers; resetting a UUID and modifying a kernel; installing a storage management system on the server; discover WWIDs, a hostname and the storage device; create and add the hostname to the hostgroup; and pass the WWIDs to the storage device; and mapping a set of disks; and rebooting the computer. | 03-10-2011 |
20110066707 | NETWORK FRAMEWORK ASSOCIATING NON-ENTERPRISE PHONE WITH ENTERPRISE USERS - Methods, devices, and systems are provided for identifying unique points in communication processing for substituting and restoring identities associated with the communication. These specific replacements facilitate communication requests to-and-from external identities to be treated similar to communication requests to-and-from enterprise users, thereby allowing enterprise users to access enterprise-based communication preferences and services via non-enterprise devices. | 03-17-2011 |
20110066708 | Computer Program Product For Determining A Group Of Network Configuration Settings That Provide Optimal Network Performance - A computer program product is provided for optimizing network configuration settings for a user's client machine. A plurality of groups of network configuration settings are held in storage to be used by the user's client machine. A network connection is established between the user's client machine and a remote server. One of the groups of network configuration settings is selected to be used by the user's client machine from the provided groups of settings. One or more performance tests are conducted using the selected network configuration settings during the established network connection. The settings selection and the performance tests are repeated for one or more other groups of network configuration settings during the established network connection. The network configuration settings of the user's client machine provided in the groups are automatically adjusted based on the results of the performance tests. The adjusted network configuration settings are settings that optimize the performance of the user's client machine. | 03-17-2011 |
20110072117 | Generating a Synthetic Table of Contents for a Volume by Using Statistical Analysis - A method and a system are provided for generating a synthetic table of contents for a volume. The synthetic table of contents may be used to identify a volume efficiently despite natural variations found in different occurrences of a volume. In one example, the system receives unprocessed durations for each chapter of the volume. The volume includes chapters. The system identifies acceptable durations for each chapter by applying a first statistical analysis to the unprocessed durations for each chapter. The system calculates a representative duration for each chapter by applying a second statistical analysis to the acceptable durations for each chapter. The calculating generates representative durations for the chapters. The system then generates a synthetic table of contents for the volume by organizing the representative durations for the chapters of the volume. | 03-24-2011 |
20110078290 | ENERGY-EFFICIENT SERVER LOCATION DETERMINATION FOR CONFIGURATION CHANGES - At a data center controller, a first server location is determined from a set of available server locations at which to change a server active state for a data center. A time and configuration change for the data center are forecasted. A second server location is determined from the set of available server locations at which to change the server active state based upon the forecasted configuration change for the data center. An available server location is selected at which to change the server active state based upon the first server location, the second server location, and the forecasted time associated with the forecasted configuration change for the data center. | 03-31-2011 |
20110078291 | DISTRIBUTED PERFORMANCE MONITORING IN SOFT REAL-TIME DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS - A novel and useful framework, system and method of monitoring one or more performance parameters (e.g., distributed system performance), filtering the performance parameters data collected and identifying one or more performance parameters that affect one or more target performance measures. This can be achieved in the case of a delay parameter, for example, by determining the root-cause of the increased delay and taking corrective actions in order to avoid violation of the timeliness constraints. The present invention is a statistical based performance monitoring mechanism that uses statistical signal processing techniques and is applicable, for example, in soft real-time distributed systems. The monitoring framework efficiently and distributively characterizes the behavior of the varying network conditions as a stochastic process and performs root-cause analysis to detecting the parameters which affect one or more target performance measures, e.g., latency. Once the affecting parameters are determined, corrective action is optionally taken. | 03-31-2011 |
20110078292 | TECHNIQUES FOR CONDITIONAL NAME RESOLUTION AND CONFIGURATION - Techniques for conditional name resolution and configuration are provided. Calls made by applications to resolve hostnames through name resolution services are intercepted and processed unbeknownst to the applications. The calls are inspected for hostnames and the hostnames are lookup in a policy store for IP addresses. The IP addresses are supplied back to the applications as if IP addresses were provided by the name resolution services. | 03-31-2011 |
20110082919 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING REHOMING OF USER ENDPOINT DEVICES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a Domain Name System (DNS) server having a controller to receive new provisioning information for updating a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), and update the FQDN with the new provisioning information. The new provisioning information can include among other things a start time for rehoming one or more user endpoint devices (UEs) assigned to a current session border Controller (S/BC), a move-from record comprising a descriptor of at least the current S/BC, a move-to record comprising a descriptor of at least a new S/BC to which to rehome the one or more UEs, a transfer window representing a total time for the rehoming the one or more UEs to the new S/BC, and a pacing parameter for rehoming the one or more UEs to the new S/BC during the transfer window. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 04-07-2011 |
20110082920 | Change Management in Multi-Domain Environments - Method, server, and computer product are provided to implement change management across domains. Memory is included for storing a program. A processor is functionally coupled to the memory and is responsive to computer-executable instructions contained in the program. The processor is operative to announce planned changes for a configuration item to interested outside domains, and the configuration item is in an inside domain. Open subscription is provided to the interested outside domains such that the interested outside domains can subscribe to the subscription as participants. A change instance is created or the configuration item in the inside domain. Change progress of the change instance is reported for the configuration item to the participants of the interested outside domains. State progress notifications are distributed to the participants of the change. The change instance is executed to make planned changes to the configuration item. | 04-07-2011 |
20110082921 | AUTO-CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK CAPTURED TRAFFIC DEVICE - Methods, systems, computer-readable media, and devices for automatically configuring a network captured traffic distribution device communicatively coupled to a stacked topology of network captured traffic distribution devices are described. The automatic configuration may include an exchange of configuration information between a first and second network captured traffic distribution device included in a stacked topology. The configuration information of a network captured traffic distribution device may also be automatically updated when, for example, a change is detected in the stacked topology or on a periodic or as needed basis. | 04-07-2011 |
20110087760 | AUTOMATED RAPID REGISTRATION OF APPLICATIONS - A method and apparatus for managing distribution and use of software applications. An application manager at an administrator computer may be configured to receive requests for registering an application from a client computer. The application manager may determine whether the request should be approved based on historical responses to similar registration requests. A response to the request may accordingly be sent automatically to the requesting client computer. | 04-14-2011 |
20110087761 | POWER SAVING SCHEMES FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Methods for saving power and facilitating transitions from power-saving states back to active states in mobile stations are provided. A base station transmits indication of a periodic interval at which system configuration information is to be transmitted, periodically transmits a current version of system configuration information and in advance of an action time of a new version of system configuration information, periodically transmits the new version of system configuration information at the periodic interval; and transmits a flag indicating whether the new version of system configuration information is available. In respect of each of at least one mobile station in a power-saving state, in which the mobile station (MS) is configured on a per-MS basis to periodically wake up and check for the presence of an information block relevant to the MS, the base station transmits an information block presence indicator indicative of whether the information block is present. | 04-14-2011 |
20110087762 | Method and system of smart detection and recovery - A smart detection and recovery method is implemented in a terminal for detecting statuses of a host. The method comprises steps of: receiving a datagram; determining if the datagram complies with a predetermined format? If “YES” then proceed; determining if a MAC address contained in the datagram is the same with a currently used MAC address pre-stored in the terminal? If “YES” then proceed; determining if an IP address contained in the datagram is the same with a currently used IP address pre-stored in the terminal? If “NO” then re-connect or guide the terminal to the IP address contained in the datagram, if “YES” then handle the datagram by normal operations. Therefore, changes of the IP address of the host can be detected as early as possible, such that the terminal can be re-connected or guided to the host and services of the host can recovered as soon as possible. | 04-14-2011 |
20110093573 | WEB PUBLISHING PIPELINE - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to publishing applications from a source environment to a target environment. In aspects, a publishing pipeline has multiple segments in which work related to the publishing is performed. In the pipeline, file data associated with an application is collected. Settings that need to be created and/or changed in target environment are also determined. Transformation actions may also occur to determine and prepare files to be published to the target environment. After the files and settings to publish are determined and the transformation actions occur, the application may then be published to the target environment. | 04-21-2011 |
20110099254 | DYNAMIC STATUS REPORTING - Apparatus, systems, and methods may operate to receive the execution status of a user application, and to transmit the state of a dynamic user status indication, based on the execution status, to a user status reporting application. The state may be changed according to a system administration policy configuration. In some embodiments, activities include changing the state of a dynamic user status indication (included as part of a user status reporting application) based on the execution status of a user application. Changing the status may be conducted according to a user-specified configuration policy or a system administration policy configuration. Further activity may include transmitting the state to at least one additional application to enable display of the state across a network. Additional apparatus, systems, and methods are disclosed. | 04-28-2011 |
20110099255 | MANAGING COMMAND COMPLIANCE IN INTERNETWORKING DEVICES - In an embodiment, an internetworking device is configured with compliance proxy logic that is configured for sending, to a compliance server, a request to determine whether the command conforms to one or more compliance policies, wherein the request includes the command; receiving a compliance response from the compliance server; in response to determining whether the compliance response indicates success, executing the command only when the compliance response indicates that the command conforms to the one or more compliance policies. Thus the device can determine actively whether a proposed user command or configuration change will violate established standards or policies, before the command or change is applied to the device. | 04-28-2011 |
20110099256 | Method and system for deploying an asset over a multi-tiered network - A method for distributing changes to digital assets across a network includes determining an asset type of a first digital asset and comparing the first digital asset to a prior digital asset to determine one or more deltas, the prior digital asset being a prior version of the first digital asset and the delta being a difference between the first digital asset and the prior digital asset. The method further includes evaluating the one or more of the deltas with one or more criteria to determine if the one or more delta assets should be created, the delta asset being a second digital asset containing the respective delta, the criteria determined by the asset type. The method further includes that if the delta meets the criteria, creating the delta asset, and marking the delta asset as a first delta asset of the first digital asset. | 04-28-2011 |
20110099257 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTERFACING WITH NETWORK INFORMATION COLLECTION DEVICES - A network device may include logic configured to receive a problem report from a second network device, where the problem report includes event data, determine at least one of an action to perform or whether reconfiguration information is associated with the event data in the received problem report and add information to the received problem report to provide a reformatted problem report and transmit the reformatted problem report to a third network device when it is determined that reconfiguration information is not associated with the event data in the problem report. | 04-28-2011 |
20110106921 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR IMPLEMENTING CONFIGURATION SYNCHRONIZATION - Embodiments of the invention provide a network device for implementing configuration synchronization, including a port configured to a receive a configuration file, a memory, and a processing engine configured such that if a configuration file is received on the port, the processing engine determines a neighbor device of the network device and forwards the configuration file to the neighbor device, and wherein if a configuration file is received on the port and the network device is a member of a predetermined peer group, the configuration file is loaded into the memory. | 05-05-2011 |
20110106922 | OPTIMIZED EFFICIENT LPAR CAPACITY CONSOLIDATION - A method and system for optimizing a configuration of a set of LPARs and a set of servers that host the LPARs. Configuration data and optimization characteristics are received. By applying the configuration data and optimization characteristics, a best fit of the LPARs into the servers is determined, thereby determining an optimized configuration. The best fit is based on a variant of bin packing or multidimensional bin packing methodology. The optimized configuration is stored. In one embodiment, comparisons of shadow costs are utilized to determine an optimal placement of the LPARs in the servers. LPAR(s) in the set of LPARs are migrated to other server(s) in the set of servers, which results in the LPARs and servers being configured in the optimized configuration. | 05-05-2011 |
20110106923 | STORAGE AREA NETWORK CONFIGURATION - A method and system are provided for storage area network configuration across redundant fabrics. The method includes defining ( | 05-05-2011 |
20110119360 | Establishing a Mesh Network with Wired and Wireless Links - Embodiments of the present invention solve problems experienced by mesh networks concerning loop formation where two nodes are connected by both a wired and wireless link. The present invention prevents or ‘breaks’ a loop that that would otherwise result in continually repeating and delayed network data transmission. | 05-19-2011 |
20110125881 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING DISTRIBUTION OF INFORMATION AND QUERIES IN INFORMATION SPACES - An approach is provided for managing symmetric and asymmetric communication among information spaces with respect to their distributed nature. An information space is composed of semantic information brokers that handle internal processes of the information space. One or more of the semantic information brokers compute a stability factor corresponding to each of a plurality of semantic information brokers in an information space. The one or more semantic information brokers then select one or more of the plurality of semantic information brokers as a master semantic information broker based on the computed stability factors. The one or more master semantic information brokers manage communication among the plurality of semantic information brokers. | 05-26-2011 |
20110125882 | METHOD FOR NETWORKABLE DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A networkable device-to-networkable device communication method in Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6). Embodiments include auto-configuration of IPv6 address and automatic commencement of communication among Fire Panels and other types of wired or wireless networkable devices. Each networkable device obtains its IPv6 address in a number of ways including from the first or any particular networkable device in a network. A designated networkable device instills IPv6 address to its neighboring networkable device, and subsequently the neighboring networkable device instills IPv6 address to its neighboring networkable device dynamically. Embedded Gateways are created dynamically in the network. Each networkable device uses its and its neighboring networkable devices' Embedded Gateways in order to transmit and receive IPv6 multicast, anycast or unicast packets. Embodiments obviate the need to use conventional Ethernet network backbone, networking and routing devices like switch or router, or manual configuration. | 05-26-2011 |
20110125883 | Runtime Versioning of Information Processing Systems - An information processing system includes a runtime versioning facility which allows for managing its configuration so that modifications made during runtime are propagated and take affect without restarting the system or a portion thereof. This allows the potential for 100% uptime while upgrading such systems. This also provides a system capability to process multiple configuration versions, and to be able to process such versions even while such versions are changing during operation of the information processing systems. For example, a system such as a registry server capable of transactional configuration changes is provided which manages its configuration so that modifications made during runtime are propagated and take affect without restarting the server. | 05-26-2011 |
20110125884 | Architecture And Protocol For Extensible And Scalable Communication - A system performs information technology (IT) tasks using a computer. Examples of IT tasks include installing or configuring software, displaying alerts, executing programs or scripts on the endpoint, or logging activities. In an embodiment of the system, a connection initialization module receives a request for a persistent connection over a network from a managed endpoint. The request is accepted and a persistent connection is opened with the managed endpoint. A tier-1 module then receives configuration information from the managed endpoint over the persistent connection. The configuration information includes a list of functional plugins on the managed endpoint, where a functional plugin comprises a software module for performing an IT task. The tier-1 module stores this configuration information along with information describing the persistent connection and maintains the persistent connection in an open state. | 05-26-2011 |
20110131302 | MINIMUM DISRUPTION MST RECONFIGURATION (MDMR) - In one embodiment, a first multiple spanning tree (MST) region configuration for an MST process may be maintained at a switch in a computer network, where the first configuration has a virtual local area network (VLAN)-to-instance (VI) mapping that maps each of one or more VLANs to one of one or more MST instances in the MST region. The switch may subsequently receive a second MST region configuration that has a different VI mapping than the first configuration, and may determine one or more VLANs of the second configuration that have a different VI mapping from the first configuration (“affected VLANs”). Accordingly, in response to a trigger to apply the second configuration at the switch, the affected VLANs are blocked for a delay, and the second configuration may be applied at the switch without restarting the MST process. | 06-02-2011 |
20110138025 | Systems and Methods for Extensible Distributed Configuration Management - Systems and methods for extensible distributed configuration management of computer resources are described. Examples include a computer system including a processing unit and a storage device that stores a model definition and one or more asset plug-ins (each of the one or more asset plug-ins configured to expose at least one asset object that represents a computer resource). The computer system further includes memory that stores an asset model created based at least in part on the model definition, and a network interface configured to deploy to at least one managed system a compatible asset plug-in (the model definition including at least one conditional reference to the compatible asset plug-in). If a condition specified within the asset model is satisfied the processing unit selects the compatible asset plug-in for deployment, the condition being defined within the model definition and designated as applicable to the at least one conditional reference. | 06-09-2011 |
20110145376 | Modifying Operation of Peer-to-Peer Networks Based on Integrating Network Routing Information - A data processing method comprising establishing a first node in a peer-to-peer data communications network, wherein the node is configured as a supernode in conformance with a peer-to-peer communications protocol, wherein the first node is configured as an active listener to one or more network routing protocols executing at a network router; receiving a routing information message from one of the network routing protocols; modifying an operational characteristic of the first node in response to the routing information message; receiving a request from a second node in the peer-to-peer network for a resource that is known to the first node; and responding to the request based on the modified operational characteristic. For example, a peer-to-peer node may be configured as a network-aware BitTorrent Tracker, Gnutella supernode, etc., and can use IGP and BGP information from a router to determine how the node behaves. | 06-16-2011 |
20110153787 | INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY ASSET MANAGEMENT - In an embodiment, a system for information technology asset management may include a plurality of data processing systems, and a network connecting the plurality of data processing systems. The system may also include a controller configured to manage the plurality of data processing systems by resolving naming conflicts for each of the plurality of data processing systems on the network to a respective master name while also maintaining the alias names for each of the plurality of data processing systems on the network. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153788 | Method and System for Automated Network Operations - A system includes a memory storing a set of instructions executable by a processor. The set of instructions is operable to receive a process for accomplishing a network management task, the process including a plurality of events including configuration changing events and condition checking events; receive parameters related to the task; include the parameters in the process; and execute the process. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153789 | EFFICIENT SERVICE ADVERTISEMENT AND DISCOVERY IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT WITH DYNAMIC ADVERTISEMENT AND DISCOVERY PERIODS BASED ON OPERATING CONDITIONS - A local device is configured to monitor operating conditions coupled to a wireless network. An advertisement period is dynamically adjusted based on the operating conditions of the local device, where the advertisement period is dynamically adjusted based on at least one of a battery condition of the local device, a user behavior of the local device, network traffic condition, and a type of service to be advertised. The local device broadcasts a service advertisement in the wireless network according to the adjusted advertisement period, the service advertisement including one or more service IDs for identifying one or more services to be advertised from the local device. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153790 | OPEN ACCESS POINT, TERMINAL AND INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDING METHOD THEREOF - Provided is a future internet service providing method. An open access point registers information of the open access point in a reconfiguration server comprised in an internet, when the open access point accesses the Internet. The open access point registers information of a mergence node accessing the open access point, in the reconfiguration server. The open access point provides sensing information of the mergence node to a terminal, when the terminal requests the sensing information of the mergence node. A terminal requests providing of service type information to a domain name server. The terminal selects a service type for providing of internet service from among the service type list when a service type list is received from the domain name server, in response to the request. The terminal requests sensing information to an open access point capable of providing of the selected service type. The terminal provides internet service having the selected service type on the basis of the sensing information. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153791 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING CONFIGURATION DATA AT DISCONNECTED REMOTE DEVICES - Described herein are systems and methods for managing configuration data. These are particularly directed towards the management of configuration data in disconnected remote devices of a host system. For example, this may be an access control environment having one or more connected access control devices (i.e. devices in communication with a central server), and one or more disconnected access control devices (i.e. devices operating without communication with the central server), the latter being regarded as disconnected remote devices. In overview, the present systems and methods make use of a versioning protocol to allow the reliable distribution of configuration data at the disconnected remote devices, this protocol operating to best ensure the propagation of the most current configuration data. | 06-23-2011 |
20110153792 | ENABLING SIMULTANEOUS USE OF HOME NETWORK AND FOREIGN NETWORK BY A MULTIHOMED MOBILE NODE - The invention relates to a method performed by a home agent serving a mobile node in a home network of the mobile node upon attachment of a mobile node to the home network as well as to the home agent. Further, the invention also relates to a method for enabling simultaneous use of a plurality of interfaces by a mobile node being attached to a home network through one of the plurality of interfaces and to at least one foreign network through at least another interface of the plurality of interfaces. Moreover, the invention provides a mobile node and a proxy acting on behalf of the mobile node. To enable a mobile node to use a home network and at least one further foreign network for communications the invention suggests the registration of the mobile node's home address or of a network node within its home network as a care-of address in the home network. | 06-23-2011 |
20110161471 | INCENTING DIVULGENCE OF INFORMATION FOR BINDING IDENTIFIERS ACROSS INFORMATION DOMAINS WHILE MAINTAINING CONFIDENTIALITY - Disclosed are methods for extracting and using information about an entity that has a presence in a number of information domains. The entity has separate identifiers in each of several domains. Various techniques are described that bind together the identifiers of the entity across the domains. The results of the binding are provided to an interested party that can review information extracted about the entity's behavior in the multiple domains. The interested party is not given access to information that would compromise the confidentiality of the entity. A trusted broker has access to information about the behavior of the entity in the several domains. The broker analyzes that information and provides the analysis to the interested party, again without compromising the confidentiality of the entity. An “incentivizer” works with the broker to extract from the domains information that would be useful in binding together the different identifiers of the entity. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161472 | CLIENT-BASED BINDING OF IDENTIFIERS ACROSS INFORMATION DOMAINS WHILE MAINTAINING CONFIDENTIALITY - Disclosed are methods for extracting and using information about an entity that has a presence in a number of information domains. The entity has separate identifiers in each of several domains. Various techniques are described that bind together the identifiers of the entity across the domains. The results of the binding are provided to an interested party that can review information extracted about the entity's behavior in the multiple domains. The interested party is not given access to information that would compromise the confidentiality of the entity. A trusted broker has access to information about the behavior of the entity in the several domains. The broker analyzes that information and provides the analysis to the interested party, again without compromising the confidentiality of the entity. An “incentivizer” works with the broker to extract from the domains information that would be useful in binding together the different identifiers of the entity. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161473 | ANALYTICS-BASED BINDING OF IDENTIFIERS ACROSS INFORMATION DOMAINS WHILE MAINTAINING CONFIDENTIALITY - Disclosed are methods for extracting and using information about an entity that has a presence in a number of information domains. The entity has separate identifiers in each of several domains. Various techniques are described that bind together the identifiers of the entity across the domains. The results of the binding are provided to an interested party that can review information extracted about the entity's behavior in the multiple domains. The interested party is not given access to information that would compromise the confidentiality of the entity. A trusted broker has access to information about the behavior of the entity in the several domains. The broker analyzes that information and provides the analysis to the interested party, again without compromising the confidentiality of the entity. An “incentivizer” works with the broker to extract from the domains information that would be useful in binding together the different identifiers of the entity. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161474 | BROKERING INFORMATION ACROSS INFORMATION DOMAINS WHILE MAINTAINING CONFIDENTIALITY - Disclosed are methods for extracting and using information about an entity that has a presence in a number of information domains. The entity has separate identifiers in each of several domains. Various techniques are described that bind together the identifiers of the entity across the domains. The results of the binding are provided to an interested party that can review information extracted about the entity's behavior in the multiple domains. The interested party is not given access to information that would compromise the confidentiality of the entity. A trusted broker has access to information about the behavior of the entity in the several domains. The broker analyzes that information and provides the analysis to the interested party, again without compromising the confidentiality of the entity. An “incentivizer” works with the broker to extract from the domains information that would be useful in binding together the different identifiers of the entity. | 06-30-2011 |
20110173305 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROVIDING A SMOOTH TRANSITION BETWEEN PEER-TO-PEER NODE TYPES - An apparatus for providing data management in a P2P network may include a processor. The processor may be configured to identify resources and communicate information to another node(s). The information may include a request to change the apparatus from a first mode of operation to a second mode of operation based on the identified resources. | 07-14-2011 |
20110173306 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELF CONFIGURATION OF RECONFIGURABLE SYSTEMS - The invention is a system and method for reconfigurable computers. The invention involves a plurality of reconfigurable component clusters (RCCs), each of which can change their respective configuration upon receiving a configuration command. The invention uses a reconfiguration network for distributing the configuration command to the RCCs, wherein the reconfiguration network comprises a plurality of cells, wherein each RCC is connected to a cell. | 07-14-2011 |
20110179149 | ROAMING APPLICATION SETTINGS ACROSS MULTIPLE COMPUTING DEVICES - Application settings are roamed across multiple computing devices. Provider modules on the computing devices are run to retrieve application settings to be roamed and to roam those application settings across the multiple computing devices. Application setting changes initiated on a particular computing device are added to a history of application setting changes on the particular computing device, and also added to synchronization communication module for communication to one or more additional computing devices of the multiple computing devices. Application setting changes initiated by one of the one or more additional computing devices are received by the particular computing device and added to a history of application setting changes on the particular computing device, and are also incorporated into the application settings on the particular computing device. | 07-21-2011 |
20110179150 | MIGRATING A WEB HOSTING SERVICE VIA A VIRTUAL NETWORK FROM ONE ARCHITECTURE TO ANOTHER - An automated tool for migrating a website hosting service from a first website hosting architecture to a second website hosting architecture, wherein a virtual network is used during migration to facilitate keeping the services available during the movement of IP addresses from one architecture to the other architecture. | 07-21-2011 |
20110179151 | TUNING AND OPTIMIZING DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS WITH DECLARATIVE MODELS - A system for automatically adjusting operation of a distributed application program includes analytics means having a monitoring component. The monitoring component receives one or more event streams of data corresponding to execution of one or more modules of the distributed application program. The monitoring component joins the received event streams with one or more declarative models to create operational data. A forensics component of the analytics means queries, such as by using data from a declarative model store, the operational data to identify trends or behavior information for the various modules or components of the distributed application program. A planner component then reviews data created by the forensics component to identify any needed changes to the declarative models. The planner component passes any modified declarative models back to the system, so that the distributed application program can operate more efficiently using the changes to the declarative models, as needed. | 07-21-2011 |
20110185048 | GATING ACCESSORY CONNECTION - Embodiments of the invention can manage the activity of accessories connected to a mobile computing device. A mobile computing device can be connected to any number of accessories through wireless or physical connections. Processing and resource limitations at the mobile computing device limit the number of accessories that can feasibly interoperate with the mobile computing device at any one time. In some embodiments, a threshold value is placed on the number of accessories with which a mobile computing device can interoperate at any one time. This threshold value can depend on the types of accessories, the application(s) executing on the mobile computing device, the processing power, whether media output resource are being used, etc. In response to a threshold number of accessories being connected, the mobile computing device can deactivate accessories. | 07-28-2011 |
20110202640 | Identification of a destination server for virtual machine migration - A method for identification of a destination server for VM migration from a source server across a network is provided. The method comprises generating a profile for a virtual machine (VM) located on a source server, wherein the profile includes a plurality of parameters and a plurality of parameter constraints. The method further comprises polling a plurality of servers located on a network for values of the parameters and corresponding weights. It is determined whether the VM requires migration. Upon determination that migration is required, the method comprises identifying one or more destination servers located on the network that satisfy the parameter constraints, creating an ordered list of the one or more destination servers based on the corresponding weights if more than one destination server are identified, selecting a destination server from the ordered list, and migrating the VM to the selected destination server. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202641 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PROVIDING ACCESS NETWORK AWARE PRESENCE TO APPLICATIONS - A method and system for detecting and communicating access network capability information to an application server such that the application server may adapt its service offerings in response to changes in the access network associated with one or more user terminals. The service adaptations may comprise increases or decreases in service level, depending upon whether the access network capability has increased or decreased. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202642 | BROADCAST RECEIVER APPARATUS - There is provided a broadcast receiver apparatus capable of receiving correct channel information any time even if a network to which the broadcast receiver apparatus is connected changes to another one. The broadcast receiver apparatus includes storage means ( | 08-18-2011 |
20110202643 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - When a communication device detects another communication device operating as a providing device that provides a communication parameter and when a communication parameter has already been set between the communication device and a different communication device or when the communication device is participating in the same network as that in which the different communication device is present, the communication device transmits a session overlap notice to the detected communication device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110219102 | Method and System for Network Configuration - Methods and systems have been provided for pushing critical configuration to a set of network devices. According to various embodiments of the invention, a Network Management Station (NMS) creates a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) context and an SNMP view. Additionally, the NMS specifies a network configuration and a set time period. The NMS pushes the network configuration to the set of network devices. The set of devices apply the network configuration after the set time period. | 09-08-2011 |
20110225271 | ADMISSION CONTROL FRAMEWORK METHOD AND SYSTEM - An admission control method and system. The method includes presenting, by a computer processor of an admission control framework computing system, a configuration user interface comprising lists. The computer processor generates and deploys a modified runtime configuration for the admission control framework computing system. The computer processor injects a runtime component of the admission control framework computing system into a command processing path between a container representing an application server and servants representing application components deployed to the application server. The computer processor intercepts commands transmitted from the container to a first servant of the servants. The computer processor reroutes the commands to a reservation pool configured to inspect the commands. | 09-15-2011 |
20110225272 | NEGOTIATION OF QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) INFORMATION FOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - An access point advertises a management frame quality of service (MFQ) policy that defines an access category used for transmitting a first type of management frame. Each mobile station associated with the access point is to prioritize transmission of management frames according to the MFQ policy advertised by the access point, unless a policy configuration request for the mobile station to prioritize transmission of management frames according to a different MFQ policy has been accepted. | 09-15-2011 |
20110225273 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RE-GENERATING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS OF A NETWORK DEVICE USING AN OBJECT-BASED APPROACH - Embodiments disclose re-generating a configuration command of a network device. A method includes receiving a request to re-generate a configuration command previously issued to a network device, wherein the configuration command has one or more parameters; retrieving a template and a pattern associated with the configuration command, wherein the template represents a syntax for the configuration command, wherein the pattern represents a storage location for the configuration command; based on the pattern, retrieving from an object database all objects containing values for all the particular parameters from the storage location specified by the pattern; and creating a re-generated configuration command by substituting the values of the retrieved objects into the template. | 09-15-2011 |
20110231531 | METHOD FOR SERVICING FIELD DEVICES OF PROCESS AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY UTILIZING A DEVICE INDEPENDENT OPERATING PROGRAMME - A method for servicing field devices of process automation technology utilizing a device-independent operating program SP running in a computer unit CU and requiring device-specific description files DD | 09-22-2011 |
20110231532 | Network management apparatus, network management method and network management program - A network management apparatus includes a processor, and a storage. The storage that stores an operation type indicating a rollback operation method by associating with attributes held by a command defining network settings. The processor executes extracting a difference between a command forming current setting information and a command forming previous setting information when the setting information set by the command is brought back to the previous setting information and acquiring the operation type corresponding to extracted command attributes from the storage unit, to generate a rollback command defining the rollback operation in accordance with the acquired operation type. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231533 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING NODE BEHAVIOR IN A SENSOR NETWORK - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for controlling sensor networks. A sensor network has a plurality of sensor nodes, which have sensors for monitoring operational parameters of devices within an application-specific system. A wireless communication module is provided for each node to enable the node to wirelessly communicate with other nodes of the network. A user defines various scripts for controlling the behavior of one or more nodes, and the network distributes the scripts, as appropriate, to various nodes thereby implementing the behavior defined by the scripts. Accordingly, a user can easily and dynamically configure or re-configure the behavior of any node without having to physically access the node that is being configured or re-configured. | 09-22-2011 |
20110231534 | DYNAMIC INTERNET ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT BASED ON USER IDENTITY AND POLICY COMPLIANCE - In embodiments of the present invention, improved capabilities are described for a method presenting a client, providing client information and requesting an IP address from a DHCP server, where the DHCP server may formulate a first IP assignment and a first multiple DHCP options. A policy management facility may be associated with the interception of the first IP assignment and the first multiple DHCP options, which may result in the first IP assignment and the first multiple DHCP options not being sent to the client. The method may send client information to the policy management facility. The policy management facility may formulate a second multiple DHCP options and may send it to the DHCP server. The DHCP server may change first IP assignment and first multiple DHCP option to a second IP assignment and the second multiple DHCP options. The second IP assignment and the second multiple DHCP options may then be forwarded to the client. | 09-22-2011 |
20110238800 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND STORING MEDIUM - A communication apparatus connected with a device via a network, the communication apparatus comprising: a first obtaining unit configured to obtain a first identification information for identifying the device, a second obtaining unit configured to obtain a current IP address set to the device, a communication unit configured to communicate with the device by using the current IP address, a generating unit configured to generate a new IP address, and a setting unit that broadcasts a setting packet to the network when a communication with the device by using the current IP address fails, wherein the setting packet contains the first identification information and the new IP address, and when a second identification information for identifying a receiving device that receives the setting packet is identical to the first identification information, the setting packet instructs the receiving device to newly set the new IP address to the receiving device. | 09-29-2011 |
20110238801 | DYNAMIC SESSION MAINTENANCE FOR MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICES - A framework and method are disclosed for supporting changed addresses by mobile network nodes. Such support is provided through enhancements to the mobile network nodes and utilizes DNS servers, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), and virtual private network (VPN) servers—or their functional equivalents—to dynamically assign a current network address to a mobile node, provide the current network address to an authoritative name server, and thereafter have correspondent nodes update their addresses for the mobile node based upon an address provided by the authoritative name server. A mobile node registers all of its name-to-address mappings with its authoritative DNS server using a time to live of zero. Furthermore, when a mobile node moves outside its home security domain, the mobile node initiates a virtual private network connection to a virtual private server for a security domain. | 09-29-2011 |
20110252119 | Network storage system of applications and method thereof - Applications are stored on a server end. After a mobile end logs into the server end, it sets a selection criterion in a selection field. The server end transmits the application along with configuration parameters according to the selection criterion to the mobile end to install thereon. This enables efficient use of the storage space on the mobile end. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252120 | CONFIGURATION OF A NETWORK NODE USING CAPTIVE MODE - The invention relates to a network node arranged to provide an end user of a network terminal in a local network with an access link to an external network, said network node is arranged to be connected between said local network and said external network. The network node is characterized in that it comprises a control unit arranged to in response to receiving a first triggering information, switch said network node from a normal operational mode into a captive mode, in which said control unit is further arranged to intercept any request from said network terminals to said external network, resolve said request to the IP address of the network node in the local network such that gateway information to the end user of said network terminals is provided. The invention also relates to a method for use in a network node and a computer program product. | 10-13-2011 |
20110258298 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING NETWORK COMPATIBLE DEVICES UTILIZING INTERNET-BASED BEACON TECHNOLOGY - A system and method for accessing a network compatible device utilizing an Internet based beacon technology. A compatible host application can be installed on a client device and registered with a network by providing a user credential and a qualifying descriptor. The network compatible device can be configured to have access with the network in order to extract the information associated with the user accessing the compatible device. A list of users with the matching qualifying descriptor can then be displayed at a user interface associated with the compatible device. Upon authentication, the compatible device and the compatible host application installed on the client device can be connected and the network address associated with the compatible device and the client device can be accessed. | 10-20-2011 |
20110258299 | SYNCHRONIZATION OF CONFIGURATIONS FOR DISPLAY SYSTEMS - A method and system for synchronizing configurations of a video display system are disclosed. Configuration information at a facility server and that stored at a central server are synchronized using a procedure that depends on a relationship of the central server and the facility server, or an operating state of the facility. | 10-20-2011 |
20110258300 | De-registration method and system for IP multimedia subsystem centralized service - A de-registration method and system for IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) centralized service are provided in the present invention, wherein the method comprises: a Circuit Switched User Equipment (CS UE) moves from a source enhanced Mobile Switch Centre Server (eMSC Server) into the control area of a target Mobile Switch Centre Server (MSC Server); during a location cancelling process in which the CS UE changes the MSC Server to which it is attached, the source eMSC Server starts up delay timing after receiving a location cancelling request; when the delay time is reached, the source eMSC Server performs the de-registration of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) instead of the CS UE. The method and system of the present invention ensure that the de-registration request of the source eMSC Server arrives at the Serving Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) later than the registration request of the target MSC server, so as to avoid unnecessary redundant signaling and improve the system processing efficiency. | 10-20-2011 |
20110264773 | SIMPLE AND DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK DEVICES - The present invention relates to a system and method for configuring and managing network devices. The arrival (and departure) of devices on a network can be detected by a monitor. Upon detection, network devices can be simply and dynamically configured with little or no end-user intervention, for instance by automatically loading device drivers and allocating resources for the devices. Furthermore, network devices can be associated with other network devices such as a personal computer to facilitate seamless integration of network devices with a computer operating system. | 10-27-2011 |
20110264774 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING DEVICE PARAMETERS IN DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER LINE ACCESS NETWORK - A method for configuring device parameters in a Digital Subscriber Line access network is disclosed. According to the method, a managing device sends a parameter modifying command to a managed device; the managed device makes a response to the parameter modifying command and modifies parameters; the managed device obtains an applying opportunity of unapplied parameters; the managed device applies the unapplied parameters according to the applying opportunity. A Digital Subscriber Line access system and a network device are also disclosed. | 10-27-2011 |
20110270957 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOGGING TRACE EVENTS OF A NETWORK DEVICE - A method for logging trace events of a network device in a network is described herein. A plurality of log events may be generated based on a source level. The plurality of log events is stored to a log buffer of the network device. The log buffer is monitored for a trigger event, which is a condition in the network. It is determined whether the trigger event is detected. Upon detecting the trigger event, one or more log events of the plurality of log events in an ex-ante window of the log buffer are determined. A log event of the one or more log events is provided to a system log. Upon determining the trigger event is not detected, it is determined whether the one or more log events of the plurality of log events in the ex-ante window satisfy a log level. A severity of the source level is lower than a severity of the log level. | 11-03-2011 |
20110276667 | PCRF TRIGGERED RULES CLEANUP - Various embodiments relate to a system and related method of handling a plurality of user messages originating from a user device in a communications network. Various embodiments relate to a Policy Charging and Rules Node (PCRN) receiving an initial message from a first device, while anticipating a complementary message from a second device. Upon receipt of the complementary message, the PCRN may pair the messages and generate a rule from the paired message. If the PCRN does not receive the complementary message, the PCRN may generate the rule from only the initially-received message or may ignore the message. The PCRN may treat each received message independent from each other so that lack of receipt of a complementary message does not affect the creation of rules from another paired message. | 11-10-2011 |
20110276668 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR ENABLING TERMINAL TO BE MANAGED BY MULTIPLE SERVERS - A method, an apparatus, and a communication system for enabling a terminal to be managed by multiple servers are disclosed. The method includes: receiving, by a terminal, configuration information sent by a first server; generating a virtual device according to the configuration information; receiving management information from a second server; and managing the virtual device according to the management information. The terminal generates a virtual device locally so that the terminal can be managed by multiple servers; or the range of servers that manage the terminal is widened in the terminal, and the data model in the terminal is set so that multiple servers can manage one terminal. | 11-10-2011 |
20110282978 | BROWSER PLUG-IN - A plug-in runs on a user computer as a part of or in conjunction with a browser and works only on a requested minimum resolvable URL entered by the user before the user types in the complete URL and before the user receives a page load error like “404 page not found.” Once the minimum resolvable URL is entered, a connection is made to the network address. A client component of the browser analyzes the home page of the web site for all the sub-links present on the page. These links are analyzed, validated, resolved, and structured together before presenting to the user. It presents only live links and the site map in a structured format to the user. The user can see the list of available live pages in the browser's address bar drop-down menu with the anchored text. | 11-17-2011 |
20110289198 | TECHNIQUES FOR EVALUATING AND MANAGING CLOUD NETWORKS VIA POLITICAL AND NATURAL EVENTS - Techniques for evaluating and managing cloud networks via political and natural events are provided. Geographical locations for cloud processing environments are combined with attributes and usage metrics to form associations between each cloud processing environment's geographical location and that cloud's corresponding attributes and usage metrics. Some associations and attributes relate to political and natural events. The political and natural events are used to update a proper selection of a particular cloud processing environment to handle targeted services. | 11-24-2011 |
20110289199 | DIGITAL MEDIA RENDERER FOR USE WITH A CONTENT SYSTEM - A computer-implemented system and method for implementing a digital media renderer for use with a content system. Embodiments include: providing a digital media renderer including an audio/video transport component, a connection manager component, and a rendering control component; receiving, at the digital media renderer from a control point, a request to play a media content item, the request including information indicative of a media format corresponding to the media content item; executing the connection manager component, by use of a data processor, to determine if the media format is supported by the digital media renderer; executing the audio/video transport component, by use of the data processor, to manage a uniform resource identifier (URI) associated with the media content item and to manage the transport of the media content item for rendering; and executing the rendering control component, by use of the data processor, to change a device setting in rendering hardware. | 11-24-2011 |
20110302282 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COPYING SETTINGS OF A DEVICE TO ANOTHER DEVICE, PARTICULARLY FOR COPYING SETTINGS BETWEEN LAMPS - The invention relates to copying of settings of a device to another device so that a user does not have to set up each device of a network of devices, such as to set up each lamp of a lighting system with a network of lamps. A basic idea of the invention is to equip a device such as a lamp with a network transmitter and receiver with a form of proximity detection in order to enable a user to easily copy the settings of one device to another device within their proximity. An embodiment of the invention provides a system for copying settings of one device to another device, comprising
| 12-08-2011 |
20110314137 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REMOTE CONFIGURATION OF A DEVICE - Method for remote configuration of a device via a network by means of a remote autoconfiguration server (ACS), wherein the configuration includes creating new data, or modifying or deleting writeable data of the device. The TR-069 CPE WAN management protocol may be used for communicating between the ACS and the device. The remote management protocol uses sessions consisting of transactions, where a transaction is a single request followed by a single response. Within a session, when writeable data has to be created, modified or deleted by the ACS, at least the writeable data to be created, deleted or modified are write-locked for other management agents at the transaction level. The write-lock is released within the session, after a successful configuration and/or after a failure. | 12-22-2011 |
20120005318 | Network Problem Determination - Techniques for problem determination are provided. The techniques include identifying one or more configuration items in two or more systems connected to one or more networks, performing a comparison of one or more common configuration items from the one or more configuration items in the two or more systems connected to one or more networks, and using the comparison to detect deviation between one or more configuration items of one of the two or more systems and one or more respective configuration items in the other one or more systems. | 01-05-2012 |
20120005319 | Dynamic Modification of the Address of a Proxy - In certain embodiments, a method includes receiving, at a first address of a proxy, a first request for access to a network from an application on an endpoint and forwarding, by the proxy, the request to the network on behalf of the application from the first address of the proxy. The method also includes determining, by the proxy, to change the address of the proxy from the first address to a second address and determining, by the proxy, the second address. Even further, the method includes changing, by the proxy, the address of the proxy to the second address. Moreover, the method includes receiving, at the second address of the proxy, a second request for access to the network from the application. The method also includes forwarding, by the proxy, the second request to the network on behalf of the application from the second address of the proxy. | 01-05-2012 |
20120011233 | Device Communication, Monitoring and Control Architecture and Method - A communication interface and a device control, management and monitoring system are provided to enable the networking of and communication between a multiple devices operating under different protocols. The communication interface may act as a translator or protocol converter that reformats transmissions from one protocol to another based on protocol compatibility between the recipient and transmitting devices. The device control and monitoring system may store predefined rules that are triggered when specified conditions associated with the networked devices are detected. The rules may specify an action to take such as transmitting a discount offer to a user or turning off a light. According to one or more arrangements, the communication interface may act as an intermediary between the networked devices and the device control system so that the device control system is not required to understand or be compatible with the various other protocols used by the networked devices. | 01-12-2012 |
20120011234 | METHOD FOR ENABLING IPV 6 HOST TO ACCESS IPV4 HOST, METHOD FOR OBTAINING IPV6 ADDRESS PREFIX, AND TRANSLATION APPARATUS - The present disclosure relates to a method for enabling an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) host to access an Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) host, a method for obtaining an IPv6 address prefix, and a translation apparatus. The method includes: obtaining, by a source host, an address prefix used for translating an IPv4 address into an IPv6 address; and translating, by a source host, an IPv4 address into an IPv6 address. The translation apparatus includes: a prefix obtaining unit and an address translating unit. The prefix obtaining unit is configured to obtain an address prefix used for translating an IPv4 address into an IPv6 address, and the address translating unit is configured to perform translation between IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. | 01-12-2012 |
20120016974 | BUSINESS PROCESS UTILIZING SYSTEMS, DEVICES AND METHODS ENGENDERING COOPERATION AMONG SERVICE PROVIDERS TO MAXIMIZE END USER SATISFACTION - Methods, systems, and devices for providing a plurality of services to premises over one or more communication networks and providing one or more advertisements over a plurality of service virtual networks as well as business process associated such methods, systems, and devices are disclosed. Systems and devices may include a primary server, one or more secure access nodes and a secondary server that supports one or more services to one or more end point devices. Business process associated with such services may include revenue sharing for providing such services as well as commissions and transactions fees. Particular service may also include providing cross-service functional data, targeted advertising and targeted e-commerce services. | 01-19-2012 |
20120023207 | AUTOMATIC ASSIGNMENT OF HARDWARE ADDRESSES WITHIN COMPUTER NETWORKS - In general, techniques are described for automatic assignment of hardware addresses within computer networks. As one example, a network device comprising a physical network interface and a control unit may implement these techniques. The network interface receives a first message from a client device requesting a layer three (L3) network address. The first message also includes a layer two (L2) hardware address currently assigned to a network interface of the client device. The control unit selects a replacement L2 hardware address for use by the network interface of the client device as a replacement for the L2 hardware address included in the first message and generates a second message having a field that specifies the replacement L2 hardware address. The network interface outputs the second message to the client device so as to automatically assign the replacement L2 hardware address for use by the network interface of the client device. | 01-26-2012 |
20120023208 | MANAGING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN NODES IN A VIRTUAL NETWORK - A method for managing communication between nodes in a virtual network is provided. A first computing system utilizes first information to forward first data to the second computing system in a physical network. If the first information is incorrect, the second computing system forwards an unlearning request to the first computing system, and the first computing system updates or deletes the first information. If the first information is not available, the first computing system forwards the first data to a group of computing systems in the physical network by way of an unknown network service. Upon receiving the first data, the second computing system or a third computing system in the physical network forwards a learning request to the first computing system, and the first computing system utilizes the learning request to generate the first information. | 01-26-2012 |
20120030322 | USER TERMINAL AND METHOD OF MANAGING APPLICATION OF THE TERMINAL - According to one embodiment, a data transceiver accepts a new application file, and a setting information processor transfers and copies setting information described in a setting information area of an existent application file, to a corresponding setting information area of the new application file. | 02-02-2012 |
20120030323 | Method and apparatus for managing data of operation system - A server for an operation system includes a monitor to monitor a status of another server, a first storage to retain a first network configuration information, a second storage to copy the first network configuration information when an abnormality is detected in the another server, a third storage to retain a first update history information including update information of a network configuration information obtained from a client in the operation system, and an operation configuration manager to update the first network configuration information and a second network configuration information retained in the another server when the another server recovers from the abnormality. The operation configuration manager is configured to update the first network configuration information and the second network configuration information based on the first update history information and a second update history information retained in the another server. | 02-02-2012 |
20120036237 | DATA CONSISTENCY WITHIN A FEDERATION INFRASTRUCTURE - A primary node is elected from among a plurality of nodes in a replica set of nodes. The primary node accepts and processes client data access requests. The replica set includes the primary node and other secondary nodes. The primary node receives client data access requests and assigns a data sequence number to each client data access request that mutates state in the order the client data access requests are received. The data sequence numbers include a linearized processing order that is followed by each of the nodes in the replica set. The primary node sends the mutating client data access requests including any corresponding data sequence numbers to the secondary nodes. The primary node receives, from a threshold number of secondary nodes, an acknowledgement indicating reception of the client data access request. The primary node commits the data mutating access request. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036238 | Method and system for providing on-demand content delivery for an origin server - An infrastructure “insurance” mechanism enables a Web site to fail over to a content delivery network (CDN) upon a given occurrence at the site. Upon such occurrence, at least some portion of the site's content is served preferentially from the CDN so that end users that desire the content can still get it, even if the content is not then available from the origin site. In operation, content requests are serviced from the site in the usual manner, e.g., by resolving DNS queries to the site's IP address, until detection of the given occurrence. Thereafter, DNS queries are managed by a CDN dynamic DNS-based request routing mechanism so that such queries are resolved to optimal CDN edge servers. After the event that caused the occurrence has passed, control of the site's DNS may be returned from the CDN back to the origin server's DNS mechanism. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036239 | CLIENT PROCESSOR DEVICE FOR BUILDING APPLICATION FILES FROM FILE FRAGMENTS FOR DIFFERENT VERSIONS OF AN APPLICATION - A client processor including a communications receiver for receiving file fragments for the device, a micro-controller system including a microcontroller and a programmable non-volatile memory system, for building and storing application and data files from the fragments, and executing an application of the device by processing at least one application file and associated data identified by configuration instructions included in at least one of the fragments. | 02-09-2012 |
20120036240 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONFIGURING A NETWORK - Methods and systems for configuring a network are described. A method may include detecting, during installation of a software program on a computing device, a router coupled to the computing device. The software program may be executable by a processor to selectively initiate a connection to a network via the router based on a security level of the router The method may also include modifying the security level of the router to satisfy a threshold security level. The threshold security level may be specified by a service provider of the network. | 02-09-2012 |
20120042057 | METHOD FOR MANAGEMENT OF CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT - A customer premises equipment (CPE) and related method uses a configuration file that updates parameters of the CPE by connecting to an operator server. A determination is made if the configuration parameters of the CPE device correspond to the configuration parameters in the operator individually, and the configuration parameter values of the operator are assigned to the configuration parameter values of the CPE when the configuration parameters of the CPE correspond to the configuration parameters in the operator. | 02-16-2012 |
20120047240 | Performance Tuning for Software as a Performance Level Service - A mechanism is provided for performance tuning for software as a performance level service. At the request of a customer, a cloud provider may use a performance tuning component to determine performance parameters to increase performance of an application running on a given hardware platform. The cloud provider may then generate a tuning configuration and associate the tuning configuration with the customer such that when the cloud provider deploys a customer's software to a partition in a host system, the cloud provider sends the tuning configuration with the deployment package. The performance tuning component at the host system then applies the performance parameters in the tuning configuration to increase performance. | 02-23-2012 |
20120066357 | AUTOMATED NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE TEST AND DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREFOR - A testing system provides automated testing of one or more network infrastructures. The testing system may automatically reconfigure one or more devices within a network infrastructure and then conduct testing on the newly configured network infrastructure. Test results may be used to diagnose network anomalies and to compare performance or other characteristics of various network configurations. In one embodiment, the testing system tests a communication channel between a front-end and back-end mechanism where data traffic is encoded between the front-end and back-end mechanism. | 03-15-2012 |
20120072558 | CLUSTERED FILESYSTEM WITH MEMBERSHIP VERSION SUPPORT - A computer system with read/write access to storage devices creates a snapshot of a data volume at a point in time while continuing to accept access requests to the mirrored data volume by copying before making changes to the base data volume. Multiple snapshots may be made of the same data volume at different points in time. Only data that is not stored in a previous snapshot volume or in the base data volume are stored in the most recent snapshot volume. | 03-22-2012 |
20120079084 | LOCATION DEPENDENT CNNECTIVITY SETTINGS FOR TERMINAL DEVICES - A method of providing connectivity settings to a terminal device includes the steps of: | 03-29-2012 |
20120084412 | CONFIGURATION REPORTING - A method includes transmitting a configuration policy from a policy service to one or more managed computing devices. The configuration policy includes values of each of a plurality of configuration parameters and identifies a subset of configuration parameters to be reported to the policy service. The method also includes receiving report data at the policy service from at least one of the managed computing devices. The report data includes results of processing the configuration policy. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084413 | Mechanism for Installing Monitoring Utilities Using Universal Performance Monitor - A universal performance monitor includes an abstraction layer for managing multiple disparate monitoring tools on one or more computing devices. During runtime of the universal performance monitor on a first computing device, the universal performance monitor establishes a secure channel between the first computing device and a second computing device. The universal performance monitor queries the second computing device via the secure channel to determine whether the second computing device includes a specified monitoring tool. Upon determining that the second computing device does not include the specified monitoring tool, the universal performance monitor causes the second computing device to obtain the specified monitoring tool from a designated location, to install the specified monitoring tool with a particular configuration, to execute the specified monitoring tool and to redirect an output of the specified monitoring tool to the first computing device via the first secure channel. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084414 | AUTOMATIC REPLICATION OF VIRTUAL MACHINES - Systems and methods are disclosed herein to automatically replicate virtual machine image (VM) files on secondary VM computing devices, from a primary VM computing device. The secondary VM computing devices are automatically selected by constantly reviewing the operating parameter values (e.g., cost of resources, power consumption, etc.) of a number of secondary VM computing devices available of storing VM image replicas. The replica of the primary VM image is stored in the secondary VM computing devices in geographically disparate cloud locations. The primary VM image is automatically broken into constituent data blocks stored in an active index, which is compared against a stale index of data blocks. When an update is detected in the primary VM image, the comparison of indices will indicate that there is new data. Only the new data is used to update the secondary VM images, thereby reducing network traffic and latency issues. | 04-05-2012 |
20120084415 | METHOD AND EQUIPMENT FOR SELF-CONFIGURING TRANSMISSION IN SELF-ORGANIZED NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method and device for transmission self-configuration in a Self-Organized Network (SON), said method includes: a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client reporting a device identifier of this DHCP client to a DHCP server; said DHCP server configuring a transmission parameter for said DHCP client according to said device identifier, and sending said transmission parameter down to said DHCP client, said transmission parameter at least including an IP address of said DHCP client; and said DHCP client performing self-configuration according to said transmission parameter. The present invention uses the device identifier to allocate a fixed IP address, which is able to overcome the drawbacks caused by using the MAC address to allocate the fixed IP, and has a very strong maintainability. | 04-05-2012 |
20120089711 | LIVE MIGRATION METHOD FOR LARGE-SCALE IT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS - Migrating services and clients from a legacy topology to a new topology. A method includes receiving user input selecting a first client managed by a first configuration management system to migrate to a second configuration management system. Dependencies of the first client are determined, including determining services on which the first client depends to function in a topology. The dependencies of the first client including services and their data on which the first client depends to function in a topology are migrated to a second configuration management system or an administrator is alerted to the dependencies of the first client including services and their data on which the first client depends to function in a topology. | 04-12-2012 |
20120089712 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING NETWORK RESOURCE ADDRESS MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods are provided for allowing a user to obtain an intended network resource address. An undesired network resource address (NRA) which had been mistakenly entered by a user may be identified as being undesired. In response, an intended NRA may be determined and provided to the user. For example, a database of undesired NRAs may be access to determine an intended NRA (e.g., based on an association of the undesired NRA with an intended NRA). The undesired NRA database may be located local to or remote from the user equipment. The NRA database may be updated in response to, for example, receiving an undesired address command from the user. | 04-12-2012 |
20120096134 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MIGRATION OF NETWORK ENTITIES TO A CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE - A network ontology can be determined for at least one node indicated for migration. The network ontology can describe nodes with which the indicated node has a communication relationship. These nodes and the indicated node can be added to a migration group, and each node of the migration group can be migrated to a cloud infrastructure. | 04-19-2012 |
20120102162 | DYNAMIC BANDWIDTH ADJUSTMENT FOR MULTIPLE SERVICE SUPPORT - A system and method are provided for dynamically modifying a first bandwidth profile assigned to end user | 04-26-2012 |
20120102163 | SERVER CLONING IN A COMPUTING-ON-DEMAND SYSTEM - A system may convert a server into a reference server, create a clone of the reference server in a selected network, place the clone in a user network, and notify a user that the clone server is ready for use. | 04-26-2012 |
20120110150 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPGRADING COMPONENTS OF A CLUSTER - An approach is provided for upgrading components of a cluster. One or more components of at least one server of a cluster of servers are determined to be upgraded. Status information of the cluster, the at least one server, or a combination thereof is determined. It is determined whether to initiate another upgrade of one or more other components of the at least one server, another one of the servers, or a combination thereof based, at least in part, on the status information. | 05-03-2012 |
20120117208 | Dynamic Address Assignment for Address Aggregation in Low Power and Lossy Networks - A node in a Low power and Lossy Network (LLN) is managed by monitoring a routing configuration on a node in a LLN. A triggering parameter that is used to invoke an address change on a child node is tracked and a threshold against which to compare the triggering parameter is accessed. The triggering parameter is compared to the threshold. Based on results of comparing the triggering parameter to the threshold, it is determined that an address change at the child node is appropriate. An address change of a child node appearing in the routing configuration is invoked based on the determination that an address change is appropriate. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117209 | LOCATION CONTROL SERVICE - In embodiments of a location control service, location data that identifies the location of a device is stored in a memory module, such as secured non-volatile memory or a storage module, of the device along with a timestamp that correlates to local time at the location of the device. A determination is then made as to whether the location of the device has changed. Functionality of the device can be disabled, and access to data stored on the device restricted, when determining that a change in location of the device was not authorized. Alternatively, the location data can be updated to identify a new location of the device when determining that a change in location of the device was authorized. | 05-10-2012 |
20120117210 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing device includes: a selection unit that selects a second wireless provider used when an application service is provided to a wireless terminal device on the basis of a connection request transmitted from the wireless terminal device storing contract authorization information of a first wireless provider constituting a plurality of wireless providers providing a wireless connection service through a wireless line, the connection request being based on a user operation for using the application service, from the plurality of wireless providers on the basis of the content of the application service and a position of the wireless terminal device; and a control unit that controls rewriting instruction information for rewriting contract authorization information stored in the wireless terminal device into contract authorization information of the second wireless provider to be transmitted to the wireless terminal device. | 05-10-2012 |
20120124185 | Architecture and Protocol for Extensible and Scalable Communication - A system performs information technology (IT) tasks using a computer. Examples of IT tasks include installing or configuring software, displaying alerts, executing programs or scripts on the endpoint, or logging activities. In an embodiment of the system, a connection initialization module receives a request for a persistent connection over a network from a managed endpoint. The request is accepted and a persistent connection is opened with the managed endpoint. A tier-1 module then receives configuration information from the managed endpoint over the persistent connection. The configuration information includes a list of functional plugins on the managed endpoint, where a functional plugin comprises a software module for performing an IT task. The tier-1 module stores this configuration information along with information describing the persistent connection and maintains the persistent connection in an open state. | 05-17-2012 |
20120131156 | OBTAINING UNIQUE ADDRESSES AND FULLY-QUALIFIED DOMAIN NAMES IN A SERVER HOSTING SYSTEM - A server hosting system provides managed servers for tenants. Managed servers for different tenants can have the same IP addresses and fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs). A management system of the server hosting system receives a DNS data message from a tenant router in the server hosting system. The DNS data message specifies an IP address of one of the managed servers, a tenant-side FQDN for the managed server, and an IP address of the tenant router. The managed server and the tenant router are associated with a given tenant. The IP address is also an IP address of another one of the managed servers. In response, the management system obtains a management-side IP address and a management-side FQDN for the managed server. The management system then updates a Domain Name System (DNS) record to associate the management-side FQDN with the management-side IP address. | 05-24-2012 |
20120136975 | SIMPLE HOME NETWORKING - A network management system is provided for managing a computer network. The management system is configured to represent the computer network as having one of a plurality of defined network states. Once the state of the network has been identified, the management system can assist the user in making modifications to the computer network and in making recommendations to the user for possible modifications to the computer network. These modifications can include, for example, configuring network devices, removing network devices, replacing network devices, and adding new network devices. | 05-31-2012 |
20120151020 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOTE MODIFICATION OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus for updating the system configuration settings of a computer system Embodiments include a remote system configuration system that enables a user to update the system configuration of a target machine from a server machine over a network or similar communications system. Another embodiment includes a system configuration method using a bus master device to write system configuration data into a target computer system. | 06-14-2012 |
20120151021 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOTE MODIFICATION OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus for updating the system configuration settings of a computer system Embodiments include a remote system configuration system that enables a user to update the system configuration of a target machine from a server machine over a network or similar communications system. Another embodiment includes a system configuration method using a bus master device to write system configuration data into a target computer system. | 06-14-2012 |
20120158925 | MONITORING A MODEL-BASED DISTRIBUTED APPLICATION - A method for monitoring a model-based distributed application includes accessing a declarative application model describing an application intent, and deploying a model-based distributed application in accordance with the declarative application model. Events associated with the deployed application are received from a node. The received events are aggregated into node-level aggregations using a node manager. The node-level aggregations are aggregated into higher-level metrics based on the declarative application model. The higher-level metrics are stored for use in making subsequent decisions related to the behavior of the deployed application. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158926 | SYSTEM FOR RESTORING ORIGINAL CONFIGURATION AFTER TIMEOUT ADN METHOD THEREOF - A system for restoring original configuration after timeout and the method thereof are provided. After the invention determines that a local control device does not send a response message to a remote network device during a response time, and the network configuration of the local control device is restored to an original configuration backed up beforehand. The disclosed system and the method automatically restore the error configuration by a remote network device, and achieve the effect of reducing manpower and time. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158927 | ACTIVE MONITORING SYSTEM FOR SERIAL MONITORING DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - An active monitoring system for serial monitoring devices and the method thereof are provided. By receiving serial data from a serial monitoring device on a triggering device and analyzing the serial data to generate a device tag, the mechanism transmits the packed device tag actively to a server through a network. The server automatically generates a tag compliant with the Object Linking and Embedding for Process Control (OPC) according to the device tag for monitoring. The mechanism improves the compatibility and efficiency of monitoring and bandwidth usage. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158928 | Activate Attribute for Service Profiles in Unified Computing System - An enterprise computing system is provided comprising a plurality of server computers and a management server configured to communicate with the plurality of server computers. The management server stores data indicating the service profiles installed on respective server computers and an activation status of the service profiles on the respective server computers. Each service profile comprises data defining attributes for the server computer and includes an activation attribute for the service profile indicating whether the service profile is active on the corresponding server computer. The management server sends the service profiles to the together with an activation attribute for each service profile to server computers such that any service profile that is installed on multiple server computers is active on one server computer at any given time. | 06-21-2012 |
20120166601 | Distributed Network Interfaces for Application Cloaking and Spoofing - Systems and methods associated with distributing an application's network interface over nodes of a networking fabric are presented. Nodes of the fabric can operate as interface modules, each taking on a role or responsibility for a portion of the application's network address including IP address, port assignments, or other portions of the network address. Interface modules of the networking nodes can then spoof or cloak the application to provide security against internal or external threats. | 06-28-2012 |
20120173681 | Systems and Methods for Setting Registry Service Status - A system, method, and computer-readable medium enable a domain name or host name registry to effectively manage status codes associated with the domain or host. Status codes are organized into status sets that can be added, removed, activated, or deactivated in accordance with a suitable change request. The status codes corresponding to a removed status set that are also enabled according to other active status sets are not removed when the removal of the status set is processed. | 07-05-2012 |
20120173682 | DYNAMIC DEVICE CONFIGURATION USING PREDICATES - Methods and apparatuses that store a generic profile in a client device for configuration are described. The generic profile may include profile payloads associated with profile predicates. The profile payloads may specify a range of possible settings for configuring the client device. The profile predicates may specify which of the possible settings are applicable for the configuration according to system states of the client device. Changes in the system states may be dynamically determined during runtime. A portion of the profile payload applicable for the determined changes of the system states may be identified via associated profile predicates. As a result, the configuration of the client device may be updated for the change of the system states by applying the identified portion of the profile payload. | 07-05-2012 |
20120173683 | METHOD FOR NETWORK DEVICE CONFIGURATION - A network device initially has no configuration data and is permitted only to query a known network address. From this address a server verifies the connection and authorizes another server to download to the network device the necessary configuration to carry out its purpose. This configuration may not be amended and is not retained on power loss. Any updates are carried out by a complete reload of configuration data. | 07-05-2012 |
20120179791 | CONSISTENCY DOMAINS FOR REPLICATION IN DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING - A computing device performs an operation by a first computing device and updates a shared system state on the first computing device based on the operation. The computing device causes the shared system state to be updated on a second computing device using a strongly consistent replication mechanism, wherein the first computing device and the second computing device are members of a first consistency domain. The computing device also causes the shared system state to be updated on a third computing device using a weakly consistent replication mechanism, wherein the third computing device is a member of a second consistency domain. | 07-12-2012 |
20120179792 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING DEVICE CONNECTION, COMBINATION DEVICE AND HOST DEVICE - The embodiments of the present invention provide a method for processing device connection, a combination device and a host device. A method for processing device connection, includes: after being plugged into a host device, receiving a device descriptor modification instruction sent by the host device, modifying a device descriptor according to the device descriptor modification instruction and performing device reconnection processing, sending the modified device descriptor to the host device so that the host device establishes a new network connection according to the modified device descriptor. In the embodiments of the present invention, a user does not need to restart the host device to access the network using a RNDIS device in the combination device, which makes it convenient for the user to operate. | 07-12-2012 |
20120179793 | Resource Allocation - A method of allocating resources in a computing device where resources are allocated to clients according to requests from the clients, said allocation of resources being at least partially determined by system settings, said computing device comprising a message queue where a request from a client for a resource allocation has a corresponding message in said queue, said method comprising the step of prioritising messages in said queue. Said priorities for said messages may comprise, in descending order of priority: messages corresponding to changes which may affect existing resource allocations, messages corresponding to system related requests for resources and then messages corresponding to user related requests for resources. | 07-12-2012 |
20120179794 | WEB-BASED ASSET MANAGEMENT - The method and system of the present invention provides an improved technique for replacing, implementing and managing computer-related assets. A technician accesses the World Wide Web through a user's computer. The information resident on the computer, including information regarding the computer and the user's preferences, are downloaded to a remote storage medium through the World Wide Web. Once downloaded, all information may be removed from the user's computer. Subsequently, the technician accesses another computer such as, for example, a new computer that has been assigned to the same user. The technician accesses the World Wide Web through the new computer and downloads the information previously stored on the remote storage medium. This information can then be used to install the user's prior applications, settings and preferences on the new computer. | 07-12-2012 |
20120179795 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING TELECOM DEVICE, AND TELECOM DEVICE - The present disclosure provides a method and a system for configuring telecom device, and telecom device. The method includes: receiving configuration data and a first confirmed-commit operation command that are sent by a user, to perform a confirmed-commit operation; cancelling the confirmed-commit operation upon receiving a cancelling command sent by the user; storing the configuration data in a candidate configuration database; and receiving modified configuration data and a second confirmed-commit operation command to perform a new confirmed-commit, where the modified configuration data and the second confirmed-commit operation command are obtained after the user modifies the candidate configuration database. In the present disclosure, by cancelling the confirmed-commit operation and reserving the configuration candidate database, a mechanism to intervene the confirmed-commit operation initiatively is provided to the user to improve configuration efficiency, and relieve data transmission pressure. | 07-12-2012 |
20120191826 | Device-Health-Based Dynamic Configuration of Network Management Systems Suited for Network Operations - In an embodiment, in response to receiving an indication of a change in quality of services provided by a network device, collecting one or more performance measurements of the network device; by applying a network policy to the measurements, determining one or more operations capable of performing on the network device to enhance the quality of services; in response to determining that the network device is not configured for instrumentation, causing automatic self-configuration of the network device by execution of the one or more operations on the network device; wherein the method is performed by one or more computing devices. | 07-26-2012 |
20120191827 | APPARATUS MANAGEMENT DEVICE, APPARATUS CONFIGURATION METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An apparatus management device, which is connected via a network to an apparatus, includes a storage unit configured to store a default value for a parameter of the apparatus and a table including coefficients associated with counter values indicating operational status of the apparatus; an apparatus information obtaining unit configured to obtain apparatus information including a counter value indicating the operational status from the apparatus; a parameter value calculation unit configured to obtain one of the coefficients that corresponds to the counter value in the obtained apparatus information by referring to the table, and to calculate an update value for the parameter of the apparatus by multiplying the default value by the one of the coefficients; and a setting unit configured to set the parameter of the apparatus at the update value. | 07-26-2012 |
20120198034 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING DNS SERVICES - A system for providing a Domain Name System (DNS) service may include providing an agent for installation on a subscriber device. The subscriber device may be connected to the DNS service via an entry point device. The system includes receiving, from the agent, agent data indicative of a subscriber identifier and a unique identifier associated with the entry point device. The system may then determine, based on the agent data, a current Internet Protocol (IP) address associated with the entry point device and associate the unique identifier with the subscriber identifier. The system may then dynamically map the subscriber identifier to the current IP address and provide DNS service to the subscriber device based on the current IP address. | 08-02-2012 |
20120203877 | DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR ENABLING RECONFIGURATION OF SERVICES SUPPORTED BY A NETWORK OF DEVICES - Systems, devices, and methods are disclosed for enabling the reconfiguration of services supported by a network of devices. Such reconfiguration can be realized dynamically and in real time without compromising the security of the overall system from external threats or internal malfunctions. These systems, devices and methods may provide a first functional stack supporting a previous version of a specific service and the provisioning of a second functional stack dynamically and in real-time that supports an updated version of the specific service. In addition, an administration function may be included in the embodiment such that the administration function manages and controls the functional stacks and network operations. Using these mechanisms, an existing service can be changed dynamically or a new service can be added dynamically in a secure manner without interruption of other existing services. | 08-09-2012 |
20120203878 | Method for Changing Ethernet MTU Size on Demand with No Data Loss - A method and system for substantially avoiding loss of data and enabling continuing connection to the application during an MTU size changing operation in an active network computing device. Logic is added to the device driver, which logic provides several enhancements to the MTU size changing operation/process. Among these enhancements are: (1) logic for temporarily pausing the data coming in from the linked partner while changing the MTU size; (2) logic for returning a “device busy” status to higher-protocol transmit requests during the MTU size changing process. This second logic prevents the application from issuing new requests until the busy signal is removed; and (3) logic for enabling resumption of both flows when the MTU size change is completed. With this new logic, the device driver/adapter does not have any transmit and receive packets to process for a short period of time, while the MTU size change is ongoing. | 08-09-2012 |
20120209969 | Browser adjusting method and mobile terminal - The disclosure discloses a method for adjusting a mobile terminal browser, which comprises setting an upper threshold value and a lower threshold value of a downloading speed for a mobile terminal browser. The method further comprises: calculating a current average downloading speed of the mobile terminal browser; comparing the current average downloading speed with the upper threshold value and the lower threshold value of the downloading speed; resetting network parameters of the mobile terminal browser when the current average downloading speed is less than the lower threshold value of the downloading speed or greater than the upper threshold value of the downloading speed. The disclosure also discloses a mobile terminal. The disclosure optimizes the network parameters of the mobile terminal browser according to the current network environment, and simultaneously increases downloading efficiency and stability of the mobile terminal browser, thereby avoiding the process of manually setting the relative network parameters of the browser by a mobile terminal user according to different network environments, so that the browser is more humanized and user experience is greatly improved. | 08-16-2012 |
20120221690 | Data Processing Environment Monitoring - A method, apparatus, and computer program product for monitoring operation of data processing resources in a data processing environment. A request to monitor a service instance may be received by a processor unit, wherein the service instance comprises a data processing resource provided as a service by a provider of the data processing resources. Responsive to receiving the request to monitor the service instance, the processor unit establishes communications to receive monitored data from the service instance. The processor unit receives the monitored data from the service instance and provides the monitored data to a monitoring infrastructure, wherein the monitoring infrastructure is configured to monitor operation of the data processing resources. | 08-30-2012 |
20120221691 | Network Real Estate Analysis - A method can be used to analyze the “real-estate” performance of content items within a network site. The method can comprise determining the click distance to reach each content item and determining the performance of each content item. The method can also comprise calculating a predicted value for performance based on statistical relationship between location and performance observed in a population of content items. The method can comprise comparing the predicted and actual performance. If a content item has an actual performance greater than its predicted performance, then it may be promoted to a better location in the site and the converse for poorer performing content. | 08-30-2012 |
20120233300 | CONFIGURING CONNECTION AGENTS - In some embodiments, a method includes detecting, in a connection agent, a problem connecting to a network; receiving, in the connection agent, replacement configuration options, wherein the replacement configuration options are for updating a configuration profile for the connection agent; wherein the configuration profile for the connection agent and the replacement configuration options define parameter values used in connecting to a network; updating the configuration profile for the connection agent based on the replacement configuration options; and determining, using testing components in the connection agent, test results that indicate the replacement configuration options do not solve the problem connecting to the network. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233301 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION BETWEEN PLATFORMS IN A PORTABLE TERMINAL BASED ON A MULTI-SOFTWARE PLATFORM - A method of synchronizing information between platforms in a portable terminal based on a multi-software platform is provided. The method includes verifying that a first software platform is changed to a second software platform; and if the first software platform is changed to the second software platform, defining volume information of the changed second software platform with reference to volume information of the first software platform. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233302 | VIRTUAL NETWORK CONTROLLER - A virtual network controller is described. The controller receives a request for the provision of a slice of a network to a virtual network operator. The controller determines whether the slice can be provided from existing resources, whether the slice can be provided if the existing resources are re-configured, or whether the slice can only be provided if additional resources are obtained. The controller then automatically takes the action required in order to provide the requested slice. The controller can also be used to release resources that are no longer required. Additionally, the controller can be used to re-optimize the network on request. | 09-13-2012 |
20120246282 | COMMUNICATION SETTING METHOD, SERVER, RELAY DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - A communication setting method includes receiving, at a server in a network to be connected to another network by a plurality of connected devices, a setting request from a terminal to the server, selecting, at the server, one of the plurality of connected devices based on terminal location information regarding the location of the terminal relating to the received setting request, transmitting a setting response including identification information for identifying the selected connected device form the server to the terminal, setting, at the terminal, the connected device of this terminal based on the identification information included in the setting response. | 09-27-2012 |
20120246283 | CONFIGURATION FILE OVERRIDE - In one embodiment, a router is configured to relay a provisioning request originating from a remote network device to a remote provisioning server. When the router receives back a provisioning response including provisioning information identifying a first remotely stored configuration file, the router is configured to modify the provisioning information such that the modified provisioning information no longer identifies the first remotely stored configuration file. The router then relays the provisioning reply, which may identify a second different configuration file, to the remote network device. | 09-27-2012 |
20120246284 | Method and System for Enabling Rendering of Electronic Media Content Via a Secure Ad Hoc Network Configuration Utilizing a Handheld Wireless Communication Device - A handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) establishes an ad hoc network comprising interconnected networks for a user. The HWCD gains access to content on a first device and controls communication of the content from the first device via the HWCD to a second device. The HWCD enables the second device to consume the content. The content may be streamed from the first device via the HWCD to the second device. The first device is a service provider network device or other network device. The access may be authenticated and/or secure. Secure access to the content is extended from the first device to the second device. The ad hoc network is configured and/or reconfigured until communication is complete. The HWCD comprises multiple wireless interfaces. The ad hoc network comprises a PAN, WLAN, WAN and/or cellular network. The HWCD may hand-off among base stations during communication of the content. | 09-27-2012 |
20120254379 | TECHNIQUES ENABLING EFFICIENT SYNCHRONIZED AUTHENTICATED NETWORK ACCESS - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of accelerating a network connection to a wireless network and avoiding unnecessary wait intervals, comprising synchronizing DHCP discover or request packets with an authentication mechanism utilized by the wireless network. In an embodiment of the present invention the wireless network may conform to Institute for Electrical and Engineers (IEEE) 802.1x standards and specific 802.1x states may trigger a DHCP request to ensure a DHCP process will start in a synchronized way, on-time when needed and capable to provide network access. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254380 | Enabling Selective Policy Driven Propagation of Configuration Elements Between and Among a Host and a Plurality of Guests - Configuration elements are selectively propagated between a host and multiple guests, based on a policy. Configuration elements of the host and guests are monitored. Changes made to monitored configuration elements are detected. It is determined whether to propagate changed configuration elements between operating system environments based on the policy. It can be determined to propagate changed configuration element(s) from a source to one or more destinations in response to factors such as the identity and/or classification of the source, or the type, attribute(s), content and/or identity of the changed configuration element(s). The creation of new guests is detected. In response, at least one configuration element from at least one source is automatically propagated to a newly created guest. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254381 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CAPTURING A SCREEN IMAGE OF A REMOTELY MANAGED MACHINE - Disclosed are an apparatus and method of remotely communicating with a managed machine. One example method may include identifying the managed machine operating in a communication network, transmitting a connection establishment message to the managed machine over the communication network, and receiving an acceptance message from the managed machine. The method may also include requesting a screen capture of present operating conditions of the managed machine, and receiving the screen capture formatted in a compressed format. The administrator may be able to receive and view the screen capture via a compressed thumbnail format. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254382 | MOBILE DEVICE CONFIGURATION BASED ON STATUS AND LOCATION - A computing device's settings, specifically audio or video settings are adjusted based on a status and/or location of an event participant carrying the device. An event coordination service or an application on the computing device may match the participant's status and location to event location information. Upon matching either status or location, the computing device's settings may be modified to prevent audio feedback by any audio equipment at the event location or similar video interference. | 10-04-2012 |
20120254383 | MANAGEMENT OF DATA NODES IN AN APPLICATION SERVER - Described herein are systems and methods for managing nodes in a data grid from within an application server. The system includes an application server having an administrative user interface, and a data grid including a plurality of nodes operating as a cluster, wherein each node in the data grid has node attributes that define node functionality. A configuration repository provided by the application server is accessible to the administrative user interface, and stores configuration information used by the administrative user interface to directly manage the plurality of nodes in the data grid. Upon receiving interpreted configuration information from the application server at a node manager client on the application server, the node manager client modifies the operation of the plurality of nodes in the data grid by overriding node attributes according to the interpreted configuration information, wherein the plurality of nodes thereafter operate according to the configuration information. | 10-04-2012 |
20120259960 | Dynamic Self-Configuration of Heterogenous Monitoring Agent Networks - A centralized, policy-driven approach allows dynamic self-configuration and self-deployment of large scale, complex, heterogeneous monitoring agent networks. Such an approach resolves the scalability and manageability issues of manually configured conventional agents. Embodiments of the agents can be self-configuring using a dynamic, adaptive technique. An administrator can group hosts on which agents into groups that have similarly configured agents. | 10-11-2012 |
20120265864 | INTERFACING BETWEEN A COMMAND LINE INTERFACE-BASED APPLICATION PROGRAM AND A REMOTE NETWORK DEVICE - In one embodiment, a method for interfacing between a command-line-interface (CLI)-based application program (CLI-AP) residing in a client network device, and remote network devices. The method includes predefining at least one CLI-based program routine(CLI-PR) comprising at least one CLI-based command wherein the CLI-PR is defined externally to the CLI-AP, determining by CLI-AP a set of data to be obtained from the remote network device; selecting by CLI-AP a predefined CLI-PR from the predefined CLI-PRs, the selected predefined CLI-PR corresponding to the remote network device and determined set of data to be obtained; instructing the client network device by CLI-AP to execute the selected predefined CLI-PR, wherein executing selected predefined PR will cause the selected predefined CLI-PR to obtain the determined set of data from remote network device and to configure the obtained data in a predetermined format; and querying configured data by CLI-AP to retrieve the determined set of data. | 10-18-2012 |
20120278457 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO MONITOR AND ANALYZE CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT DOWNTIME IN A VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) SERVICE NETWORK - Systems and methods to monitor and analyze customer premises equipment downtime in a Voice over Internet Protocol service network are disclosed. Example methods for a dynamic host configuration protocol server disclosed herein include assigning a replacement Internet protocol address to a residential gateway, the replacement Internet protocol address to replace a first Internet protocol address assigned to at least one of the residential gateway or customer premises equipment associated with the residential gateway, sending a first address change message to a session border controller, and sending a second address change message to a lost subscriber time server, the first and second address change messages to indicate that the first Internet protocol address has been replaced by the replacement Internet protocol address. | 11-01-2012 |
20120284375 | TRANSACTION-BASED NETWORK LAYER ADDRESS ROTATION - The present disclosure describes techniques for changing a network layer address (e.g., an IPv6 address) on a transaction or request basis. The change may be in response to an explicit request from an application or in response to detecting that certain predefined events have occurred. For example, the address may be changed each time a network transaction (or n-network transactions) is completed. Doing so could allow an email client to send messages (or groups of message) using distinct network addresses, making it difficult, if not impossible for the sending client to be blocked. | 11-08-2012 |
20120284376 | PUBLIC WIRELESS NETWORK PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM WITH MOBILE DEVICE DATA COLLECTION AGENTS - A controller and method of controlling a mobile device. The controller is coupled to a mobile device through a mobile communications environment. The controller is coupled to the mobile communications environment at a location remote from the mobile device, and includes a receiver that receives data from the mobile device, a processor that evaluates the data received from the mobile device based upon rules for the mobile device, and a transmitter that sends data to the mobile device to at least one of alert the user to a condition and modify current operating parameters on the mobile device. | 11-08-2012 |
20120284377 | METHOD FOR UPDATING DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS FOR FIELD DEVICES IN PROCESS AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY - A method for updating device descriptions for field devices in process automation technology by loading the required descriptions from an external server (S), by means of an application programme, into a controller (for example, PC | 11-08-2012 |
20120284378 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONDUCTING COMMUNICATIONS OVER A NETWORK - A method and system for conducting communications over a network is provided. An embodiment includes a server that is connectable to a client machine via a virtual private network that includes a VPN concentrator. The client machine and the VPN concentrator are configured to delay renegotiation of the VPN link in the event that an important stream is being carried over the VPN link. | 11-08-2012 |
20120297036 | Modifying Operating Parameters of a Device Based on Aging Information - Monitoring aging information for multiple devices. Aging information of the devices may be received. Statistics regarding the multiple devices may be determined based on the aging information. For at least some of the devices, update information may be determined based on the respective aging information. The update information may include modifications to operating parameters of the devices. For example, the devices may operate according to initial parameters that are above sustainable parameters and the update information may lower the operating parameters based on the aging information. | 11-22-2012 |
20120303771 | DETECTING CHANGE OF SETTINGS STORED ON A REMOTE SERVER BY MAKING USE OF A NETWORK FILTER DRIVER - Embodiments relate to techniques for efficiently and effectively propagating changes from a server to a client using a network filter driver configured to monitor network traffic for a signature. Techniques are presented for synchronizing settings with a remote server device. A method is provided, including (a) monitoring web-based messages exchanged between the computerized client device and the remote server device across a network, (b) detecting a pre-defined pattern within a particular message of the monitored web-based messages exchanged between the computerized client device and the remote server device, (c) in response to detecting the pre-defined pattern within the particular message, evaluating the particular message to determine whether a set of server settings has changed, and (d) in response to determining that the set of server settings has changed, updating a local version of the set of server settings. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 11-29-2012 |
20120311110 | RE-PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMABLE HARDWARE DEVICES WITHOUT SYSTEM DOWNTIME - Programmable hardware devices are re-programmed without system downtime. To re-program the device, the device is quiesced, state associated with the device is saved, updates are loaded, the state is restored and operations are resumed, all transparent to the system, except for a possible delay in the system. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311111 | DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION OF CLOUD RESOURCES - A cloud configuration system is described herein that provides the ability to dynamically reconfigure a set of computing resources to define a cloud into multiple separate logical cloud instances. The system includes a reconfiguration tool that reads an existing system and network configuration from a configuration store, allows the user to change the configuration into multiple logical systems, performs some syntactical checks, and stores the new configuration into the configuration store. The system also includes a validation tool that imports the existing and new configurations from the configuration store, determines what devices need to be changed in the network, and enables a deployment engine to proceed with the changes. The deployment engine applies each change until all changes are completed. The validation tool can then revalidate the post-deployment changes to make sure the new inventory is recognized and no existing setting is broken. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311112 | RE-PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMABLE HARDWARE DEVICES WITHOUT SYSTEM DOWNTIME - Programmable hardware devices are re-programmed without system downtime. To re-program the device, the device is quiesced, state associated with the device is saved, updates are loaded, the state is restored and operations are resumed, all transparent to the system, except for a possible delay in the system. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311113 | STORAGE DEVICE - A storage device 101 includes: a connection managing means 102 for managing a status of a connection between network ports 111 to 114 and client devices 121 to 124 connected via the network ports; a storage processing means 103 for receiving write target data transmitted from the client devices and storing the data into a predetermined storage device 105; and a data characteristics measuring means 104 for executing measurement of a predetermined characteristic of predetermined data received when a write request is made by the client devices. The connection managing means 102 changes the network port connected with the client devices in accordance with a result of the measurement by the data characteristics measuring means. | 12-06-2012 |
20120311114 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING INCORRECT RESPONSES TO NETWORK QUERIES - A system that determines if a DNS server suffers from a particular known functional limitation. During operation, the system sends an exploratory query to the DNS server, wherein the exploratory query is specially constructed so as to detect the existence of a functional limitation in the DNS server without causing the DNS server to fail. Next, the system receives an answer to the exploratory query from the DNS server. If the DNS server gives an incorrect response, the system can take actions as may be desired for the implementation. For example, the system may display a message identifying the functional limitation, or the system may establish a mode of operation where it avoids performing those types of DNS queries known to present a risk of crashing the particular Internet gateway. | 12-06-2012 |
20120317252 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADDRESS CONFLICT RESOLUTION - A method and system for resolving a conflict between private internet protocol addresses assigned in a network between an internet protocol security remote access server (IRAS) and an internet protocol security remote access client (IRAC) arranged behind a network address translator (NAT) router in the network. By modifying internet key exchange version2 (IKEv2) and internet key exchange (IKE) protocol negotiations between IRAC and IRAS to include a private attribute used by IRAC to send all its internet protocol (IP) subnet addresses to IRAS, IRAS dynamically resolves any conflict of the IP addresses with that of its internal networks by mapping and assigning non-conflicting virtual IP addresses and network subnet addresses to IRAC for IRAC to access the internal networks of IRAS. The conflict resolving mechanism used in run time allows mobile virtual private networks (VPN) to access corporate networks employing IP routers implementing IP security (IPsec) remote access mechanism without access failure due to IP address conflicts. | 12-13-2012 |
20120317253 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, SETTINGS CHANGING METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - An information processing device connected with a plurality of devices through a network, comprises: a scheduling part for configuring a change date and time to change settings for each of the plurality of devices; a device status determination part for determining if each of the plurality of devices is ready for settings change at the same time as the scheduled change time on the day before the scheduled change date; a device status controlling part for causing the device not ready for the settings change to become ready for the settings change on the scheduled change date and time when it is determined by the device status determination part that one or more of the plurality of devices are not ready for the settings change; and a settings changing part for changing the settings for each of the plurality of devices on the scheduled change date and time. | 12-13-2012 |
20120324065 | Method and system for upgrading network device - The disclosure discloses a method for upgrading a network device, which comprises: establishing, by a network management server, a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connection with the network device ( | 12-20-2012 |
20130007230 | METHOD OF NETWORK RECONFIGURATION IN OPTICAL TRANSPORT NETWORKS - A method of reconfiguring a network having a transport plane for carrying subscriber traffic flows within end-to-end connections, a control plane for managing at least a portion of resources of the transport plane allocated to each connection, and a management plane for implementing management functions in the control plane and any resources of the transport plane that are not managed by the control plane. The method comprises installing an updated version of a control plane name space for a target node of the network. For each connection traversing the target node: a control plane to management plane migration is performed for removing connection state in the control plane associated with the connection, so as to transfer ownership of the connection from the control plane to the management plane; followed by a management plane to control plane migration for installing new connection state in the control plane associated with the connection, so as to transfer ownership of the connection from the management plant to the control plane, the new connection state being defined using the updated version of the control plane name space. | 01-03-2013 |
20130007231 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT - The present invention relates to methods and apparatus that enable device management to be performed via broadcast/multicast transmission. A server may receive a request, for example, from a device owner, to update settings in deployed devices. The deployed devices may be identified by at least one group ID. The server may initiate broadcast/multicast transmission to the identified devices by transmitting a settings update message to a communication server. The communication server may then transmit the settings update message to the identified devices via broadcast/multicast transmission. | 01-03-2013 |
20130013753 | Embedded Configuration Variance Detector - An information handling system includes a connection via a network interface to a network, an embedded service processor, and a storage device. The connection via a network interface is adapted to receive data representing configuration settings of a baseline information handling system. The embedded service processor is adapted to compare the data representing the configuration settings of the information handling system to the data representing the configuration settings of the baseline information handling system. The storage device is adapted to store the data representing the differences between the configuration settings of the information handling system and the configuration settings of the baseline information handling system. | 01-10-2013 |
20130013754 | NETWORK SCORING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A client may be configured to access a network by identifying a network bandwidth configuration setting to be used by the client in accessing a networked content source, enabling the client to access the content source using the network bandwidth configuration setting, monitoring client access to the content source, comparing client access metrics to metrics associated with the network bandwidth configuration setting, determining, based on the comparison, whether to adjust the network bandwidth configuration settings for the client, and adjusting the network bandwidth configuration setting if appropriate. | 01-10-2013 |
20130031225 | REMOTELY PRECONFIGURING A COMPUTING DEVICE - Disclosed are various embodiments for preconfiguring a computing device remotely. A virtualized version of a computing device may be executed remotely and preconfigured by a user. The configuration of the virtualized version of the computing device may then be replicated to a physical version of the computing device. Alternatively, the physical version of the computing device may be executed remotely and preconfigured directly by the user. | 01-31-2013 |
20130031226 | BROADCAST-BASED UPDATE MANAGEMENT - A first computing device establishes an update service associated with an identifier. When the first computing device receives a broadcast message from a second computing device that includes a network address of the second computing device, the first computing device transmits to the network address a message including the identifier associated with the update service. The update service receives from the second computing device a request including the identifier and in return transmits to the second computing device information about available updates. | 01-31-2013 |
20130036210 | REMOTE CONFIGURATION AND SELECTIVE DISTRIBUTION OF PRODUCT CONTENT TO MEDICAL DEVICES - A distribution server for distributing updates for medical devices is disclosed. The distribution server can provide an update to a configuration device which configures a device to be updated. The distribution server includes a portal that allows an update provider to provide an update package including an update file and update package data relating to the update file. The update package data includes dependency data indicating a condition that must be satisfied by the configuration device or a second device so that the update file can be installed on the device to be updated. The distribution server further includes a database that is configured to store package data of a plurality of update packages and locations of update files of the plurality of update packages. The server further includes a distribution module that receives an inquiry on behalf of a medical device and provides a list of available update packages. | 02-07-2013 |
20130046866 | METER ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - Aspects of the invention provide for managing access to utility meters. In one embodiment, a system includes: a computing device communicatively connected to a first utility meter and a second utility meter, the computing device adapted to manage access to the first utility meter and the second utility meter by performing actions comprising: receiving a program file for updating at least one of the first utility meter and the second utility meter, each utility meter including a meter table; comparing the program file to the meter table of the at least one of the first utility meter and the second utility meter to determine if the program file includes authorized bit changes to the meter table; and updating, in response to the comparing, the meter table of the at least one of the first utility meter and the second utility meter. | 02-21-2013 |
20130046867 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELF-ASSIGNING NETWORK IDENTIFICATION CODES - A method and apparatus for self-assigning network identification codes to a network device. In one embodiment, a method comprises determining if the network device comprises a default network identification code. If the network identification code comprises a default network identification code, transmitting a first network identification code and determining whether a first response was received to the first network identification code transmission. If no response was received, assigning the first network identification code to the network device. If the first response was received, transmitting a second network identification code and determining whether a second response in response to the second network identification code transmission was received. If so, assigning the second network identification code to the network device. | 02-21-2013 |
20130046868 | Manipulation of a Mobile Device Setting Using a Network-Based Application - A method of modifying, with a network-based application, a device setting of a mobile device is provided. The method may include receiving, over a network at a client computer, from a server, the device setting of the mobile device. The device setting may include a screen color, wireless connection information, a screen wallpaper, and a ringtone. A graphical depiction of the mobile device is presented at the client computer, a portion of the graphical depiction showing the device setting such that the device setting appears the device setting would appear on a display of the mobile device. A request for a modification of the device setting is received by the client computer. Finally, the request for the modification is sent to the mobile device over the network via the server. | 02-21-2013 |
20130054766 | Methods, Systems, and Products for Notifying of Enhancements to Quality of Service and Experience - Methods, systems, and products notify users when changes in a communication network improve quality of service. When a service provider changes a configuration parameter in the communications network, a change to the configuration parameter is compared to a rule. When the change to the configuration parameter results in a perceivable improvement in quality of service, a notification is sent to a user's device. The notification informs the user's device of the improvement in quality of service caused by the change to the configuration parameter. | 02-28-2013 |
20130067047 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM NODE AND METHOD FOR USE IN A NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM NODE FOR RE-CONFIGURING A SET OF DATA NETWORK NODES IN A DATA NETWORK - The present disclosure relates to a network management system node for re-configuring a set of data network nodes in a data network in response to a change management request requesting a creation of a network service to be performed in the data network. The network management system node is characterised in that it includes a processing unit configured to store each change of network service information in created, added and/or updated data network nodes in the resulting set of data network nodes established by the re-configuration of the set of data network nodes based on the change management request requesting the creation of the network service as a change-set of network service information, and associate the change-set of network service information with a network service instance indicating the moment of the creation of the network service. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067048 | Multi-Entity Management - In embodiments of multi-entity management, a multi-entity system can include an infrastructure service (DHCP) that services client devices configured for network connectivity on a network. The multi-entity system also includes server devices configured for network configuration settings control and management of the client devices on the network. A multi-entity manager instantiates a configuration dialog for display with user-selectable controls that are selectable to initiate a single-step configuration operation of one or more of the network configuration settings at the server devices. | 03-14-2013 |
20130067049 | UPDATING A SWITCH SOFTWARE IMAGE IN A DISTRIBUTED FABRIC PROTOCOL (DFP) SWITCHING NETWORK - A switching network has a plurality of switches including at least a switch and a managing master switch. At the managing master switch, a first capability vector (CV) is received from the switch. The managing master switch determines whether the first CV is compatible with at least a second CV in a network membership data structure that records CVs of multiple switches in the switching network. In response to detecting an incompatibility, the managing master switch initiates an image update to an image of the switch. In response to a failure of the image update at the switch, the switch boots utilizing a mini-DC module that reestablishes communication between the switch with the managing master switch and retries the image update. | 03-14-2013 |
20130073700 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING INFORMATION BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS SERVICE PROVIDERS - Disclosed are a system for sharing information between heterogeneous service providers, including: a first service provider configured to generate first situation information based on an abnormal situation of a system; a second service provider configured to receive the first situation information from the first service provider, generate second situation information corresponding to the received first situation information; and the TTP configured to receive the first situation information from the first service provider, receive the second situation information from the second service provider, generate correspondence information based on the received information, and share the generated correspondence information. | 03-21-2013 |
20130073701 | Information Processing System, Setting Alteration Method and Computer Program - A manufacturer's in-house server receives serial numbers from BD players, and transmits the received serial numbers to an SCM server. The SCM server collates the serial numbers into a control table, and transmits information to the manufacturer's in-house server such as information showing which dispatch destination and sales outlet each BD player passed through before being installed in a user's home (i.e., distribution information). In accordance with the collated control table, the manufacturer's in-house server then transmits flags that are used to make settings appropriate to each BD player. Each BD player then alters its own settings in accordance with its received flag. For example, a setting may be made to start up an application for an information delivery service (i.e., a delivery service for contents such as moving pictures and the like) that the BD player is to be connected to. | 03-21-2013 |
20130080607 | AUTOMATED DEVICE PROVISIONING AND ACTIVATION - Devices, methods, and computer readable media for communicating with a network system over a wireless access network, the network system comprising one or more network elements, and communicating with one or more other devices over one or more of a wireless local-area network, a personal-area network, and a near-field network; obtaining configuration information from the one or more network elements, the configuration information enabling modification of a first service policy setting for authorizing provision of a forwarding service to the one or more other devices; obtaining a user input associated with enabling or disabling the forwarding service; and modifying a second service policy setting in accordance with the user input, the second service policy setting for assisting in enabling or disabling the forwarding service. | 03-28-2013 |
20130080608 | Automatic Management of Configuration Parameters and Parameter Management Engine - A mechanism is provided for an automatic management of configuration parameters of computing resources between related computing systems. Services instances of computing systems are generated according to associated configuration parameter sets and respective corresponding configuration parameter values. A determination is made of configuration parameter value changes in the configuration parameter sets for each generated service instance of the computing systems. The configuration parameter value changes for each generated service instance are compared with a first subset configuration parameter values and with a second subset configuration parameter values. The determined configuration parameter value changes in one service instance are then propagated to another service instance according to a definition of rules for mapping configuration parameters and their values between second subsets of configuration parameters. | 03-28-2013 |
20130080609 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Traffic data while the system is in operation is collected for a certain time as a preprocess. Typical patterns are extracted from the collected traffic data. Next, stream programs are created for the individual typical patterns and stored for the future reference. Next, the IDs of alternative tasks for transition among different stream programs are stored. In actual system operation, the system measures traffic data regularly or at any time, compares the resultant patterns with the typical patterns, and selects a stream program corresponding to the closest typical pattern as the next phase. Program shutdown time when shifting from the stream program in the present phase to the next phase can be reduced by gradually shifting empty tasks in the present phase to the next stream program as alternative tasks in consideration of the cost of switching between tasks, the cost of transferring data among resources, and so on. | 03-28-2013 |
20130080610 | I/O DEVICE MANAGEMENT METHOD, COMPUTER SYSTEM, AND I/O DEVICE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM PRODUCT - An I/O device management method of a computer system including a computer, an I/O device, an I/O switch assigning the I/O device to the computer, and a management computer of managing the I/O device, in which a process of the management processor includes a step of acquiring a piece of configuration information of the I/O device assigned to the computer, and a piece of configuration information of a network connected with I/O device, a step of acquiring a flow amount indicating an amount of a data transmitted and received via the I/O device for each I/O type, a step of determining the I/O device of changing an assignment to the computer based on the pieces of acquired information, and a step of issuing an assignment change instruction to the I/O switch. | 03-28-2013 |
20130086231 | UPGRADE SYSTEM AND METHOD HAVING ADAPTIVE CHANGEABLE UPGRADE PROCESS - An upgrade system, an upgrade type of which may be adaptively changed, and an upgrade method includes a server, an upgrade type of which may be adaptively changed, a client, an upgrade type of which may be adaptively changed, and a ticket controlling apparatus. The server includes: a server interface unit receiving information relating to an upgrade from a ticket controlling apparatus comprising a ticket; a pushing unit in which at least one client to be upgraded is registered; and a pushing scheduling unit connecting to the ticket controlling apparatus, receiving the information relating to the upgrade from the server interface unit, and scheduling an upgrade of the at least one client by using the pushing unit based on the received information relating to the upgrade. The ticket comprises information about a distribution strategy, information about the upgrade type, and information about a module to be distributed. | 04-04-2013 |
20130086232 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTERING A DEVICE TO SERVER - A method for registering a device in a server is provided. The method includes connecting a first device positioned in a certain area to a server; and registering a second device by transmitting identification information of the second device positioned in the certain area to the server by the first device, and storing the identification information of the second device in the server. | 04-04-2013 |
20130086233 | DYNAMIC MODIFICATION OF A SUBSCRIBER CONNECTION - In one embodiment, a method comprises receiving a request to modify a subscriber connection to a network element. The method also includes modifying attributes of the subscriber connection, within a memory of the network element, without disconnecting the subscriber connection from the network element. | 04-04-2013 |
20130091257 | NETWORK RESOURCE CONSOLIDATION AND DECOMISSIONING ANALYSIS - A method and system for providing a computing environment that permits simulations directed towards the consolidation and decommissioning of network elements associated with a network. The computing environment permits a user to designate a network element for decommission and exclude a network element from decommission and/or consolidation. The computing environment includes consolidation and decommission analytics that minimize a total operational cost of the network including leased network elements. The consolidation and decommission analytics includes accounting for penalties associated with early termination of leases and break-even values. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091258 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT BASED ON AN ASSOCIATED ELECTRIC GRID TOPOLOGY - In one embodiment, a computer determines a grid topology of an electric grid based on one or more electric grid configuration description files, and also determines a network topology of a computer network used to provide communication to grid devices of the electric grid. By assessing whether the network topology is configured to meet one or more communication requirements of the grid topology (e.g., initially and/or through monitoring for grid changes), the computer may trigger a corrective action (e.g., alarm or reconfiguration) in response to the network topology not being configured to meet the one or more communication requirements of the grid topology. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091259 | Out-Of-Band Management Of Third Party Adapter Configuration Settings In A Computing System - Out-of-band management of third party adapter configuration settings in a computing system, the computing system including one or more configurable adapters, including: retrieving, by an out-of-band configuration manager from an out-of-band configuration repository, out-of-band configuration settings for a configurable adapter; determining, by the out-of-band configuration manager, whether the out-of-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter have been updated; and responsive to determining that the out-of-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter have been updated: updating, by the out-of-band configuration manager, in-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter, wherein the in-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter are stored in an in-band configuration repository; retrieving, by the out-of-band configuration manager from the in-band configuration repository, metadata that includes updated in-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter; and sending, by the out-of-band configuration manager to a configuration implementer, the metadata that includes updated in-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091260 | Out-Of-Band Management Of Third Party Adapter Configuration Settings In A Computing System - Out-of-band management of third party adapter configuration settings in a computing system, the computing system including one or more configurable adapters, including: retrieving, by an out-of-band configuration manager from an out-of-band configuration repository, out-of-band configuration settings for a configurable adapter; determining, by the out-of-band configuration manager, whether the out-of-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter have been updated; and responsive to determining that the out-of-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter have been updated: updating, by the out-of-band configuration manager, in-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter, wherein the in-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter are stored in an in-band configuration repository; retrieving, by the out-of-band configuration manager from the in-band configuration repository, metadata that includes updated in-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter; and sending, by the out-of-band configuration manager to a configuration implementer, the metadata that includes updated in-band configuration settings for the configurable adapter. | 04-11-2013 |
20130097292 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR SELF-MAINTAINING INTERACTIVE COMMUNICATIONS PRIVILEGES GOVERNING INTERACTIVE COMMUNICATIONS WITH ENTITIES OUTSIDE A DOMAIN - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media for self-maintaining interactive communications privileges governing interactive communications with entities outside a domain are disclosed. The interactive communications privileges can be used to process interactive communications requests between entities inside a domain and entities outside the domain. Currently configured interactive communications privileges configured for an entity outside a domain may no longer be desired, reliable, or valid with the current capabilities of the entity outside the domain. In this regard, embodiments disclosed herein involve self-maintaining interactive communications privileges configured for entities outside a domain. Review of interactive communications privileges configured for entities outside a domain can be performed to determine if those interactive communications configurations should be maintained, in whole or part, or not maintained. In this manner, the burden and complexity of maintaining interactive communications privileges for entities outside the domain on a domain administrator or other administrator may be reduced or alleviated. | 04-18-2013 |
20130097293 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A DEPLOYMENT OF APPLICATIONS - According to one example, there is provided a method of determining a deployment of applications in a computer system comprising a plurality of computing hardware. The method comprises obtaining, for each of a plurality of applications, a set of application characteristics, assigning each of the plurality of applications, using the obtained characteristics, to one of a plurality of predetermined application models, and determining a virtual server deployment plan and an application deployment plan, the determination based in part on characteristics of the computer system, characteristics of the applications, and application model compatibility data. | 04-18-2013 |
20130097294 | SERVICE CONFIGURATION METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a service configuration method, apparatus and system. The provided method includes steps as follows: configuring a VLAN ID of a port on an intermediate device according to preset configuration information, where the port is connected to a client; after a DHCP request message which is from the client through the intermediate device is received, obtaining a MAC address in the DHCP request message, and obtaining an IP address corresponding to the MAC address from the configuration information; and sending a response message carrying the IP address and the VLAN ID to the client through the intermediate device, so that the client sets a local virtual local area network identifier to the VLAN ID and sets a local IP address to the IP address after receiving the response message. | 04-18-2013 |
20130103810 | Periodic Ambient Waveform Analysis for Dynamic Device Configuration - Client devices periodically capture ambient audio waveforms and modify their own device configuration based on the captured audio waveform. In particular embodiments, client devices generate waveform fingerprints and upload the fingerprints to a server for analysis. The server compares the waveform fingerprints to a database of stored waveform fingerprints, and upon finding a match, pushes content or other information to the client device. The fingerprints in the database may be uploaded by other users, and compared to the received client waveform fingerprint based on common location or other social factors. Thus a client's location may be enhanced if the location of users whose fingerprints match the client's is known, and, based upon this enhanced location, the server may transmit an instruction to the device to modify its device configuration. | 04-25-2013 |
20130103811 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING A COMMUNICATION FOR AT LEAST ONE DEVICE - A method for providing a communication for at least one device that is provided for a motor vehicle and is linked via a network of the motor vehicle to at least one further device, where data between the at least one device and the at least one further device are exchanged via an Internet Protocol. Also a device and a network are provided. | 04-25-2013 |
20130110995 | IMAGE FORMING SYSTEM INCLUDING IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS SUPPORTING PLURALITY OF NETWORK INTERFACES AND METHOD OF EDITING ROUTING TABLE THEREOF | 05-02-2013 |
20130117422 | Hybrid Configuration Engine - A hybrid configuration engine and associated method for reducing the complexity and burden of configuring rich coexistence between an on-premise solution and a cloud-based solution is described herein and illustrated in the accompanying figures. The hybrid configuration engine determines the current state of the on-premise solution and the cloud-based solution and learns the desired configuration state. After obtaining the current and desired configuration state information, the hybrid configuration engine determines and automatically performs steps to reach the desired configuration state. Finally, the hybrid configuration engine provides instructions describing the manual steps needed to reach the desired configuration state. | 05-09-2013 |
20130117423 | METHODS FOR MANAGING DATA SYNCHRONIZATION AND DEVICES THEREOF - A method, non-transitory computer readable medium, and apparatus that manage data synchronization include obtaining one or more configuration rules and at least one value for one or more configuration parameters. One or more synchronization rules are generated based on the obtained one or more configuration rules and the one or more configuration parameters. Each of the one or more generated synchronization rules are compared to a corresponding synchronization rule in an existing configuration profile. The existing configuration profile is updated based on the results of the comparison. The updated configuration profile is communicated to a client computing device. | 05-09-2013 |
20130117424 | Computer Device and Method of Providing Configuration Files in a Computer Device - A computer device ( | 05-09-2013 |
20130117425 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING A USER TERMINAL - A method and arrangement in a User Terminal (UT) for updating an operational parameter in the UT, the method is comprising: to register, for at least one software module in the UT, a corresponding validator and/or a corresponding consistency verifier to a proxy module in the UT, wherein the validator is adapted to validate parameter syntax and wherein the consistency verifier is adapted to verify parameter consistency; to receive, from a Service Provider (SP), an operational parameter to be updated in the UT; and to check syntax validity and consistency of the received operational parameter which is based on each validator and/or each consistency verifier registered to the proxy module. | 05-09-2013 |
20130124702 | Method and System For Network Configuration And/Or Provisioning Based On Metadata - Disclosed are various embodiments for configuring a virtual machine. A template for a virtual machine may be generated. The template may include metadata that references data for port profiles for the virtual machine. The template for the virtual machine may be stored in a template repository, and the data for the port profiles may be stored in a port profile database that is separate from the template. | 05-16-2013 |
20130132535 | Network Data Processsing System - A method and apparatus for processing of data packets by a data processing component comprising a plurality of processing resources. A metric value for a current configuration of the processing resources that are processing the data packets is identified. A new configuration of the processing resources is selected using the metric value. The current configuration of the processing resources is changed to the new configuration and data packets are distributed to the new configuration for processing as the data packets are received. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132536 | NETWORK CONTROL SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING MIDDLEBOXES - Some embodiments provide a method for configuring a logical middlebox in a hosting system that includes a set of nodes. The logical middlebox is part of a logical network that includes a set of logical forwarding elements that connect a set of end machines. The method receives a set of configuration data for the logical middlebox. The method uses a stored set of tables describing physical locations of the end machines to identify a set of nodes at which to implement the logical middlebox. The method provides the logical middlebox configuration for distribution to the identified nodes. | 05-23-2013 |
20130132537 | Method and Apparatus for Managing Rehoming of User Endpoint Devices in a Communication Network - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a Domain Name System (DNS) server having a controller to receive new provisioning information for updating a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), and update the FQDN with the new provisioning information. The new provisioning information can include among other things a start time for rehoming one or more user endpoint devices (UEs) assigned to a current session border Controller (S/BC), a move-from record comprising a descriptor of at least the current S/BC, a move-to record comprising a descriptor of at least a new S/BC to which to rehome the one or more UEs, a transfer window representing a total time for the rehoming the one or more UEs to the new S/BC, and a pacing parameter for rehoming the one or more UEs to the new S/BC during the transfer window. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 05-23-2013 |
20130138783 | DEPLOYMENT AND UPDATING OF APPLICATIONS AND DRIVERS ON A CLIENT DEVICE USING AN EXTENSIBLE MARKUP LANGUAGE (XML) CONFIGURATION FILE - The deployment and updating of applications and drivers on a client device having a write-filter is described. A first deployment extensible markup language (XML) configuration file is obtained for deploying a first application or driver at the client device. A first application or driver is deployed on the client device based on the first deployment XML configuration file, while the write-filter of the client device is disabled. The write-filter is enablable to prohibit a file stored on the client device with the write-filter enabled from persisting across a reboot of the device. Following the deployment, automatic updating is performed by determining whether an autoupdate is available, obtaining a second deployment XML configuration file for updating the first application or driver, and updating the first application or driver based on the second deployment XML configuration file, while the write-filter is disabled. The automatic updating may be repeated. | 05-30-2013 |
20130144996 | INTERFACING BETWEEN A COMMAND LINE INTERFACE-BASED APPLICATION PROGRAM AND A REMOTE NETWORK DEVICE - A method for interfacing between a command-line-interface (CLI)-based application program (CLI-AP) residing in a client network device, and remote network devices. The method includes predefining at least one CLI-based program routine (CLI-PR) comprising at least one CLI-based command wherein the CLI-PR is defined externally to the CLI-AP, determining by CLI-AP a set of data to be obtained from the remote network device; selecting by CLI-AP a predefined CLI-PR from the predefined CLI-PRs, the selected predefined CLI-PR corresponding to the remote network device and determined set of data to be obtained; instructing the client network device by CLI-AP to execute the selected predefined CLI-PR, wherein executing selected predefined PR will cause the selected predefined CLI-PR to obtain the determined set of data from remote network device and to configure the obtained data in a predetermined format; and querying configured data by CLI-AP to retrieve the determined set of data. | 06-06-2013 |
20130144997 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING SERVER CONFIGURATIONS - Disclosed are systems and method for synchronizing configuration parameters on a server with a database of stored configuration parameters. One such method includes updating an application configuration parameter on a network server. The update occurs in response to receiving an update of a corresponding stored application configuration parameter in a database. The update is initiated by a particular customer of a web hosting provider. Each application configuration parameter defines at least in part a quantity of a resource on the server available to the particular customer of a web hosting provider. | 06-06-2013 |
20130144998 | METHODS FOR AUTO-CONFIGURING A ROUTER ON AN IP SUBNET - An autoconfiguring data router is connected to a communications network subnet having a second network data router. The autoconfiguring data router includes a configuration determination module that determines configuration attributes for operably connecting the autoconfiguring data router to the subnet, and an autoconfiguration module that configures the autoconfiguring data router according to the configuration attributes so that the autoconfiguring data router is operably connected to the subnet. | 06-06-2013 |
20130144999 | METADATA DRIVEN AUTOMATIC DEPLOYMENT OF DISTRIBUTED SERVER SYSTEMS - Automatic and reliable deployment of system topology to computing devices within an enhanced communication system is provided. Specific roles and features associated with individual devices such as servers are defined in a centrally managed topology document, which is replicated to devices to be configured along with one or more modules for performing local configuration. Upon deployment, the module(s) determine a local device configuration, a desired configuration for the device, and update the device's configuration installing and activating roles and features assigned to the device by the topology document. Feedback regarding the results of the configuration is provided to a central management store such that administration can monitor status of devices within the system. Modifications to the assigned roles and prerequisites for supporting those roles are made dynamically through the same mechanism as system topology changes. | 06-06-2013 |
20130151678 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A set value management service receives a replace request for replacing configuration data of a first image forming apparatus, and searches the second image forming apparatus needs to update configuration data as a result of replacement of the first image forming apparatus. The set value management service updates configuration data of the searched second image forming apparatus. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151679 | HYBRID VIRTUAL COMPUTING ENVIRONMENTS - A computer-implemented method involves two phases. In a first phase (e.g., during a development or testing phase) a secondary computing environment is formed with secondary instances of one or more servers of a primary environment. A communication module configured to establish communication between the secondary instances of the servers in the secondary computing environment and remote computing resources (e.g., “cloud” based servers) via the communication module. The secondary instances of the servers of the primary environment are then operated in conjunction with the remote computing resources. In a second phase (e.g., a production phase), the communication module is reconfigured to establish communication between the servers of the primary environment and the remote computing resources via the communication module. The servers of the primary environment are then operated in conjunction with the remote computing resources. | 06-13-2013 |
20130159478 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCED POWER CONSUMPTION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided in order to dynamically select a network configuration that results in reduced power consumption by the mobile terminal. In this regard, a method is provided that includes characterizing an upcoming communication, wherein the characterization comprises at least one of transmission or reception. The method further includes determining a proposed network configuration based on a determined power consumption level of one or more network configurations available in a geographical area and the characterization of the upcoming communication. The method also includes causing the preferred configuration to be transmitted to a network entity. | 06-20-2013 |
20130159479 | QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) CONFIGURATION IN LOW-POWER AND LOSSY NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a distributed intelligence agent (DIA) in a computer network performs deep packet inspection on received packets to determine packet flows, and calculates per-flow service level agreement (SLA) metrics for the packets based on timestamp values placed in the packets by respective origin devices in the computer network. By comparing the SLA metrics to respective SLAs to determine whether the respective SLAs are met, then in response to a particular SLA not being met for a particular flow, the DIA may download determined quality of service (QoS) configuration parameters to one or more visited devices along n calculated paths from a corresponding origin device for the particular flow to the DIA. In addition, in one or more embodiments, the QoS configuration parameters may be adjusted or de-configured based on whether they were successful. | 06-20-2013 |
20130159480 | Smart Browsing Providers - A web browser program is for execution by a client computer connectable to a plurality of server computers via a computer network. The web browser program automatically reconfigures chrome of a user interface to the web browser program to provide a user access to any one of a plurality of groups of related information. A content display program module is configured to receive content data from a current server computer that is one of the plurality of server computers. The content display program module causes a display, on a content portion of the a display of the client computer, that corresponds to the content data. A chrome display program module is configured to cause a display of chrome on a chrome portion of the client computer display that corresponds to chrome specifiers in a chrome configuration database. | 06-20-2013 |
20130159481 | BEST PRACTICES ANALYSIS OF ZONES AND COMPONENTS IN A NETWORK - Provided is a method for best practices analysis of zones and components in a network. A database has information on components in the network and configuration settings for the components. Best practices rules indicate best practices configuration settings for components in the network. The database and the accessed best practices rules are processed to determine whether the configuration settings for the components in the network satisfy the best practices configuration settings for the components indicated in the best practices rules. A report is generated indicating whether the configuration settings of the components in the network satisfy the best practices configuration settings for the components indicated in the best practices rules. | 06-20-2013 |
20130166706 | EXTENDING A DHCP RELAY TO BACKUP A DHCP SERVER - Techniques are described for providing a backup DHCP server using a DHCP relay agent. Embodiments retrieve DHCP server configuration information specifying a configuration of one or more DHCP servers. Additionally, embodiments monitor, at a DHCP relay agent, DHCP lease traffic between the one or more DHCP servers and one or more DHCP clients passing through the DHCP relay agent. Upon determining that the one or more DHCP servers have failed, DHCP server services are provided at the DHCP relay agent, based on the received DHCP server configuration information and the monitored DHCP lease traffic. | 06-27-2013 |
20130166707 | EXTENDING A DHCP RELAY TO BACKUP A DHCP SERVER - Techniques are described for providing a backup DHCP server using a DHCP relay agent. Embodiments retrieve DHCP server configuration information specifying a configuration of one or more DHCP servers. Additionally, embodiments monitor, at a DHCP relay agent, DHCP lease traffic between the one or more DHCP servers and one or more DHCP clients passing through the DHCP relay agent. Upon determining that the one or more DHCP servers have failed, DHCP server services are provided at the DHCP relay agent, based on the received DHCP server configuration information and the monitored DHCP lease traffic. | 06-27-2013 |
20130166708 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LOCATING OFFENDING NETWORK DEVICE AND MAINTAINING NETWORK INTEGRITY - A system and method detects within an IP network an offending network device that has been adversely affecting the IP network performance. A discovery protocol frame is propagated to successive network switches and is formed as a field having a query for inquiring within each network switch to which the frame is propagated whether the network switch has a database entry regarding the MAC address and switch port for the offending network device to locate the offending network device. This discovery protocol frame includes a command for any network switch that has the offending network device connected thereto to disable the switch port to which the offending network device is connected or block all data traffic from the MAC address of the offending network device. | 06-27-2013 |
20130173765 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ASSIGNING ROLES BETWEEN USER DEVICES - Systems and methods are provided that determine that user equipment devices are within a perceivable range (e.g., a viewing range) of the other. In response to this determination, roles may be assigned to the devices. These roles may be associated with profile settings on the devices that define how information is presented to the user within media guidance applications running on the devices. In some embodiments, the systems and methods may then determine that one of the user equipment devices is no longer within the perceivable range of the other user equipment devices. In response to this determination, the user device that is no longer within the perceivable range of the other devices may be assigned a role such that the presentation of information now occurs on that user device. | 07-04-2013 |
20130173766 | CLUSTER ARCHITECTURE AND CONFIGURATION FOR NETWORK SECURITY DEVICES - A computing device may be joined to a cluster by discovering the device, determining whether the device is eligible to join the cluster, configuring the device, and assigning the device a cluster role. A device may be assigned to act as a cluster master, backup master, active device, standby device, or another role. The cluster master may be configured to assign tasks, such as network flow processing to the cluster devices. The cluster master and backup master may maintain global, run-time synchronization data pertaining to each of the network flows, shared resources, cluster configuration, and the like. The devices within the cluster may monitor one another. Monitoring may include transmitting status messages comprising indicators of device health to the other devices in the cluster. In the event a device satisfies failover conditions, a failover operation to replace the device with another standby device, may be performed. | 07-04-2013 |
20130179549 | INTELLIGENT METHOD OF BUILDING UP TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - An intelligent method of building up a telecommunication network is used to set a Network Element (NE) and an Element Management System (EMS) within an in-band/out-of-band network management framework. The method provides the network element with a random address and makes it connect to the element management system according to a default remote address. After successful connection, the element management system automatically sets up, manages, and allocates the network element. If the network element cannot connect to the element management system by itself, it may receive a Link Layer Discovery Protocol packet about successful connection via multicast generated from network elements nearby. The network may likewise acquire correct connection information about successful connection to the element management system. Thus, this invention allows a newly added network element to be quickly and automatically set in the telecommunication network. | 07-11-2013 |
20130179550 | VIRTUAL DATA CENTER SYSTEM - A provided is a virtual data center system comprises: data center systems; a provisioning system capable of sending and receiving information from the data center systems; and an operational statistics database for storing resource information regarding the data center systems, wherein: by utilizing the resource information, the provisioning system compares resource costs based on the resources of a desired generation of data center system, in accordance with usage of the data center systems from a user system and resource costs based on resources of another generation of data center system currently used by the user, and thereby calculates the resource costs that would be reduced in the event of if migration to the desired generation of data center system occurs; and the data center systems currently used by the user are re-arranged to the desired generation of data center system in response to a control command issued from the user system. | 07-11-2013 |
20130185402 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVELOPING SERVICE PROCESSOR SOLUTIONS - A computer-implementable method. In one embodiment, the method includes the step of initializing operation of a physical service processor to communicatively couple to a remote file system over a communications link. The remote file system has a computer-executable development module for modifying at least one network configuration setting for the physical service processor. The method also includes the step of causing the development module to modify at least one network configuration setting on a virtual service processor that is operative to emulate operation of the physical service processor, and the step of initializing operation of the virtual service processor with the at least one modified network configuration setting. The method further includes the step of verifying that the virtual service processor, when initialized with the at least one modified network configuration setting, operates without error. | 07-18-2013 |
20130185403 | VIRTUAL NETWORK SERVICES - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing virtual network services provided to a network by a self-contained network services system. A controller application may receive a request for a change in network services provided by the self-contained network services system to the network. A new software configuration for a number of network services modules of the self-contained networks services system may be determined based on the received request, and the network services modules may be dynamically configured according to the determined new software configuration. The network and a router associated with the network services system may also be reconfigured to distribute traffic among the network services modules in accordance with the requested change in network services. | 07-18-2013 |
20130198349 | REMOTE SERVER CONFIGURATION - Remotely configuring an online computer system. A configuration file is generated at a management controller associated with a computer system in response to a request from a configuration utility associated with a user device, wherein the user device is located remotely from the computer system. The configuration file is sent from the management controller to the configuration utility via a network connection. A modified configuration file is received at the management controller from the configuration utility via the network connection, wherein the modified configuration file comprises system level changes to a configuration of the computer system. The system level changes from the modified configuration file are implemented at the computer system while an operating system associated with the computer system is online. | 08-01-2013 |
20130198350 | Multi-Class Heterogeneous Clients in a Clustered Filesystem - A cluster of computer system nodes connected by a storage area network include two classes of nodes. The first class of nodes can act as clients or servers, while the other nodes can only be clients. The client-only nodes require much less functionality and can be more easily supported by different operating systems. To minimize the amount of data transmitted during normal operation, the server responsible for maintaining a cluster configuration database repeatedly multicasts the IP address, its incarnation number and the most recent database generation number. Each node stores this information and when a change is detected, each node can request an update of the data needed by that node. A client-only node uses the IP address of the server to connect to the server, to download the information from the cluster database required by the client-only node and to upload local disk connectivity information. | 08-01-2013 |
20130204987 | HARDWARE DEVICE NAME RESOLUTION FOR DETERMINISTIC CONFIGURATION IN A NETWORK APPLIANCE - Inconsistencies between internal logical names assigned to hardware devices and physical labeling of the hardware device connectors are overcome by reassigning internal logical names in a network appliance hosting the hardware devices. The initial logical names that refer to the hardware devices are read from an operating system, along with hardware addresses for the hardware devices. The relationship between the initial logical names and the hardware device addresses is compared against a desired relationship, as may be provided in a configuration file. Undesired relationships between logical names and hardware devices are reassigned so that the logical names are consistent with the physical labeling for the hardware devices. The reassigned logical names can be committed to system resources to make the reassignment persistent. | 08-08-2013 |
20130204988 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOOPBACK PROXY - A method for managing TCP sessions with a mobile device. A loopback proxy is configured within the mobile device to re-direct HTTP requests by the mobile device to a remote server back to the mobile device. The proxy accepts the local TCP connection initiated by the mobile device, extracts address and port information for the remote server from the HTTP request, then communicates with the remote server on behalf of the mobile device in order to open a remote TCP connection. The proxy then fuses the streams of the local TCP connection with those of the remote TCP connection. | 08-08-2013 |
20130212236 | M2M SERVICE ENABLEMENT OVER ACCESS NETWORKS - Upon attachment of a machine-to-machine (M2M) device to a network, the access network determines which service provider to connect the device to. During an initial attachment process, the device can be configured so that it only will connect to a defined M2M service provider. | 08-15-2013 |
20130219029 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOTE MODIFICATION OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus for updating the system configuration settings of a computer system Embodiments include a remote system configuration system that enables a user to update the system configuration of a target machine from a server machine over a network or similar communications system. Another embodiment includes a system configuration method using a bus master device to write system configuration data into a target computer system. | 08-22-2013 |
20130219030 | IN SERVICE UPGRADES FOR A HYPERVISOR OR HARDWARE MANAGER HOSTING VIRTUAL TRAFFIC MANAGERS - Embodiments are directed towards upgrading hypervisors operating in hardware clusters that may be hosting one or more virtual clusters of virtual traffic managers. Virtual clusters may be arranged to span multiple computing devices in the hardware cluster. Spanning the virtual clusters across multiple hardware nodes the virtual cluster may enable the virtual clusters to remain operative while one or more hardware nodes may be upgraded. Hypervisor may include a management control plane for virtual clusters of virtual traffic managers. Hypervisors running on hardware nodes may manage the lower level networking traffic topology while the virtual traffic managers may manage the higher level network processing. Further, hypervisor based management control planes may interface with the virtual clusters and virtual traffic manager's using pluggable translation modules may enable different versions of hypervisor based management control planes and virtual traffic managers to communicate and cooperatively manage network traffic. | 08-22-2013 |
20130219031 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A REMOTE CONTROLLED NETWORK ELEMENT - A method for operating a remote-controlled network element in a telecommunication network includes: configuring the network element with a new configuration; determining whether a network connection failure between the network element and a network management system of the telecommunication network exists after the configuration; and in response to detecting a network connection failure, setting the network element automatically to a standard configuration and establishing a network connection between the network element and the network management system using the standard configuration. Setting the network element automatically to a standard configuration and establishing the network connection includes: loading a previous IPSec certificate in case that the previous Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) certificate has been at least partly replaced during the configuration; and establishing the network connection between the network element and the network management system using the previous IPSec certificate. | 08-22-2013 |
20130227095 | MIGRATION OF PROFILES BETWEEN VIRTUAL CONNECT DOMAINS - Migration of profiles between virtual connect domains is described. In an example, a plurality of validations are performed on a profile from a first virtual connect domain virtualizing devices using a first configuration. The profile is updated based on a second virtual connect domain virtualizing devices using a second configuration. The profile is moved for use by a device in the second virtual connect domain. | 08-29-2013 |
20130232244 | INTELLIGENT ROLLING UPGRADE FOR DATA STORAGE SYSTEMS - Various method, system, and computer program product embodiments for facilitating upgrades in a computing storage environment are provided. In one such embodiment, one of an available plurality of rolling upgrade policies registering at least one selectable upgrade parameter for an upgrade window is selected. A node down tolerance factor is set for at least one node in the computing storage environment. The node down tolerance factor specifies a percentage of elements of the at least one node taken offline to apply the selected one of the available plurality of rolling upgrade policies during the upgrade window. | 09-05-2013 |
20130246589 | Method and System for a Cloud Frame Architecture - A cloud frame provides a framework comprising a monitoring and network services to support hardware nodes such as computing nodes and storage nodes. Cloud frames may be organized into a cluster of cloud frames. Hardware nodes in a cloud frame environment may conduct self-allocation of needed resources, which in turn may be provided by other hardware nodes in the cloud frame environment. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246590 | AUTONOMOUS NETWORK DEVICE CONFIGURATION METHOD - An embodiment of the present invention comprises a method of configuring one or more target network devices for operation, that further comprises the steps of creating an object for deployment to a predetermined target network device, the object having configuration data for configuring the target network device, and at least one of identification data identifying the object, an autonomous encapsulated agent for executing necessary steps for installing the configuration data, identification data identifying the predetermined target network device, and authentication data for authenticating at least one of the predetermined target network device identification data and object identification data, transporting the object to the predetermined target network device, and the autonomous encapsulated agent begins an on-site process of installing the configuration data in the predetermined target network device. | 09-19-2013 |
20130246591 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERIC IP MULTIMEDIA RESIDENTIAL GATEWAYS - A common IP layer client device interface within an IP multimedia gateway (IMG) is configured to connect client devices to broadband IP networks such as the Internet based on determined device capabilities. Broadband IP network interfaces within the IMG are configured to enable communication between the IMG and broadband IP networks based on the determined device capabilities. Content provided by various service managers are communicated with the client devices utilizing the common IP layer client device interface and the configured network interfaces. Network capabilities may be determined during the device and network discovery. Protocol translation, media transcoding and/or dynamic device configuration may be performed based on the determined device capabilities, and based on the determined network capabilities. The IMG may adjust system timing and manage power consumptions for service deployment over corresponding client devices. Information may be routed or distributed by the IMRG among the client devices when needed. | 09-19-2013 |
20130262638 | MIGRATION OF AN EXISTING COMPUTING SYSTEM TO NEW HARDWARE - Software, firmware, and systems are described herein that migrate functionality of a source physical computing device to a destination physical computing device. A non-production copy of data associated with a source physical computing device is created. A configuration of the source physical computing device is determined. A configuration for a destination physical computing device is determined based at least in part on the configuration of the source physical computing device. The destination physical computing device is provided access to data and metadata associated with the source physical computing device using the non-production copy of data associated with the source physical computing device. | 10-03-2013 |
20130262639 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING AN ARRANGEMENT HAVING A COMPUTER SYSTEM AND A TELEPHONE INSTALLATION AND ARRANGEMENT HAVING A COMPUTER SYSTEM AND A TELEPHONE INSTALLATION - A method of configuring an arrangement has a computer system and a telephone installation, wherein the computer system connects to the telephone installation via a data interface and wherein the computer system and the telephone installation can assume at least one first and one second operating state, including generating control data with a control unit in the computer system depending on a change in operating state of the computer system, from the first operating state into the second operating state, exchanging the control data between the computer system and the telephone installation via the data interface, setting up one or more parameters for the second operating state of the telephone installation with a configuration unit in the telephone installation depending on the control data exchanged, and changing the operating state of the telephone installation from the first operating state into the configured second operating state set up. | 10-03-2013 |
20130268639 | SCRIPT MODIFICATION SUGGESTION - A resource of a system is discovered, where a component of the system is to provide the resource. A script is generated for the component providing the resource based on a rule. A suggestion to modify the script is provided based on at least one of a change in the rule, the resource, and the script by a user. | 10-10-2013 |
20130268640 | Method, Proxy Device, and System for Managing Terminal Device - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for managing a terminal device, including: obtaining a description file of a UPnP device management data model of a UPnP device in a home network, where the UPnP device management data model is organized by the UPnP device according to a data model defined by a remote management protocol; establishing a data model meeting CWMP requirements, of the UPnP device according to the description file; sending information about the data model of the UPnP device meeting the CWMP requirements to an ACS; receiving a management command of the ACS for the data model of the UPnP device; and converting the management command into a UPnP device management command and sending it to the UPnP device. | 10-10-2013 |
20130275567 | COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK MANAGEMENT - The present invention provides a segmented network in which each segment comprises one or more routers, one or more communications links to provide connectivity between the router(s) and a segment management module. The segment management module uses operational data to predict the future performance of each element. If the predicted performance will breach a threshold value then a data flow may be re-routed. Re-routing between different segments can lead to network management problems and so the present invention discloses methods by which: segments can expand to acquire a router from another segment; segments can subdivide; and segments can merge together, particularly if a segment comprises too few routers. | 10-17-2013 |
20130282881 | SERVICE DISTRIBUTION METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A service distribution method includes the steps of: firstly generating, by a management system, a corresponding configuration file from service information of a user, and sending the configuration file to an Optical Network Termination (ONT) of the user through an Optical Line Terminal (OLT); and then performing, by the ONT, corresponding configuration in accordance with the configuration file. A service distribution system and a management system are provided. The invention is applied to enable service distribution with good extendibility. | 10-24-2013 |
20130282882 | NETWORK NODE HOSTING A PLURALITY OF CONNECTIVITY SUPERVISION SESSIONS TOWARDS A PLURALITY OF ROUTER INTERFACES - A network node ( | 10-24-2013 |
20130290497 | ESTABLISHING A SECURE WIRELESS NETWORK WITH MINIMUM HUMAN INTERVENTION - Systems, methods and apparatus to join a network are disclosed. An example method includes receiving a manual user action at a zone player that is unconfigured for a first network, the action initiating automatic establishment of a connection to the first network by the zone player; transmitting, by the zone player responsive to the manual user action, a first message over a second network to be received by a device configured for the first network, wherein the first message indicating that the zone player is available to join the first network; receiving, over the second network by the zone player, a second message from the device, the second message generated responsive to receipt of the first message and including a security parameter to join the first network; and establishing a connection to the first network by the zone player using the security parameter without further input by any user via either the zone player or the device. | 10-31-2013 |
20130297756 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF PROVIDING NETWORK ADDRESSES TO IN-PREMISE DEVICES IN A UTILITY NETWORK - One example embodiment provides a method and system where a node in a utility network receives a block of IPv6 network addresses from an access point in the utility network. The utility node allocates an IP network address from the block of IPv6 network addresses received from the access point to an in-premise device which communicates to the utility node over an in-premise network which is not IP based. The utility node proxies the allocated IP address to the utility network, allowing other nodes on the utility network to address and communicate with the in-premise device. | 11-07-2013 |
20130304882 | Systems and Methods for Dynamically Configuring Communication Data Items - Systems and methods reconfigure data transmitted on a network, the network using a communication protocol. The systems and methods include a processor that is operable to receive data from a second device on the network; a memory medium; and a data configurator operable to dynamically reconfigure the data from the second device, with the data from the second device being in the form of a network item defined by the second device. The data configurator is operable to pass the reconfigured data to the processor and/or the memory medium in the form of a device item that is native to the device. A data design tool generates a map configuration to define a unique relationship between the network item and the device item. The map configuration includes a network representation portion for data in the network item and a device representation portion for data in the data item. | 11-14-2013 |
20130304883 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING STATE SYNCHRONIZATION IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can support network management in a network environment. The network environment can include a plurality of configuration daemons (CDs), wherein each CD resides on a switch in the network environment. The CD operates to receive a configuration file that includes a list of known management key (M_Key) values. Furthermore, the CD operates to store the configuration file, and make the configuration file available to a local subnet manager(SM) on the switch, wherein the local SM is associated with a currently used M_Key value. Then, the CD operates to update the local SM with a new M_Key, after receiving an instruction from a master CD that is associated with a master SM in the network environment. | 11-14-2013 |
20130311622 | AUTOMATED TRANSACTION TUNING IN APPLICATION SERVERS - The transaction timeout values for applications deployed in an enterprise application server are dynamically adjusted for each application request made by each of multiple applications. Transaction timeout values are dynamically determined based upon known load and status of database and enterprise network connection conditions and historical data related to the application database requests. Time increments are appended to timeout values as needed and when a transaction timeout event occurs. | 11-21-2013 |
20130311623 | METHOD FOR MANAGING NETWORK SYSTEM - Interdomain federation, for example, generation or management of a virtual network (slice) that extends among domains can be performed without changing a function of a server or a node of a network domain without a function to manage the other domain. A pseudo node receiving a management message with the same protocol as a general node is added, in interdomain management information from an own domain, the other domain part in management information is received as the management information by the pseudo node (the other domain part is concealed) and when interdomain management information is transmitted to the other domain through the pseudo node by a federation protocol and the pseudo node and the interdomain management information is received from the other domain, the other domain part in the management information is bound as the management information of the pseudo node (the other domain part is concealed) and transmitted to a management server of an own domain. | 11-21-2013 |
20130311624 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING IP ADDRESS - The present invention discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for configuring an IP address to solve a problem that in the process of network renumbering, when a conflict occurs between address configuration policies of a host, adopting a local policy of the host may cause an adverse impact on a network. In the present invention, when an address configuration policy conflict occurs, a terminal reports address configuration policy conflict information to a network side, so that the address configuration policy conflict in the terminal is no longer processed by a local policy of the terminal, but processed by the network side, that is, the network side decides what address configuration policy is adopted for the terminal. Therefore, an optimal solution can be provided for the conflict according to the actual situation of the network, thereby preventing an adverse impact on the network caused by the conflict. | 11-21-2013 |
20130311625 | DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION LOGGING - Methods, systems and apparatuses for logging diagnostic information are disclosed. In accordance with one method, first diagnostic information is logged in a router in accordance with a first mode having a first logging rate. In addition, an operational problem within the router is detected. Further, in response to detecting the operational problem, second diagnostic information is logged in accordance with a second mode having a second logging rate that is greater than the first logging rate of the first mode. | 11-21-2013 |
20130311626 | COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK MANAGEMENT - The present invention provides a communications network comprising a plurality of routers and a plurality of communications links which interconnect the routers and a global network management module. The global network management module is in communication with a number of diverse information sources, such as television listings, social networking sites, user preferences, historical data relating to the accessing of content, etc. such that the global network management module can make a prediction as to the likelihood that a particular network traffic event will occur and the demands that such a traffic event will place on the network. If the global network management module decides that the traffic event will occur then it will pre-configure the communications network such that the traffic generated by the event can be carried across the network within pre-defined quality thresholds and without unnecessarily effecting other traffic being carried on the network. | 11-21-2013 |
20130318216 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND SETTING INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD - A setting information management method comprises: receiving a command related to setting information stored in a storage from a network, changing the setting information based on the command, changing the setting information based on an input from a user using a setting screen displayed by a display unit when the change of the setting information based on the command is invalid, and displaying, by using the display unit, the setting screen in a mode that the user is unable to change the setting information displayed on the setting screen when a change of the setting information based on the command is valid. | 11-28-2013 |
20130318217 | MOBILE ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A system includes a network device installed at a site, the network device including an operating condition configured to be altered by an input initiated external to the site. The system also includes at least one multi-user configurable geographical boundary capable of being established about the site to alter the operating condition in response to a location based information of a user relative to the site and the geographical boundary. A method of managing a site includes detecting a network device installed at a site, the network device having an operating condition configured to be altered by an input initiated external to the site. The method also includes enabling configuration of at least one multi-user configurable geographical boundary capable of being established about the site to alter the operating condition in response to a location based information of a user relative to the site and the geographical boundary. | 11-28-2013 |
20130326031 | RESOURCE CONFIGURATION FOR A NETWORK DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for managing a service is disclosed. A program system running on a computer system in a network data processing system identifies the service on the computer system and a set of resources used by the service. The program system collects information about the service and the set of resources used by the service. The program system uses the information collected to identify a change to a configuration for the service which will increase performance of the service. The program system then makes the identified change to the configuration for the service. | 12-05-2013 |
20130326032 | RESOURCE CONFIGURATION FOR A NETWORK DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM - A method for managing a service is disclosed. A program system running on a computer system in a network data processing system identifies the service on the computer system and a set of resources used by the service. The program system collects information about the service and the set of resources used by the service. The program system uses the information collected to identify a change to a configuration for the service which will increase performance of the service. The program system then makes the identified change to the configuration for the service. | 12-05-2013 |
20130339497 | CONFIGURING DEVICES IN A NETWORK - A system, method, and computer readable medium are provided for configuring devices in a network, such as an Industrial Ethernet network. An application program includes application-specific configuration data intended to configure one or more devices in the network. The configuration data may be exported from the application and saved in one or more files. When each device boots up, it performs a network query to obtain its configuration data from a corresponding one of the files. Each device may perform a standardized network query, such as a DHCP query, to obtain preliminary network configuration data. Thereafter, the device may use another standard networking protocol, such as FTP or TFTP, to query its application-specific configuration data from a configuration file. Thereafter, the device and the application program may communicate according to the configuration parameters. | 12-19-2013 |
20130339498 | System and Method for Application Context Location Based Configuration Suggestions - Provided is a distributed system and method for enabling new and useful location dependent features and functionality to mobile data processing systems. Mobile data processing Systems (MSs) interact with each other as peers in communications and interoperability. Data is shared between mobile data processing systems to carry out novel Location Based eXchanges (LBX) of data for new mobile applications. Information transmitted inbound to, transmitted outbound from, is in process at, or is application modified at a mobile data processing system triggers processing of actions in accordance with user configured permissions, charters, and other configurations. In a preferred embodiment, a user configurable platform is provided for quickly building well behaving LBX applications at MSs and across a plurality of interoperating MSs. Tools, triggered interfaces and integrated applications are disclosed for a breadth of MS LBX configurations and functionality. | 12-19-2013 |
20130346570 | Client Processor Device - A client processor including a communications receiver for receiving file fragments for the device, a micro-controller system including a microcontroller and a programmable non-volatile memory system, for building and storing application and data files from the fragments, and executing an application of the device by processing at least one application file and associated data identified by configuration instructions included in at least one of the fragments. | 12-26-2013 |
20140006572 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATIC MODIFICATION OF DEVICE CONFIGURATION VALUES | 01-02-2014 |
20140006573 | STORAGE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND METHOD OF MANAGING STORAGE SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
20140006574 | Network Device and Method for Operating a Network Device for an Automation Network | 01-02-2014 |
20140012965 | HYBRID MODEL IN SELF-PROVISIONING PROCESS - A networked computing device may be configured to determine, by a service application executing on the networked computing device, to change a configuration of a network service plan associated with the networked computing device and used by the service application, the network service plan identifying whether at least one service of the communications network is available for use by the networked computing device, request self-provisioning content from a self-provisioning gateway responsive to the determination, provide, by the service application, a user interface for configuration of the network service plan based on the received self-provisioning content, send a change data feature request to the self-provisioning gateway responsive to a request for the change in the configuration of the network service plan through the provided user interface, and allow for utilization of the service application after receiving a response to the change data feature request without having to restart the service application. | 01-09-2014 |
20140012966 | Distributed Virtual Switch Configuration and State Management - Techniques are disclosed for pushing configuration changes of a distributed virtual switch from a management server to a plurality of host servers underlying the distributed virtual switch. The approach includes sending, in parallel, by the management server, a message to each of the plurality of host servers. The message specifies a final configuration state for one or more virtual ports emulated via virtualization layers of the host servers. The approach further includes determining, by each of the plurality of host servers, port state configuration changes to make to the virtual ports to achieve the final configuration state, and reconfiguring, by each of the plurality of host servers, their respective virtual ports, to match the final configuration state. | 01-09-2014 |
20140019599 | CONNECTION SETTING INFORMATION MANAGING SYSTEM - In a connection setting information managing system which is configured to set connection setting information using a setting tool, wherein the connection setting information allows a network device connected to an IP network to perform a communication over the IP network, the system includes: a connection setting information storage unit configured to store the connection setting information therein, wherein the connection setting information comprises a tag name that is assigned to and is unique to the network device. The setting tool sets the connection setting information to the network device, based on the tag name that is unique to the network device. | 01-16-2014 |
20140019600 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SHARING A GENERIC CONFIGURATION ACROSS A GROUP OF NETWORK DEVICES - Various embodiments provide an apparatus and method for sharing a generic configuration across a group of network devices. An example embodiment includes sending a scope challenge to a plurality of network devices; receiving a response to the scope challenge from a plurality of in-scope network devices; sending a configuration change message including a configuration change to the plurality of in-scope network devices; and receiving a commit message from the plurality of in-cope network devices indicating that the configuration change has been committed. | 01-16-2014 |
20140025792 | INFORMATION PROVIDING DEVICE, INFORMATION PROVIDING METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROVIDING SYSTEM - An information providing device which communicates with a communication terminal and an information processing device accepting a request of information processing from the communication terminal includes an obtaining unit obtaining positional information about the communication terminal; a determining unit determining that the information processing device is using the positional information; and a transmitting unit transmitting to the communication terminal configuration information required for the communication terminal to allow the information processing device to perform the information processing. | 01-23-2014 |
20140025793 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INCREMENTAL IMPLEMENTATION OF NEW SERVICE CAPABILITIES - A system for gradually implementing network services to end users includes substantially redundant first and second control networks, connectable to the end users through a routable communications network. The first control network provides a first service capability to all the end users. The second control network provides a second service capability to a first portion of the end users, the second service capability replacing the first service capability of the first portion of the end users. The second control network subsequently provides the second service capability to a second portion of the end users, while continuing to provide the second service capability to the first portion, the second service capability replacing the first service capability of the second portion of the end users. The second service capability provided to the second portion of the end users may include revisions based on feedback from the first portion of end users. | 01-23-2014 |
20140025794 | DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR ENABLING RECONFIGURATION OF SERVICES SUPPORTED BY A NETWORK OF DEVICES - Systems, devices, and methods are disclosed for enabling the reconfiguration of services supported by a network of devices. Such reconfiguration can be realized dynamically and in real time without compromising the security of the overall system from external threats or internal malfunctions. These systems, devices and methods may provide a first functional stack supporting a previous version of a specific service and the provisioning of a second functional stack dynamically and in real-time that supports an updated version of the specific service. In addition, an administration function may be included in the embodiment such that the administration function manages and controls the functional stacks and network operations. Using these mechanisms, an existing service can be changed dynamically or a new service can be added dynamically in a secure manner without interruption of other existing services. | 01-23-2014 |
20140032725 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DEPLOYING A MODEL-BASED APPLICATION TO AN APPLICATION SERVER - Computer-based methods and systems for deploying model-driven applications to an application server are described. Consistent with an embodiment of the invention, an application server includes a model deployment module that provides a model deployment service. The model deployment module receives as input a data model that serves as a single source of truth for an application. Based on the input model, the model deployment module configures the application server, for example, by automatically generating object-relational mapping logic that facilitates data persistence by mapping data elements in an object domain to data elements in a relational database domain. Additionally, the model deployment module generates a utility module that supports advanced modeling capabilities, including derived properties and constraints. | 01-30-2014 |
20140040442 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING IMPROVED PERFORMANCE OF AGGREGATED/BONDED NETWORK CONNECTIONS BETWEEN REMOTE SITES - A networking system, method, and device is provided for improving network communication performance between client sites at a distance from one another such that would usually require long haul network communication. The networking system includes at least one network bonding/aggregation computer system for bonding or aggregating one or more diverse network connections so as to configure a bonded/aggregated connection that has increased throughput; and at least one network server component implemented at an access point to a high performing network. Data traffic is carried over the bonded/aggregated connection. The network server component automatically terminates the bonded/aggregated connection and passes the data traffic to the network backbone, while providing a managed network path that incorporates both the bonded/aggregated connection and a network path carried over the high performing network, and thereby providing improved performance in long haul network connections. | 02-06-2014 |
20140047084 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MODIFYING A HARDWARE CONFIGURATION OF A CLOUD COMPUTING SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a method and system for configuring a computing system, such as a cloud computing system. A method includes determining, based on a shared execution of a workload by a cluster of nodes of the computing system, that at least one node of the cluster of nodes operated at less than a threshold operating capacity during the shared execution of the workload. The method further includes selecting a modified hardware configuration of the cluster of nodes based on the determining such that the cluster of nodes with the modified hardware configuration has at least one of a reduced computing capacity and a reduced storage capacity. | 02-13-2014 |
20140047085 | Configuration Management Repository for a Distributed Platform - Some embodiments provide a repository that manages configurations for a distributed platform and that automatedly configures servers of the distributed platform with different hierarchical sets of configurations while ensuring integrity and consistency across the servers and in the repository. In some embodiment, the repository includes a data store that stores configurations for a first set of servers that are operated by a first service provider and a second set of servers that are operated by a second service provider. The data store also identifies different sets of configurations to deploy to different sets of servers from the first and second sets of servers. The repository also includes a function processor to automatedly deploy the different sets of configurations to the different sets of servers and to perform functions for updating the configurations in a manner that ensures integrity and consistency. | 02-13-2014 |
20140052832 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK SENSOR INFORMATION FOR CONTROL OF INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT IN HARSH ENVIRONMENTS - In certain embodiments, a system includes a master node device. The master node device includes communication circuitry configured to facilitate communication with a welding power supply unit via a long-range communication link, and to facilitate wireless communication with one or more welding-related devices via a short-range wireless communication network. The master node device also includes control circuitry configured to receive sensor data from one or more sensors within a physical vicinity of the short-range wireless communication network, and to route the sensor data to final destinations for the one or more sensors. | 02-20-2014 |
20140052833 | NETWORK ELEMENT CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus ( | 02-20-2014 |
20140052834 | PORTABLE UNIVERSAL PERSONAL STORAGE, ENTERTAINMENT, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for synchronizing configuration states of a portable device across a plurality of computing platforms comprises associating a plurality of computing device platforms in a plurality of computing device types with a plurality of synchronization protocols; identifying a type of first computing device via a network; identifying a synchronization protocol associated with the computing device platform in the identified computing device; sending a configuration state from the portable device to the first computing device according to the identified synchronization protocol, and updating the configuration state according to user input on the first computing device; receiving an updated configuration state from the first computing device; translating the updated configuration state to a data format used by a second computing device platform in a second computing device; and storing the updated configuration state and the translated updated configuration state on the portable device. | 02-20-2014 |
20140059190 | DYNAMIC MIDDLEBOX REDIRECTION BASED ON CLIENT CHARACTERISTICS - Traffic redirection methods include determining a quality-affective factor in a connection between a client and a server in a network; comparing the quality-affective factor to a threshold to determine whether the connection would benefit from a network processing function; reconfiguring the network to redirect the connection to or away from a middlebox that performs the network processing function in accordance with the determination of whether the connection would benefit from the network processing function. | 02-27-2014 |
20140059191 | DYNAMIC MIDDLEBOX REDIRECTION BASED ON CLIENT CHARACTERISTICS - Dynamic middleboxes include a network monitor module configured to determine a quality-affective factor in a connection between a client and a server in a network; a processor configured to compare the quality-affective factor to a threshold to determine whether the connection would benefit from a network processing function; and a network control module configured to reconfigure the network to redirect the connection to a middlebox that performs the network processing function if the connection would benefit and further configured to reconfigure the network to exclude the middlebox from the connection if the connection would not benefit. | 02-27-2014 |
20140059192 | Ethernet Based Local IP Access - An H(e)NB-LGW node of a wireless telecommunications network having UEs and an old H(e)NB-LGW node. The H(e)NB-LGW node includes a network interface unit which receives a context for a UE that has moved to the H(e)NB-LGW node. The H(e)NB-LGW node includes a processing unit which causes a MAC broadcast to be sent by the network interface unit to a local network that updates a mapping of an IP address of the UEs to a MAC address of the H(e)NB-LGW after mobility. The broadcast causes an old H(e)NB-LGW node to stop owning the IP address for the UE. An MME node of a wireless telecommunications network having UEs, a new H(e)NB-LGW node, a local network and an SGW. A method of an H(e)NB-LGW node of a wireless telecommunications network having UEs. Methods of an MME node of a wireless telecommunications network having UEs, a new H(e)NB-LGW node, a local network and an SGW. | 02-27-2014 |
20140068032 | APPLICATION DEPENDENT DATA CENTER INTEGRATION - A method and apparatus for integrating a converged infrastructure platform in a data center is provided. The described apparatus configures the physical and virtual resources that run on the converged infrastructure to communicate with the rest of the data center. The network integration process understands the data center network already in place and extends the set up into the converged infrastructure to enable communication between the converged infrastructure and the rest of the network in the data center. The apparatus uses an infrastructure template that describes the data center and that may be pre-defined for a specific application deployed within the converged infrastructure platform. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068033 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE TO MANAGE ALARM CONFIGURATIONS OF SERVERS - Systems, methods, and articles of manufacture to manage alarm configurations of servers are disclosed. An example system includes a processor, an alarm linkage database to store information representative of alarm configurations for a plurality of servers, and a memory comprising machine readable instructions. When executed, the instructions cause the processor to perform operations comprising accessing alarm configurations in the alarm linkage database for a subset of the plurality of servers in response to a first request, initiating a change in respective alarm configurations of the subset of the plurality of the servers, and initiating propagation of the alarm configuration to the subset of the servers, the subset including more than one server. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068034 | Open Architecture for Self-Organizing Networks - A self-organizing network (SON) with an application programming interface (API) common to multiple SON tools is described herein. Through the API, a SON tool may receive one more performance indicators associated with network information. The SON tool may then generate an updated network configuration based at least in part on the one or more performance indicators and provide, though the API, the updated network configuration to configure one or more network components. The SON tool, and other SON tools, may be executed by an SON automation engine, the SON automation engine and the API enabling additional SON tools to be added to the SON. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068035 | MANAGING NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS - Provided are systems, methods and computer program products that proactively manage configurations that enable a service. Configurations that are critical to enabling a particular service are automatically captured, for example as part of a provisioning activity, and/or tracked in association with that service. This automated, service-oriented configuration management enables improved service assurance and faster identification of problems, and mitigates the problem of errors and compromised service delivery that can arise from misconfigurations. | 03-06-2014 |
20140074996 | CONTINUOUS OPERATION DURING RECONFIGURATION PERIODS - A method for continuously updating a set of replicas. The method comprises storing a plurality of replicas of data in a current configuration of members from a plurality of nodes, receiving a reconfiguration command by a member of said current configuration, selecting at least one estimated configuration from said plurality of nodes, receiving at least one write command by a member of said current configuration, disseminating said at least one write command to each member of said at least one estimated configuration and validating said at least one estimated configuration. At least one estimated configuration processes at least one of the write commands before the validating is completed. | 03-13-2014 |
20140082164 | DYNAMICALLY ALLOCATING NETWORK ADDRESSES - Disclosed are various embodiments for dynamically allocating network addresses to devices based on demand. A first network address allocation is initially assigned to a subdivision of a network including multiple computing devices. A router for the subdivision is configured to implement the first network address allocation. Data indicating a reconfiguration of the computing devices is obtained. A second network address allocation is subsequently assigned to the subdivision of the network based at least in part on the reconfiguration of the computing devices. The router for the subdivision is reconfigured to implement the second network address allocation. | 03-20-2014 |
20140089473 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - A disclosed management method includes calculating, for each of partitions, a total calculation amount of calculation nodes included in the partition by using calculation amounts managed by a plurality of management nodes, wherein the plurality of calculation nodes, the plurality of management nodes each of which has a storage unit storing calculation amounts of calculation nodes which are management targets, and the management apparatus which manages connection among the plurality of management nodes are included in a system; assigning, for each of the partitions, management nodes among the plurality of management nodes to a predetermined layer in which the management nodes manage calculation nodes included in the partition, based on the total calculation amount of calculation nodes included in the partition; and connecting the plurality of management nodes in a way that management nodes in a layer above the predetermined layer manage the management nodes in the predetermined layer. | 03-27-2014 |
20140089474 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE SERVER NODE CLUSTERS USING A HIERARCHICAL CONFIGURATION DATA STRUCTURE - A system and method are described for managing a plurality of sever nodes. In one embodiment, the sever nodes are organized into groups referred to as “instances.” Each instance includes a group of redundant sever nodes and a dispatcher for distributing service requests to each of the sever nodes. In addition, a central message passing architecture is defined which allows the various instances to communicate with one another. In one embodiment, a hierarchical configuration data object is stored within a database and is centrally accessible by all of the servers from all of the instances. The hierarchical configuration data object organizes configuration data and binary data in a logical hierarchy which simplifies sever node management in an enterprise network. | 03-27-2014 |
20140089475 | ENFORCING DEVICE SETTINGS FOR MOBILE DEVICES - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for enforcing device settings for mobile devices. Generally, a computer system enforces appropriate mobile device settings (e.g., policy and/or configuration settings) prior to permitting a mobile device to access maintained data. The computer system receives a request from a mobile device. The computer system determines that current mobile device settings are not appropriate for accessing the maintained data. The computer system sends device settings, representing a new mobile device configuration that is appropriate accessing the maintained data, to the mobile device. The computer system receives an indication that the mobile device is configured in accordance with the device settings. The computer system permits the mobile device to access the maintained data in response to receiving the indication that the mobile device is configured in accordance with the device settings. | 03-27-2014 |
20140089476 | NETWORK SETTING CHANGE METHOD AND SYSTEM THEREOF, AND TERMINALS WHICH ARE USED WITH SAID SYSTEM - The present invention is provided to implement an automated setting change of network setting items on an ad hoc network which does not have a specific base station. A method of changing network setting for changing setting of a network where a plurality of terminals are connected, the method including the steps of: a request source terminal transmitting a request for setting change to a selected representative terminal; the selected representative terminal, upon receiving the request for setting change, transmitting a request for permission to at least a majority of representative terminals; the selected representative terminal transmitting a success notification to the request source terminal upon receiving a notification of permission from the majority of representative terminals in response to the request for permission; the request source terminal transmitting, to the plurality of terminals, an execution instruction including at least a content of setting change, upon receiving the success notification; and the terminal which has received the execution instruction changing the setting according to the content of setting change. | 03-27-2014 |
20140095679 | BEST PRACTICES ANALYSIS OF ZONES AND COMPONENTS IN A NETWORK - Provided is a method for best practices analysis of zones and components in a network. A database has information on components in the network and configuration settings for the components. Best practices rules indicate best practices configuration settings for components in the network. The database and the accessed best practices rules are processed to determine whether the configuration settings for the components in the network satisfy the best practices configuration settings for the components indicated in the best practices rules. A report is generated indicating whether the configuration settings of the components in the network satisfy the best practices configuration settings for the components indicated in the best practices rules. | 04-03-2014 |
20140101296 | Methods, Systems, and Products for Prediction of Mood - Methods, systems, and products predict emotional moods. Predicted moods may then be used to configure devices and machinery. A communications device may be configured to a mood of a user. A car may adjust to the mood of an operator. Even assembly lines may be configured, based on the mood of operators. Machinery and equipment may thus adopt performance and safety precautions that account for varying moods. | 04-10-2014 |
20140108626 | Virtual Consolidated Appliance - Techniques for managing network traffic in a virtual consolidated appliance so as to avoid interruptions in existing network connections during reconfiguration of the virtual consolidated appliance are provided. In one aspect, a method for operating a virtual consolidated appliance having a plurality of servers is provided. The method includes the following steps. An assignment for load balancing is computed based on a status of the virtual consolidated appliance. A reconfiguration of the virtual consolidated appliance is discovered. A new assignment is computed for load balancing based on a new status of the virtual consolidated appliance based on the reconfiguration of the virtual consolidated appliance. Existing network connections are redirected according to the assignment during the reconfiguration of the virtual consolidated appliance. New network connections are served according to the new assignment. | 04-17-2014 |
20140115128 | DYNAMIC FUNCTIONALITY PARTITIONING - A sensor and processing system dynamically partitions functionality between various remote sensor nodes and a processing subsystem based on available communication capabilities. Redundant functionality is located at the processing subsystem and each of the various remote sensor nodes, and each sensor node coordinates with the processing subsystem to determine the location (e.g., at the processing subsystem or at the sensor node) at which a particular functionality is executed. | 04-24-2014 |
20140115129 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BOOTING, PROVISIONING AND ACTIVATING HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE CLIENTS - Automated booting of a client for a subscriber is provided for clients that are for use in interactive user sessions that involve multimedia. A subscribe message is sent from the client to a proxy server. The proxy server authenticates the subscribe message, and sends the subscribe message to the configuration server. A notify message is sent to the client from the configuration server. The notify message is sent through the proxy server, and contains a location of a profile for the client. The profile is downloaded to the clients. This arrangement allows the persistence of profiles in a centralized place. | 04-24-2014 |
20140115130 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACCESSING CONTENT OVER A NETWORK - A client may be configured to access a network by identifying a network bandwidth configuration setting to be used by the client in accessing a networked content source, enabling the client to access the content source using the network bandwidth configuration setting, monitoring client access to the content source, comparing client access metrics to metrics associated with the network bandwidth configuration setting, determining, based on the comparison, whether to adjust the network bandwidth configuration settings for the client, and adjusting the network bandwidth configuration setting if appropriate. | 04-24-2014 |
20140115131 | Method and System for Managing Devices in Batches - A method, a gateway, an auto-configuration server, and a system for managing devices in batches are provided. The method includes: creating a batch management group according to a batch management group creation rule and device information in a network; receiving a batch management command sent by an auto-configuration server for devices in the batch management group; determining a device that needs to be managed in the batch management group according to the batch management command; converting the batch management command into a command supported by the device that needs to be managed; and sending the command supported by the device that needs to be managed to the device that needs to be managed. The method implements batch management of devices in a network covered by a gateway. | 04-24-2014 |
20140122672 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING NETWORK POLICY OF VIRTUAL NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for configuring a network policy of a virtual network. The method includes: receiving, by a server, a network policy message sent by a virtual machine management center and used for creating a virtual network, where the network policy message for creating a virtual network includes a virtual network identification (VNID) of a virtual network to be created and network policy configuration information corresponding to the virtual network to be created; and sending, by the server, a network policy synchronization message to a network device, where the network policy synchronization message includes the VNID of the virtual network to be created and the network policy configuration information corresponding to the virtual network to be created. Consequently, processing overheads can be reduced. | 05-01-2014 |
20140122673 | Dynamic Address Assignment for Address Aggregation in Low Power and Lossy Networks - A node in a Low power and Lossy Network (LLN) is managed by monitoring a routing configuration on a node in a LLN. A triggering parameter that is used to invoke an address change on a child node is tracked and a threshold against which to compare the triggering parameter is accessed. The triggering parameter is compared to the threshold. Based on results of comparing the triggering parameter to the threshold, it is determined that an address change at the child node is appropriate. An address change of a child node appearing in the routing configuration is invoked based on the determination that an address change is appropriate. | 05-01-2014 |
20140129687 | ADDING DEVICE-WIDE CAPABILITIES AND PARAMETERS TO SPLIT-ARCHITECTURE DEVICES - A network element and process determines and configures capabilities of network element components. The network element components include a set of control elements where the set of control elements determine capabilities of each of a set of forwarding elements. The method includes initiating communication with a forwarding element in the set of forwarding elements by a control element. The control element requests that the forwarding element to provide a set of logical function block identifiers of supported logical function blocks for the forwarding element. The set of logical function block identifiers is then received from the forwarding element in response to the request. The set of logical function block identifiers are matched with known forwarding element capabilities to determine capabilities of the forwarding element. A forwarding element capability model is then updated with the capabilities of the forwarding element. | 05-08-2014 |
20140129688 | CLOUD BASED DRIVE MONITORING SOLUTION - A cloud-based remote monitoring system and method monitor an industrial facility. The industrial facility includes one or more industrial devices. A cloud agent located at the industrial facility is configured to, by at least one processor, collect data indicative of a past and/or a present state of the industrial devices according a manifest specific to the industrial facility. The cloud agent is further configured to send the collected data to a remote cloud platform according to the manifest dynamically reconfigure the cloud agent without interrupting the collecting and the sending. The cloud platform processes the sent data to facilitate remote monitoring of the industrial devices. | 05-08-2014 |
20140129689 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - According to an embodiment, a communication device includes a version storage unit, a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a command processing unit. The version storage unit is configured to store therein the first version information. The receiving unit is configured to receive a command including the second version information. The determining unit is configured to determine whether a version represented by the second version information is a next version after a version represented by the first version information. The command processing unit is configured to, based on a determination result of the determining unit and decision information that defines processes corresponding to a command and the determination result, execute processes corresponding to a received command. | 05-08-2014 |
20140136667 | VIRTUAL MOBILE MANAGEMENT FOR DEVICE SIMULATION - Described herein is a method and system that provides access to numerous connected devices in a device bank and allows remote interaction and control of aspects of the connected devices using a remote management system. In an embodiment, the method comprises the configuring of one or more connected devices in the device bank to mimic an end user's connected device configuration and environment in order to resolve an issue with the end user's connected device. In other embodiments, the connected devices in the device bank can be used by end users such as developers to test and diagnose new applications and by remote support technicians to train themselves on connected devices. | 05-15-2014 |
20140143390 | MACHINE-TO-MACHINE ("M2M") PLATFORM SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Exemplary machine-to-machine (“M2M”) systems and methods are disclosed herein. An exemplary method includes an M2M platform system operating an M2M platform in accordance with a functionality set of the M2M platform, receiving data representative of an update to the functionality set of the M2M platform, and seamlessly transitioning, based on the data representative of the update and during runtime operation of the M2M platform, from the operating of the M2M platform in accordance with the functionality set of the M2M platform to operating the M2M platform in accordance with an updated functionality set of the M2M platform. Corresponding systems and methods are also disclosed. | 05-22-2014 |
20140143391 | COMPUTER SYSTEM AND VIRTUAL SERVER MIGRATION CONTROL METHOD FOR COMPUTER SYSTEM - A computer system suited for migration of a virtual server between a plurality of physical servers that do not share a storage apparatus via a network is provided. The present invention is a computer system configured to: couple a plurality of computers together, in each of which a plurality of physical servers and a storage apparatus are directly connected within the same chassis, by directly connecting the storage apparatuses of the plurality of computers: and further have a management computer manage the plurality of computers. When the management computer selects another physical server other than a first physical server in a first computer among the plurality of computers as a migration destination of a virtual server, which operates in the first physical server in the first computer, it judges whether the other physical server exists in the first computer or exists in another computer different from the first computer among the plurality of computers. | 05-22-2014 |
20140143392 | DEPLOYMENT OF SOFTWARE IMAGES WITH RUN-TIME RECONNECTION - A processor-implemented method, system, and/or computer program product deploys software images onto a computing system. A first computing machine is instantiated from a software image onto a computing system. The first computing machine has a first old access identifier, and is initially connected to a second computing machine in the computing system via a second old access identifier for the second computing machine. The second computing machine is reconfigured to have a new access identifier by: retrieving the new access identifier for said second computing machine, and associating the new access identifier with the second old access identifier; and redirecting each outbound communication, from the first old access identifier to the second old access identifier, to the new access identifier of the second computing machine. | 05-22-2014 |
20140143393 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICES FOR MANAGING USER REGISTRATION OF A SERVICE IN AN IMS NETWORK - Present invention refers to a method system and devices for managing user registration of a service in a IMS network. The proposed solution allows optimizing the dimensioning of networks focusing on active users. | 05-22-2014 |
20140149560 | DYNAMIC TIME ZONE MANAGEMENT OF COMPUTING DEVICES - Various techniques of time zone conversion are disclosed in this application. For example, in one embodiment, a computing device can include a synchronizer configured to receive a set of time zone rules from a server. The set of time zone rules individually including a time zone identifier, a start date, and a time offset from a standard time beginning from the start date. The computing device can also include a converter operatively coupled to the synchronizer. The converter is configured to selectively convert time zone sensitive data received at or stored on the computing device to a target time zone based on the set of time zone rules. | 05-29-2014 |
20140149561 | INTEGRATION FRAMEWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING INTEGRATION FRAMEWORK - An integration framework system includes an interpreter configured to provide a general-purpose description and interpretation of a resource, a method, and a parameter regarding a hardware device on a network of things. An integration framework system includes an implementation binder configured to provide dynamic binding or dynamic unbinding depending on the change in the resource of the hardware devices. | 05-29-2014 |
20140156815 | STORAGE SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONFIGURATION INFORMATION THEREOF - The object of the invention is to enable automatic recognition of a content of change of configuration at a host side when physical configuration change such as the expansion or reduction of a storage subsystem occurs. Coupling information with respect to the storage subsystems is provided to the host side, and when physical configuration change occurs, a notice that change of configuration has been executed and the content of change of configuration is notified from the storage subsystem side to the host side, based on which the coupling information is updated automatically. According to this method, the host can constantly recognize the current adequate logical configuration of one or more storage subsystems that the host accesses. | 06-05-2014 |
20140156816 | METHOD FOR COMPOSING CONFIGURATION CHANGES IN A NETWORK ELEMENT - A method for composing configuration changes to be applied to a network element ( | 06-05-2014 |
20140156817 | MODULAR SERVICE LEVEL OBJECTIVE (SLO) SUBSYSTEM FOR A NETWORK STORAGE SYSTEM - A service level objective (SLO) subsystem that includes an SLO engine in a network storage system that allows new degrees of freedom to be added to the SLO subsystem, without requiring any modification of an associated SLO engine or the system's existing SLOs, and without requiring the SLO engine to have any a priori knowledge of the new degrees of freedom. In certain embodiments, the system has a modular design which includes the SLO engine and one or more SLO modules that interface with the SLO engine. Each SLO module corresponds to a different degree of freedom. Each SLO module evaluates SLO compliance and determines what specific action(s) within its corresponding degree of freedom should be taken to comply with an SLO. | 06-05-2014 |
20140164581 | Dispersed Storage System with Firewall - A remotely managed storage system may configure logical units using a low level storage controller on each managed computer system plus a target driver for each shared storage device. The storage controller may present logical units to operating systems running on a computer system and may operate on a lower level than a host operating system or hypervisor. A target driver may allow remote devices to use the local storage devices for other logical units. A storage master may configure the various components across a group of computers to create logical units of storage that are backed by multiple storage devices. | 06-12-2014 |
20140164582 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING CONFIGURABLE COMMUNICATION NETWORK ROUTING - An apparatus for managing a plurality of available network connections is disclosed. The apparatus has a plurality of communication modules. Each communication module provides a different mode of communication. The apparatus includes a configurable network database that stores configurable rules. The configurable rules are received by the configurable network database from a server. The apparatus also includes a connection manager that: manages the plurality of communication modules, and selects an appropriate connection from the plurality of communication modules based on the stored configurable rules located in the configurable network database. | 06-12-2014 |
20140173064 | CONTENT DELIVERY FRAMEWORK - A framework supporting content delivery includes multiple devices, each configured to run at least one content delivery service. The content delivery services include collector services, reducer services, and control services. Event information is provided from the services, and the control services provide control information to control operation or configuration of content delivery services. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173065 | AUTOMATED CONFIGURATION PLANNING - An Automated Configuration Management System (CMS) assists human operators with administering infrastructure elements in a data center. Configuration state information is collected and stored as a hierarchical set of features and feature attributes. Automated planning tools devise one or more candidate plans given a desired state as input. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173066 | CONFIGURING A CONTENT DELIVERY NETWORK (CDN) - In a content delivery network (CDN a method includes: receiving a request for a CDN service of a particular type, wherein a CDN service of said particular type defines a fixed number of configurable layers of request processing, sequentially from a first layer to a last layer; and processing said request, starting at said first layer, said processing being based on a modifiable runtime environment, said processing continuing conditionally through each of said layers in turn until either said request is terminated by one of said layers or said last layer processes said request. A layer may cause some of the processing of a request to be handled by another service. The CDN service may be selected from: delivery services, collector services, reducer services, rendezvous services, configuration services, and control services. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173067 | CONFIGURING A CONTENT DELIVERY NETWORK (CDN) - In a content delivery network (CDN a method includes: receiving a request for a CDN service of a particular type, wherein a CDN service of said particular type defines a fixed number of configurable layers of request processing, sequentially from a first layer to a last layer; and processing said request, starting at said first layer, said processing being based on a modifiable runtime environment, said processing continuing conditionally through each of said layers in turn until either said request is terminated by one of said layers or said last layer processes said request. A layer may cause some of the processing of a request to be handled by another service. The CDN service may be selected from: delivery services, collector services, reducer services, rendezvous services, configuration services, and control services. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173068 | Management Apparatus and Address Management Method - A management apparatus according to an embodiment includes a storing unit, a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, and an updating unit. The storing unit stores, in association with an IP address of a node, identification information for identifying the node. The receiving unit receives a change notification for the IP address transmitted by multicast by the node. The transmitting unit transmits, when the receiving unit receives the change notification, a response request packet by multicast. The update unit updates the storing unit on the basis of a response packet transmitted from a node that responds to the response request packet transmitted by the transmitting unit. | 06-19-2014 |
20140173069 | DEVICE CONTROL METHOD FOR REGISTERING DEVICE INFORMATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICE, AND DEVICE AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method, a device, and a system enabling an external device to control a peripheral device by using device information stored in a network device. The device control method includes obtaining device information regarding the first peripheral device, wherein the obtaining is performed by the user device; transmitting the device information regarding the first peripheral device to the network device, wherein the transmitting is performed by the user device; storing the device information, wherein the storing is performed by the network device; and controlling the first peripheral device by using the device information, wherein the controlling is performed by a second peripheral device connected to the network device. | 06-19-2014 |
20140181277 | MANAGING TECHNOLOGY RESOURCES ACROSS MULTIPLE PLATFORMS - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for managing technology resources across multiple platforms. Embodiments of the invention can be used to manage the configuration of a plurality of different devices. A management server/service can utilize native management capabilities of different devices to provide configuration management without requiring agents to be installed on the devices. In general, the management server/service adapts to the unique characteristics and behaviors of different devices, platforms, and external systems to provide configuration management for the different devices, platforms, and external systems. As such, configuration management can be provided in a unified fashion across different platforms, both on-premise and off-premise, and indirectly. When client agents are present, the management server/service can adjust to compatibly operate with the client agents. | 06-26-2014 |
20140181278 | VIRTUAL RESOURCE PROVIDER WITH VIRTUAL CONTROL PLANES - Control planes of virtual resource providers may be customized in a secure, stable and efficient manner with virtual control planes. Control planes may be modularized. Control plane modules may be supplied with data from standardized sensors, and required to generate standardized resource configuration requests responsive to solicitations with specified response latencies. Custom control plane modules may be selected to replace or complement default control plane modules. Financial and computational costs associated with control plane modules may be tracked. Competing resource configurations may be mediated by a control plane supervisor. Such mediation may be based on control plane module reputation scores. Reputation scores may be based on customer feedback ratings and/or measured performance with respect to module goals. Mediated configuration parameter values may be based on a combination of competing configuration parameter values weighted according to reputation. Contribution of individual modules to goal achievement may be tracked and rewarded accordingly. | 06-26-2014 |
20140189078 | Locating And Addressing Communication Devices - A system is provided that includes first- and second-network subsystems. The first-network subsystem includes a first-network device with knowledge of its physical location and assigned logical address within the first-network subsystem. The second-network subsystem includes a second-network device initially without knowledge of its physical location and assigned logical address within the second-network subsystem. The second-network device has a known spatial relationship with the first-network device. The first-network device is configured to communicate its physical location to the second-network device, which is configured to derive at least partially its physical location based on the physical location of the first-network device, and the known spatial relationship between the first- and second-network devices. The second-network device is further configured to receive an assignment of its logical address within the second-network subsystem using its derived physical location. | 07-03-2014 |
20140189079 | Self Healing Networking Device Systems And Related Methods - In one embodiment, a networking system can comprise a networking device comprising an operating system module and performance management modules. Other examples and related methods are described herein. | 07-03-2014 |
20140189080 | Device Communication, Monitoring and Control Architecture and Method - A communication interface and a device control, management and monitoring system are provided to enable the networking of and communication between a multiple devices operating under different protocols. The communication interface may act as a translator or protocol converter that reformats transmissions from one protocol to another based on protocol compatibility between the recipient and transmitting devices. The device control and monitoring system may store predefined rules that are triggered when specified conditions associated with the networked devices are detected. The rules may specify an action to take such as transmitting a discount offer to a user or turning off a light. According to one or more arrangements, the communication interface may act as an intermediary between the networked devices and the device control system so that the device control system is not required to understand or be compatible with the various other protocols used by the networked devices. | 07-03-2014 |
20140195656 | METHOD FOR OPTIMALLY UTILIZING A PEER TO PEER NETWORK - In accordance with an embodiment of the invention, there is provided a method for splitting a load of monitoring a peer to peer network. The method has a first node in the peer to peer network receiving information reported by a second node in the peer to peer network, including information concerning which nodes are connected to the second node. The method further has the first node connecting to nodes different from the nodes that are connected to the second node using the received information. The method still further has the first node reporting information, including information concerning which nodes are connected to the first node, such that the second node also has access to the reported information, thereby splitting the load of monitoring the peer to peer network among the first and second nodes. | 07-10-2014 |
20140201342 | USER-FRIENDLY STORAGE NETWORK ZONING - A method for configuring zoning within a switch of a storage network is disclosed. In one embodiment, such a method includes providing a list of devices to a user. The method enables the user to select devices from the list and assign the devices to a zone of a storage network. To determine which ports of a switch the devices are connected to, the method searches a device inventory database containing information about devices in the storage network. The method then determines underlying port-to-port mappings that are needed to enable communication between the devices through the switch. The method then sends a request to the switch to establish, within the switch, the zone with the determined port-to-port mappings. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also disclosed. | 07-17-2014 |
20140201343 | SERVER LOAD MANAGEMENT - System and method for collecting values of one or more parameters of one or more clients that are communicatively connected to a server. A model is constructed based on the collected values of the one or more parameters to thereby model as a function of time the probability that the values of the one or more parameters of the one or more clients will change by an amount that is considered significant, e.g. at the server. An update of the one or more parameters is received from one of the clients. Responsive to receiving the update, the model is used to calculate a timing for the next update of the values from the one of the clients. The calculated timing for the next update is sent to the one of the clients. | 07-17-2014 |
20140207922 | Automatic configuration of host networking device networking interface without user interaction - A host networking device networking interface is automatically configured. The interface is initially configured to operate in a single-link mode in which multiple network communication lanes of the interface cooperatively provide a single communication link. If a signal is not present on any communication lane, then the interface is configured to operate in a multiple-link mode in which each lane provides a separate and different communication link, and is operated in the multiple-link mode. If a signal is present on every communication lane, and if the single communication link has been established with another networking device over all the lanes, then the interface is operated in the single-link mode. If a signal is present on every communication lane, but if the single communication link has not been established over all the lanes, then the interface is configured to operate in the multiple-link mode and is operated in the multiple-link mode. | 07-24-2014 |
20140207923 | METHOD AND A CONTROLLER SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORK - A method for controlling a software-defined network “SDN” includes receiving ( | 07-24-2014 |
20140207924 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING AND SWITCHING BETWEEN COMPONENTS IN A HYBRID COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - An embodiment includes a system having: a display device having a first operating platform; a base device having a second operating platform and being configured to connect with the display device through a hardware connection; the hardware connection including a communication link between the first and second operating platforms; and a server module and a client module; the server module configured to, responsive to selecting an active operating platform, communicate settings of a previously active operating platform via the hardware connection to the client module to maintain continuity of settings after switching active operating platforms. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 07-24-2014 |
20140215032 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF NETWORK RECONFIGURATION - The present disclosure may include a method of reconfiguring a network. The method includes collecting a plurality of network demands, each of the plurality of network demands having a possible resource release by rerouting the network demand from its current path to a new path. The method further includes selecting a subset of the plurality of network demands that, if rerouted, has the highest resource release without resource contention. The method additionally includes rerouting the subset of the plurality of network demands, and, in response to rerouting the subset of the plurality of network demands, releasing resources no longer used by rerouted demands. The present disclosure may further include associated systems and apparatuses. | 07-31-2014 |
20140215033 | MIGRATING A WEB HOSTING SERVICE VIA A VIRTUAL NETWORK FROM ONE ARCHITECTURE TO ANOTHER - An automated tool for migrating a website hosting service from a first website hosting architecture to a second website hosting architecture, wherein a virtual network is used during migration to facilitate keeping the services available during the movement of IP addresses from one architecture to the other architecture. | 07-31-2014 |
20140215034 | Processing Method and Processing Device for Automatically Setting Internet Access Mode - The present invention provides a processing method and processing device for automatically setting an Internet access mode. The method includes separately sending a PPPoE request message and a DHCP request message; if a DHCP response message corresponding to the DHCP request message is received first within a set time, determining that the Internet access mode is a DHCP mode; if a PPPoE response message corresponding to the PPPoE request message is received later within the set time, determining that the Internet access mode switches from the DHCP mode to a PPPoE mode. Embodiments of the present invention can improve accuracy of mode detection. | 07-31-2014 |
20140222979 | Inferring Web Preferences from Mobile - In one embodiment, a server providing an on-line service identifies a change associated with a mobile computing device of a user of the on-line service, the on-line service being accessible to the user through a website hosted by the system; the server also in response to the change and without manual user input from the user, modifies aspects of web pages of the website that are associated with use of the on-line service by the user. | 08-07-2014 |
20140244810 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION SYSTEM BASED ON LOCATION AND CONFIGURATION METHOD THEREOF - A network configuration system based on location of the device transmits a transient network configuration via a server to a node to set the network configuration thereof. Link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) information produced at the node is used to search for a default network management table in order to obtain the actual network configuration. The network configuration of the node is then updated according to the actual network configuration. The corresponding configuration method is also proposed. The mechanism helps improve the convenience in setting the network configuration. | 08-28-2014 |
20140244811 | DOWNLOADABLE CONFIGURING APPLICATION FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - Systems, methods, and programs for activating a feature on a wireless device includes requesting the feature at the wireless device. A feature includes additional functions and services that add capability to or accessed by the wireless device, such as, but not limited to, voice mail, voice recognition, access to GPS, MPEG functions, and access to a data channel or increased data rates. The wireless device downloads a component from a download server that contains the logic to configure the wireless device as well as a carrier server to activate the feature. An expiration parameter or other licensing term may be associated with the requested feature. Upon expiration, the wireless device and/or carrier server is reconfigured to deactivate the feature. | 08-28-2014 |
20140244812 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND PROGRAM FOR BROWSER TO SWITCH IE CORE - The present invention discloses a method, a system and a program for a browser to switch an IE Kernel which may be able to solve the problems of compatibility and adaptability of the browser kernel. The method comprises: generating a first IE kernel file and a second IE kernel file, and import them into a browser client; the browser process determining a currently adapted IE kernel version according to Uniform Resource Locator (URL) information submitted by a user; if the currently adapted IE kernel version is the first IE kernel, the browser process being redirected to a corresponding location to load the first IE kernel file; if the currently adapted IE kernel version is the second IE kernel, the browser process being redirected to a corresponding location to load the second IE kernel file. | 08-28-2014 |
20140258480 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK ACCESS FOR APPLICATIONS ON MOBILE TERMINALS - An apparatus and method for configuring a firewall application for controlling network access of applications included on a mobile terminal are provided. The method includes executing the firewall application displaying a list of at least one application stored on the mobile terminal, selecting at least one of the applications from the displayed list, selecting at least one parameter type corresponding to the at least one selected application, and configuring at least one parameter setting corresponding to the at least one selected parameter type, wherein the firewall application is executed according to the configured at least one parameter setting. | 09-11-2014 |
20140280799 | MANAGING VIRTUAL COMPUTING SERVICES - Computer-implemented systems and methods for managing virtual computing services. A service interface may receive from an administrative user an instruction indicating a configuration change for a first virtual computing service. A plurality of agents comprises a leader agent and at least one other agent. The leader agent may assign to the at least one other agent a plurality of jobs for implementing the configuration change. The at least one other agent may execute at least one of the plurality of jobs, where executing the at least one of the plurality of jobs comprises modifying a configuration of a virtual desktop site associated with the first virtual computing service. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280800 | APPARATUS AND METHOD TO MAINTAIN CONSISTENT OPERATIONAL STATES IN IN CLOUD-BASED INFRASTRUCTURES - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related device including: receiving, at the service correlator device, an incoming notification that an operational state of a first service element of a cloud service has changed; identifying a potential change to a second service element of the cloud service having a current operational state that is inconsistent with the operational state of the first service element, wherein effecting the potential change to the second service element would produce a new operational state of the second service element that is consistent with the operational state of the first service element; determining whether to notify other devices of the potential change to the second service element; and transmitting an outgoing notification to a management device responsible for managing the second service element based on determining to notify other devices, wherein the outgoing notification indicates the potential change to the management device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280801 | DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION OF NETWORK DEVICES FOR OUTAGE PREDICTION - A system and technique for dynamic reconfiguration of network devices for outage prediction is disclosed. The system includes a host and a plurality of network devices aggregated to form a link bundle; and wherein the host comprises a configuration manager operable to: identify a quality of service level of data throughput needed by at least one workload utilizing the link bundle; monitor a parameter of each of the network devices of the link bundle; determine whether the monitored parameter indicates a predicted data throughout quality of service level decrease by a network device being utilized by the workload below the quality of service level for the workload; and responsive to determining that the monitored parameter indicates a predicted quality of service level decrease by the respective network device, dynamically reconfigure the link bundle to maintain the quality of service level for the workload utilizing the link bundle. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280802 | CAPABILITY IDENTIFICATION AND MODIFICATION THROUGH HARDWARE INTROSPECTION AND REFLECTION - System, method, and computer program product to provide capability identification and modification through hardware introspection and reflection in a network, by exposing, to an application: (i) a plurality of attributes of each of a plurality of network elements in a network, (ii) a current state of each of the plurality of network elements, and (iii) a set of networking capabilities of each of the plurality of network elements, and providing, to the application, an interface for real-time configuration of each of the plurality of network elements and a set of data flows passing through each respective network element. | 09-18-2014 |
20140280803 | Optimized Content Distribution Based on Metrics Derived from the End User - Some embodiments provide systems and methods for determining a server of a distributed hosting system to optimally distribute content to an end user. The method includes identifying an IP address of the end user. Based on the IP address, a set of servers send packets to the end user to derive performance metrics. The performance metrics are used to determine a server from the set of servers that optimally distributes content to the end user. The method modifies a configuration for resolving end user requests such that the optimal server is identified to the end user when the end user requests content from the hosting system. Some embodiments determine the optimal server by providing downloadable content that is embedded with a monitoring tool. The monitoring tool causes the end user to derive performance metrics for the hosting system when downloading a particular object from a set of servers. | 09-18-2014 |
20140289380 | PERSONAL AREA NETWORK APPARATUS - A network ( | 09-25-2014 |
20140289381 | OPTIMIZATION OF ENHANCED NETWORK LINKS - A method and apparatus for dynamic network link acceleration provides a managed communication link for accelerated and reliable network communication between a client and other network devices. In one or more embodiments, a client computing device which generates communication packets of a first type is enhanced with a front end mechanism which selectively encodes the data packets into packets of a second type. The data packets which are encoded into a second type are transmitted over a managed communication link which may provide error correction, security, quality of service, and other services including acceleration of communications. | 09-25-2014 |
20140289382 | UTILIZING VERSION VECTORS ACROSS SERVER AND CLIENT CHANGES TO DETERMINE DEVICE USAGE BY TYPE, APP, AND TIME OF DAY - Technology is disclosed for utilizing version vector data of computing devices to optimize performance of the computing devices and/or other computer systems that provide various services to the computing devices (“the technology”). One embodiment includes analyzing version vectors of the computing devices to determining a user's usage pattern, such as the type of computing device used, the computer applications used on the computing device, and the time of day of usage. This information about usage pattern and other information that can be determined using the version vectors can enable system optimizations on both individual user level and a group of users level. For example, on the individual user level, knowing user's usage pattern may enable automatic file synchronization between multiple devices without user intervention. On the group level, a service provider may allocate resources (servers, bandwidth, etc.) to accommodate the group's usage pattern. | 09-25-2014 |
20140297818 | Parallel and Dynamic Interface Selection - Various embodiments enable parallel querying of multiple network interfaces for communication configuration information. Returned communication configuration information can be used by a client device to enable communication with another computing device. In some embodiments, multiple responses to the parallel queries are received. Alternately or additionally, a response from a network interface can be determined through expiration of a user-configured timeout and/or a protocol configured timeout. Selection of a network interface from the multiple responses can be based, at least in part, on prioritizing the responding network interfaces using an adaptive selection algorithm. | 10-02-2014 |
20140297819 | PROVIDING A MANAGED BROWSER - Methods, systems, computer-readable media, and apparatuses for providing a managed browser are presented. In various embodiments, a computing device may load a managed browser. The managed browser may, for instance, be configured to provide a managed mode in which one or more policies are applied to the managed browser, and an unmanaged mode in which such policies might not be applied and/or in which the browser might not be managed by at least one device manager agent running on the computing device. Based on device state information and/or one or more policies, the managed browser may switch between the managed mode and the unmanaged mode, and the managed browser may provide various functionalities, which may include selectively providing access to enterprise resources, based on such state information and/or the one or more policies. | 10-02-2014 |
20140304379 | Computer-Implemented Methods and Systems for Dynamically Compiling and Serving Electronic Content - One exemplary embodiment involves receiving a request at a server device, the request identifying electronic content and a modification for the electronic content. The request may be based at least in part on information provided in a uniform resource locator (URL) or other address used by a requesting client device to initiate the request for the electronic content from the server. A parameter of the URL or other address may be used to specify the modification. The exemplary embodiment further involves identifying, via the server device, a source file associated with the electronic content, changing, via the server device, an element within the source file according to the modification identified in the request, and providing modified electronic content from the server device for use on the requesting client device. | 10-09-2014 |
20140304380 | MODEL FRAMEWORK TO FACILITATE ROBUST PROGRAMMING OF DISTRIBUTED WORKFLOWS - A method is disclosed. A finite state machine model for a single system workflow is replicated across a plurality of distributed nodes associated with a leader election protocol. A leader is determined amongst the plurality of distributed nodes to perform a next action of the finite state machine model based at least in part on the leader election protocol. One or more nodes amongst the plurality of distributed nodes are configured to submit a timeout ticket if the next action of the finite state machine model does not appear to have been performed by the leader within a prescribed time. | 10-09-2014 |
20140310387 | DYNAMIC RECLASSIFICATION OF CLIENT DEVICES IN A NETWORK - One or more devices may store attribute information identifying multiple attributes associated with a client device that is associated with a particular classification; reclassify the client device based on the attribute information; and provide, based on reclassifying the client device, classification information to a network device to cause the network device to associate a particular policy set, of multiple policy sets, with the client device. The classification information may identify an updated classification of the client device. The updated classification may be different from the particular classification. The particular policy set may be based on the updated classification of the client device. The particular policy set may include an instruction used to process a data flow provided to or provided from the client device. | 10-16-2014 |
20140310388 | System and Method for Providing a Software Defined Protocol Stack - Embodiments are provided for a framework for networks with software defined protocols (SDP) network nodes. The embodiments include a SDM controller component for managing and controlling a data plane protocol for SDP network nodes. The SDP controller also interacts with a software defined networking (SDN) controller for determining one or more paths in a network including the SDP network nodes. The SDP controller is configured to determining a break-down of data plane process functionality into a plurality of basic process function blocks for a service, traffic flow, or virtual network in accordance with network component capabilities or quality of service/experience requirement. A workflow and status information are also determined for one or more network components along a path allocated, by the SDN controller. The workflow and status information are indicated to the one or more components, which are configured to implement the workflow using the basic process function blocks. | 10-16-2014 |
20140317248 | NETWORK TECHNOLOGY INTERWORKING VIA USER PROGRAMMABLE EVENT-ACTION PROFILES - The disclosure is directed to configuring an internetworking of a first network and a second network. Data representing one or more network events is received at a network element, data representing one or more actions to be performed by the second network in response to detection of the one or more events on the first network is received at the network element, and a mapping of the one or more network events to the one or more actions is stored by the network element. | 10-23-2014 |
20140317249 | Accelerating Network Convergence for Layer 3 Roams in a Next Generation Network Closet Campus - Accelerating network convergence may be provided. Consistent with embodiments of the disclosure, a mapping server may be configured to map an interconnection of various network elements comprising at least the following: a wireless host, at least two access switches, a plurality of distribution switches, a core switch, a mobility controller, and a mapping database. The mapping server may then receive an indication from the mobility controller that the wireless host has roamed from a first access switch to a second access switch. In response to the indication, the mapping server may remap the interconnection of network elements in the mapping database to update network routing information associated with the wireless host. | 10-23-2014 |
20140317250 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SYNCHRONIZING WITH NEIGHBOR IN A DISTRIBUTED RESILIENT NETWORK INTERCONNECT (DRNI) LINK AGGREGATION GROUP - A method of updating operational states of a network device in a distributed resilient network interconnect (DRNI) of a link aggregation group is disclosed. The method starts with initializing the network device for link aggregation, wherein the initialization includes setting variables of the network device for a first portal as configured by administrative settings, where the first portal includes the network device and at least one neighbor network device. The method continues with determining that an operational state associated with the first portal is changed and updating a set of operational states of the network device for link aggregation in response to the operational state change, where the set of operational states of the network device for link aggregation includes an operational state of the gateway of the network device. | 10-23-2014 |
20140317251 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR OPTIMIZING A CONFIGURATION SYSTEM OF A NETWORK ELEMENT OF A SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORK - A method for optimizing entity-specific configuration systems for functional entities of a network element of a software-defined network is presented. The entity-specific configuration systems are based on a network element-specific configuration system related to the whole network element and including configuration entries for determining operations to be carried out by the network element. The method includes forming ( | 10-23-2014 |
20140317252 | In-service software upgrade utilizing metadata-driven state translation - A method and apparatus for a metadata-driven upgrade of a network element is described. A network element comprises an active and backup controller card and receives new software to be installed on that network element. In addition, the network element installs the software on the backup controller card and synchronizes the active state of the network element to the backup controller card. Furthermore, the network element uses metadata to translate the active state to the format used by the new software. | 10-23-2014 |
20140317253 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT SERVICE - System and method for agentless computing system configuration management in networked environments. A configuration management service may be implemented as a service on a network with a standard network interface. A client may communicate with the service to specify a configuration for a target system, for example through a browser interface. The specified configuration may be stored by the service. The service may generate a package according to the specified configuration. The package may be delivered to the target system via the network. The package may then install the configuration, for example, one or more software, data, or other digital components, on the target systems in accordance with the specified configuration. The clients may request that the service verify and/or update the installed configuration on the target system. The service may, in response, generate an update package for the installed configuration. Target systems may include computer systems and virtual machines. | 10-23-2014 |
20140317254 | MANAGEMENT COMPUTER, AUTOMATED OPERATION PROCEDURE OUTPUT METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A management computer manages a resource to be managed and outputs an operation procedure to be automated from an operation procedure included in an operation for changing a configuration of the resource to be managed. The operation procedure includes a manual procedure and an automatic execution procedure. The management computer stores time information including an initiation time of initiating the operation procedure and a termination time of terminating the operation procedure and time-series information about the resource to be managed. The management computer acquires time-series information corresponding to the time information of the operation procedure from the time-series information, determinates whether the operation procedure takes time mainly for the manual procedure or takes time mainly for the automated procedure based on the acquired time-series information, and outputs the determination result. | 10-23-2014 |
20140325040 | NETWORK-BASED DHCP SERVER RECOVERY - To recover existing IP configuration information directly from an existing network in response to DHCP server failure, unique identifiers corresponding to hosts that a DHCP server provisioned with IP configuration information may be stored on the network in non-volatile memory such that current configuration information associated with the hosts may be obtained from the network in response to the DHCP server failure. For example, in a standalone deployment, messages may be sent to each host, which may respond with the current configuration information. In other scenarios, a summary node may provide summarized configuration information and messages may only be sent to hosts not included among the summarized configuration information, or configuration information may be synchronized among redundant DHCP servers such that messages may be sent to certain hosts based on differences between the configuration information on a mate DHCP server and a DHCP server recovering from failure. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325041 | METHOD, APPARATUS, SERVER AND SYSTEM FOR ADAPTING A CLIENT TO A HARDWARE ENVIRONMENT - A method, apparatus, server and system for adapting a client to a hardware environment is presented. A server obtains hardware environment information of a client. The hardware environment information includes one or both of hardware and software configuration information of the device terminal which support operations of the client, wherein the client includes an application having codes executable by the device terminal to perform at least one hardware function in the device terminal. The server sends matched configuration parameters according to the hardware environment information to the client. The client combines codes of the configuration parameters with codes of default dynamically configurable information to generate a correction result, which correction result is utilized by the client to perform the at least one hardware function in the device terminal. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325042 | Robust Service Deployment - A method, system and program product for deploying a service on a network comprising a plurality of network resources, the method comprising providing an actual network model comprising network resources and the configurations of the network resources; providing a computer-implemented network configuration management system controlling the actual network resource configurations in the actual model; providing a service description comprising network resource configuration information for implementing the service on specific network resources; selecting a set of available network resources for deploying the service in the network based on the service description; reserving available network resources for deploying the service in an off-line version of the actual network model, the off-line version including updated network resource configurations to reflect the changes to the configurations of the actual network resources triggered by the deployment of the service; and deploying the service by updating the actual network model using the off-line version. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325043 | Network Switching Method, Version Upgrade Method, and Terminal Device - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a network switching method, a version upgrade method, and a terminal device, which relate to the field of communications technologies. A terminal receives a user instruction that instructs the terminal to access a network of a target operator. If an operator of a network currently accessed by the terminal is different from the target operator, a preset file is read to obtain image information corresponding to the target operator. A target image file corresponding to the target operator is obtained according to the image information and version switching is performed according to the target image file. The preset file includes image information that corresponds to all image files of operators stored in the terminal in one-to-one correspondence. | 10-30-2014 |
20140325044 | System and Method for Processing Bank Notes - A system and a method for processing value documents comprises a multiplicity of bank-note processing machines connected and arranged to communicate with each other via a communication network, and which respectively have stored therein configuration data defining the operating configuration of a respective bank-note processing machine. At least a first bank-note processing machine is logically associated with a first local access service module, and at least a second bank-note processing machine is logically associated with a second local access service module. The system comprises a central master access service module having configuration data stored therein and in communication via the communication network with the first local access service module and the second local access service module. A change of the configuration data stored in the central master access service module leads to the configuration of the first bank-note processing machine and of the second bank-note processing machine being changed. | 10-30-2014 |
20140330948 | UNDIFFERENTIATED SERVICE DOMAINS - Guest domains (virtual machines) may execute at a virtualization server. During execution, the guest domains may request various services to facilitate their operation. The virtualization server may disaggregate the services requested by the guest domains among various service domains. A service domain may be configured to provide one the services. The virtualization server may also maintain a pool of partially initialized service domains. When a guest domain requests a particular service, one of the partially initialized service domains may be selected from the pool, and the partially initialized service domain may complete initialization to become an initialized service domain. The initialized service domain may thus be configured to provide the service requested by a guest domain. The virtualization server may periodically replenish the pool of partially initialized service domains to ensure that a partially initialized service domain is available upon demand from one of the guest domains. | 11-06-2014 |
20140330949 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING AND DIGITALLY CORRECTING ERRORS ON A COMPUTER SYSTEM - A method for optimizing a computer system, the method comprising the steps of receiving at least one key corresponding to at least one attribute of at least one configurable computer system; accessing an electronic key database stored in a memory that includes computer configuration information; comparing the received keys with entries in the key database; generating recommendations where the recommendations include commands selected from the group consisting of deleting, Disabling, suspending, changing process priority, and delaying the execution of the attribute corresponding to the key received from the configurable computer system; and transmitting the recommendations to the configurable computer system based upon the comparison of the received keys with entries in the key database. | 11-06-2014 |
20140337491 | REPOSITORY REDUNDANCY IMPLEMENTATION OF A SYSTEM WHICH INCREMENTALLY UPDATES CLIENTS WITH EVENTS THAT OCCURRED VIA A CLOUD-ENABLED PLATFORM - Techniques are disclosed for implementing repository redundancy in a system which incrementally updates remote clients with events that occurred in a cloud-enabled platform. In one embodiment, a method comprises comparing a local timestamp of an event with a remote timestamp of the event. The event is to be stored in a queue in a repository cluster to be read by a remote client. The method further comprises updating the local timestamp of the event if the comparing indicates that the remote timestamp is more recent than the local timestamp. Among other advantages, embodiments disclosed herein ensure that no event in an action log is missed or skipped by any of remote clients in a distributed action log framework system during a switchover from an active but failed server to a backup server, and require zero or minimal down time during the switchover, thereby providing robustness and serviceability to such system. | 11-13-2014 |
20140337492 | AUTONOMIC COMPUTER CONFIGURATION BASED ON LOCATION - A system and apparatus for noticing and creating relational settings, actions, profiles, and tasks by tying resources to a location based on user behavior. | 11-13-2014 |
20140344423 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING FUNCTION MODE - Methods, apparatus, and systems for switching a function mode are provided herein. In an exemplary method, a server stays connected with each of a first-type client and a second-type client via a channel, the each of the first-type client and the second-type client having a function-mode-display interface being displayed thereon. A switching request is received from the first-type client via the channel, the switching request including a first-type client identifier and a target-function-mode identifier. After obtaining a second-type client identifier corresponding to the first-type client identifier according to a preset group relationship, the corresponding second-type client is obtained. A function-mode-configuration parameter corresponding to the target-function-mode identifier is obtained according to a preset function-mode list. The function-mode-configuration parameter is sent to the first-type client and the second-type client via the channel, such that the first-type client and the second-type client update the function-mode-display interface according to the function-mode-configuration parameter. | 11-20-2014 |
20140344424 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A system includes a first server configured to execute a first virtual machine among a plurality of virtual machines belonging to a first virtual network, the plurality of virtual machines identified by a common address in the first virtual network; and a second server; and a switch including a first port coupled to the first server and a second port coupled to the second server, and configured to: store an association between the common address and the first port; and update the association to associate the common address with the second port in place of the first port when the first virtual machine is migrated from the first server to the second server. | 11-20-2014 |
20140344425 | Content Delivery Framework having Fill Services - A framework supporting content delivery and comprising a plurality of devices, each device configured to run at least one content delivery (CD) service of a plurality of CD services, wherein the plurality of CD services comprise: collector services, reducer services, fill services, and control services; and wherein at least some of the plurality of devices run fill services, and wherein the fill services running on the at least some of the plurality of devices comprise at least one fill services network. At least one the fill service is configured to obtain resources on behalf of other CD services in the CDN. | 11-20-2014 |
20140344426 | Transient Unpruning for Faster Layer-Two Convergence - In one embodiment, a method includes detecting a change in network topology and broadcasting a transient unconditional unpruning message to multiple nodes in the network. The message is configured to instruct each of the nodes receiving the message to start a phase timer in response to the broadcast message; unprune its operational ports; and, upon expiration of the phase timer, prune its ports in accordance with the results of a pruning protocol. | 11-20-2014 |
20140351393 | MULTI-PROTOCOL STORAGE NETWORK I/O DEVICES AND METHODS - Systems and methods which allow for one or more input/output (I/O) ports residing on a device in a storage network environment to be reconfigured in order to communicate using different protocols are provided. Embodiments may provide for dynamic reconfiguration of an I/O port while the device including the port is deployed in the storage network. In some instances, such reconfiguration may be managed locally and/or by a remote management processing resource in the storage network. In some embodiments, reconfiguration of an I/O port to communicate in a different protocol may be implemented, either manually or automatically, based on observed traffic data. | 11-27-2014 |
20140359089 | NETWORK PROXY FOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE, LOW-POWER DATA CENTER INTERCONNECT FABRIC - A system and method are provided for network proxying. The network proxying may occur in a node of a fabric or across nodes in the fabric. In the network proxying, the node has a processor with a low power mode and the system remaps, by a management processor of the node, a port identifier for a processor that is in a low power mode to the management processor. The management processor then processes a plurality of packets that contain the port identifier for the processor that is in the low power mode to maintain a network presence of the node. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359090 | Wi-Fi Administration Console - In one embodiment, a method includes configuring a first router of a second entity to link the first router to a communication network of the second entity. The configuration of the first router establishes router-configuration data for the communication network on a computer system of a first entity. The method also includes configuring a second router of the second entity to link the second router to the communication network using at least some of the router-configuration data for the communication network established on the computer system of the first entity. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359091 | DYNAMICALLY MIGRATING VIRTUAL MACHINES AND GATEWAYS - Improving a distributed network environment. A method includes determining physical element properties of physical elements in a virtualized network topology. The method further includes determining gateway placement on a first physical element of the virtualized network topology. The method further includes determining utilization of physical elements in the virtualized network topology. Based on the physical element properties, gateway placement, and utilization of physical elements in the virtualized network topology, the method further includes determining an improved virtualized network topology to improve use of physical elements in the virtualized network topology | 12-04-2014 |
20140359092 | Capacity Exchange for the Open Content Delivery Network - Some embodiments provide a capacity exchange whereby capacity from different content delivery networks (CDNs) can be bought, sold, and traded. The capacity exchange is part of an “Open CDN” platform. The Open CDN platform federates the independent operation of CDNs and other operators of and service providers to distributed platforms participating in the Open CDN platform so that each participant can (1) dynamically scale its capacity without incurring additional infrastructure costs, (2) expand its service into previously untapped geographic regions without physically establishing points of presence (POPs) at those geographic regions, and (3) reduce sunk costs associated with unused capacity of already deployed infrastructure by selling that unused capacity to other participants that are in need of additional capacity. The Open CDN platform includes one or more APIs for facilitating intercommunication between the federation participants by performing configuration mapping, command interoperability, traffic management, and reporting aggregation. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359093 | DETECTING AND CORRECTING NETWORK INTERRUPTIONS USING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - Embodiments provide a network address translation (NAT) service for network devices. A network connection from at least one private network device to the NAT service is received and a network connection from at least one remote device to the NAT service is received. The private network device is positioned within a private network and the remote device is positioned within a public network. A network availability of the remote device is determined. If the remote device is unavailable or a network configuration setting associated with the remote device changes, the private network device is notified and a connection reset message is transmitted to the private network device. | 12-04-2014 |
20140359094 | Hybrid Transport - Application Network Fabric Apparatus - A hybrid routing—application network fabric apparatus is presented where a fabric apparatus has multiple apparatus components or resources that can be dedicated to one or more application topologies. The apparatus can receive a topology image definition file describing an application topology and the apparatus can dedicate its local components for use with the application topology. The apparatus can dedicate general purpose processing cores, dedicated routing cores, data channels, networking ports, memory or other local resources to the application topology. Contemplated application topologies include routing topologies, computation topologies, database topologies, storage topologies, or other types of application topologies. Furthermore, application topologies can be optimized by modeling or simulating the topologies on a network fabric. | 12-04-2014 |
20140365623 | Method to Protect Storage Systems from Discontinuity Due to Device Misconfiguration - The invention provides for a method and corresponding Information Handling System (IHS) to protect storage systems from device discontinuity caused by misconfigurations. An embodiment of the IHS comprises a network switch coupled for communication to a storage group where a member of the storage group is a group leader. The group leader has access to configuration information for each member of the group and the network switch. The IHS further comprises an agent monitor that communicates a proposed change affecting the switch and/or a member of the group to the group leader. The group leader in response to the proposed change determines the acceptability of the proposed change using the accessed configuration information and in turn, communicates the determined acceptability to the agent monitor at the network switch. The agent monitor or the group leader then provides output indicating the acceptability of the proposed change to a network administrator. | 12-11-2014 |
20140365624 | CONFIGURING COMPUTING DEVICES USING A BOOTSTRAP CONFIGURATION - In the described embodiments, a device configuration file is used to set configuration settings on a computing device during a configuration operation (e.g., an initial configuration or a re-configuration of the computing device). The device configuration file is retrieved from a location where the device configuration file is hosted using a reference to the location from a bootstrap configuration. The bootstrap configuration is provided by a bootstrap configuration server and is retrieved by the computing device from the bootstrap configuration server during the configuration operation. | 12-11-2014 |
20140372577 | DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING NETWORK PARAMETERS USING WEATHER FORECASTS - In one embodiment, network parameters are dynamically adjusted using weather forecasts. The embodiments include determining a weather forecast that predicts a weather condition proximate to a network. Network parameters are then selected for adjustment based on the predicted weather condition. The selected network parameters are adjusted to improve performance of the network in response to the predicted weather condition. | 12-18-2014 |
20140372578 | MECHANISM FOR FACILITATING SPIN MODE-BASED DYNAMIC UPDATING OF APPLICATION SERVERS IN AN ON-DEMAND SERVICES ENVIRONMENT - In accordance with embodiments, there are provided mechanisms and methods for facilitating spin mode-based dynamic updating of application servers in an on-demand services environment. In one embodiment and by way of example, a method includes upgrading a first set of application servers of a plurality of application servers at one or more computing devices, holding a first set of requests received at the first set of application servers from being processed while the first set of application servers is being upgraded, and upgrading a second set of application servers of the plurality of application servers upon completion of the first set of application servers. The method may further include holding a second set of requests received at the second set of application servers from being processed while the second set of application servers is being upgraded, and resuming processing of the first set of requests at the upgraded first set of application servers. | 12-18-2014 |
20140379880 | INHERENT POWER-OVER-DATA BUS SIGNALING FOR SECURE OPERATING MODE SWITCHING - A method for changing an operating mode of a processing unit of a network node is described. The processing unit is connected to a communication and supply line for providing data communication and for providing a supply voltage. The method includes an establishing of a communication connection of the processing unit of the network node via the communication and supply line, a determination of a change of the supply voltage of the communication and supply line by the processing unit, and a setting of an operation mode of the processing unit based on the determined change of the supply voltage. | 12-25-2014 |
20140379881 | Network Device Configuration Management - Method and system are provided for network device configuration management. The method includes: receiving a set of user commands for configuration of a network device; retrieving a syntactic model of a network device configuration interface for a network device type and generating a modelled configuration of a current configuration of the network device; predicting the effect of the user command on the modelled configuration to generate a predicted modelled configuration; and applying rules for a user and/or network device type to determine if the command is permitted based on the predicted modelled configuration of the network device. Predicting the effect of the user command predicts in near real-time the effect on the network device configuration of a command that the user enters. | 12-25-2014 |
20150012624 | UPDATING HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE COMPONENTS OF CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT AT OPTIMAL TIMES - A method, system and computer program product for updating hardware and software components of a cloud computing environment. An administrative server monitors the usage statistics (e.g., compute utilization) of the hardware and software components of the cloud computing environment. Upon receiving user-selected thresholds for the usage statistics, which may be stored in a profile, the administrative server applies a user-provided patch to the hardware or software component whose threshold criteria has been met. Alternatively, the administrative server may automatically update the hardware and software components based on determined minimum usage points (i.e., minimum levels of usage activity) using the monitored usage statistics of the hardware and software components. In this manner, updates to the hardware and software components of the cloud computing environment can occur at optimal times, where the usage activity is low, thereby lessening the negative impact on servicing the user's computing requirements from the update. | 01-08-2015 |
20150012625 | ASSIGNING LOCATION IDENTIFIERS TO NODES IN A DISTRIBUTED COMPUTER CLUSTER NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for assigning location identifiers (IDs) to nodes in a distributed computer cluster network environment is provided and includes receiving notification of attachment of a compute node to a Top-of-Rack (ToR) switch in the distributed computer cluster network environment, retrieving compute node information from an inventory database in the ToR switch, calculating a location ID of the compute node as a function of at least a portion of the compute node information, and communicating the location ID from the ToR switch to the compute node. The location ID indicates an Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model Layer 7 logical group associated with an OSI model Layer 1 physical location of the compute node in the distributed computer cluster network environment. | 01-08-2015 |
20150012626 | METHODS FOR AUTO-CONFIGURING A ROUTER ON AN IP SUBNET - An autoconfiguring data router is connected to a communications network subnet having a second network data router. The autoconfiguring data router includes a configuration determination module that determines configuration attributes for operably connecting the autoconfiguring data router to the subnet, and an autoconfiguration module that configures the autoconfiguring data router according to the configuration attributes so that the autoconfiguring data router is operably connected to the subnet. | 01-08-2015 |
20150019697 | CENTRALIZED MANAGEMENT OF AUTHORITATIVE EDGE DEVICES - In one embodiment, an authoritative edge device (AED)-server in a computer network maintains assignment of an active AED for a particular virtual local area network (VLAN), and in response to a triggered re-assignment, sends an AED change request identifying an old active AED for the particular VLAN and a new active AED for the particular VLAN (e.g., and/or corresponding backups). In response to receiving the change request, the old active AED ceases forwarding of traffic for the particular VLAN and transmits a relinquishment confirmation into the network. Also, in response to receiving the change request and the relinquishment confirmation from the old active AED, the new active AED assumes responsibility for traffic forwarding for the particular VLAN and transmits an activation confirmation into the network. The change request is then deemed completed by the AED-sever upon receipt of both the relinquishment confirmation and the activation confirmation. | 01-15-2015 |
20150019698 | NON-INVASIVE UPGRADES OF SERVER COMPONENTS IN CLOUD DEPLOYMENTS - A method, system, and computer program product for performing software upgrades. The method serves to preserve an inter-process connection between two endpoints during patching operations. The method commences by suspending at least some communication activity over the inter-process connection while preserving one or more functioning states of the inter-process connection. A patching facility produces a patched endpoint (e.g., a software component) by performing a patch operation to one of the endpoints of the inter-process connection while the at least some communication activity remains suspended. After patching, a process reconfigures at least some of the one or more preserved functioning states of the inter-process connection to connect to the patched endpoint. When the preserved functioning states of the inter-process connection have been restored, then communication activity resumes over the connection, using the patched endpoint. The inter-process communication can comprise one or more connections between a server process and a client process. | 01-15-2015 |
20150019699 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE TRIGGER AND EXECUTION OF MANAGEMENT POLICIES - A remote management system includes a server and multiple devices operating in accordance with management policies based on conditions and actions, and a method for triggering and controlling the execution of these management policies. The method and system extend MgmtPolicyMO in order to make it more flexible and efficient, focusing more specifically on the functionality of the actions of management policy. | 01-15-2015 |
20150026317 | RECOVERING FROM A FAILURE TO CONNECT TO A NETWORK THAT WAS REMOTELY CONFIGURED ON A HEADLESS DEVICE - The disclosure relates to wireless communications. An aspect determines whether or not an attempt to connect to a local wireless network using a given network configuration failed, determines whether or not a previous attempt to connect to the local wireless network using the given network configuration was successful, and if the attempt to connect failed and the previous attempt was successful, switches between a state of retrying to connect to the local wireless network and a state of waiting to receive a new network configuration. | 01-22-2015 |
20150026318 | IDENTIFYING NETWORK COMMUNICATION PATTERNS - Examples of the present disclosure include methods, devices, and/or systems. Identifying network communication patterns can include analyzing a distributed computer program of a network, estimating virtual network communication traffic based on the analysis, and mapping the virtual network communication traffic to a physical network link. Identifying network communications patterns can also include identifying the network communication pattern and categorizing the physical communication network link based on an estimated communication intensity of the mapped communication traffic and the network communication pattern. Identifying network communication patterns can further include optimizing an energy used by the network based on the categorization. | 01-22-2015 |
20150026319 | Method and System For Remote Device Management - A system for remote device management includes in a network an auto-configuration server managing device, at least one database, and a plurality of auto-configuration servers. The auto-configuration server managing device and the database are coupled in a communicative connection. The database holds information for identification of electronic devices. The auto-configuration server managing device is arranged for communication with a manageable electronic device over the network. The auto-configuration server manager is further being arranged for:
| 01-22-2015 |
20150026320 | Distributed Network Interfaces For Application Cloaking And Spoofing - Systems and methods associated with distributing an application's network interface over nodes of a networking fabric are presented. Nodes of the fabric can operate as interface modules, each taking on a role or responsibility for a portion of the application's network address including IP address, port assignments, or other portions of the network address. Interface modules of the networking nodes can then spoof or cloak the application to provide security against internal or external threats. | 01-22-2015 |
20150032866 | Native Application Testing - In one embodiment, a method includes deploying an application to a plurality of client system, providing a treatment of the application to a set of client systems by receiving a request from the client system, determining whether the client system belongs in a treat group, remotely activating the treatment, and synchronizing activation of the treatment in response to subsequent requests, and receiving exposure data from the set of client system identifying exposure of the users to the treatment. | 01-29-2015 |
20150032867 | Device Management Service - The techniques described herein build a device and/or update a configuration of the device so that the device is tailored for a particular use or a particular user. That is, the techniques may receive device configuration update information and generate instructions to send to the device so that the device can execute the configuration update. | 01-29-2015 |
20150032868 | ACCESS POINT WITH CAPABILITY OF DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING CURRENT CCA THRESHOLD VALUE AND OPERATING METHOD THEREOF - An access point with capability of dynamically adjusting a present clear channel assessment (CCA) threshold value and an operating method of the access point are disclosed herein. The operating method includes, sensing a channel status through a receiving module, determining whether to transmit data through a transmission module according to the channel status and the present CCA threshold value, calculating a transmission error rate according to the data is successfully transmitted through the transmission module or not, and dynamically adjusting the present CCA threshold value according to the transmission error rate. In such an operation, the present CCA threshold value can be adjusted to a suitable value, and the access point can avoid abandoning its data transmission task due to the interferences of wireless signals from other access points or workstations located beyond the cell size of the access point. | 01-29-2015 |
20150032869 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DYNAMIC DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM (DDNS) - A method carried out by a network node for sending update messages to a server when a predefined event occurs or periodically. The network node comprises a plurality of network interfaces. The update message is embedded with a unique identifier corresponding to the network node, and a network interface identifier corresponding to at least one of the plurality of network interfaces. In particular, the network interface identifier is corresponding to network interface(s) at which a predefined event has occurred. The present invention further comprises a method carried out by a server for resolving a DNS request by retrieving DNS resource records of a network node and/or network interface specified in the DNS request, and replying to the DNS request with the DNS resource records. The DNS resource records are created based on in part at least one update message received from the network node. | 01-29-2015 |
20150032870 | UPDATING PARAMETERS IN A NETWORK - A system, method, and software product are provided for updating parameters, such as requested packet intervals (RPIs), in a network. The system may include one or more PLCs, communication controllers, and I/O devices coupled in a communication network, such as EtherNet/IP. A request to change a parameter (e.g., scanning rate or timeout value) is transmitted from the PLC to an I/O device specifying a new parameter value or time-out value. The I/O device may receive the message, use a temporary time-out value while processing the message, and transmit an acknowledgement confirming the new value to the PLC. The I/O device may use the updated parameter and new time-out value. The updated parameter may be implemented without the need to take down and re-establish network connections to the affected devices. | 01-29-2015 |
20150039732 | MOBILE APPLICATION FRAMEWORK EXTENSIBIILTY - In an example embodiment, extending an application distributed to a plurality of devices may be accomplied by receiving one or more configuration files. Then the configuration files on a platform server. Then the application may be distributed to the plurality of devices, the application containing code performing one or more calls to the one or more configuration files. Then an update to the one or more configuration files may be received. Then the update to the one or more configuration files may be stored on the platform, thereby altering the application distributed to the plurality of devices without recompiling the application. | 02-05-2015 |
20150039733 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TROUBLESHOOTING IN IN-HOUSE NETWORKS - A system for solving a technical problem in a network architecture with at least one service operator network and a plurality of in-house networks supported by the at least one service operator network, includes a computing device adapted to receive in-house network parameters and to determine, based on the received in-house network parameters, a coordination strategy involving the reconfiguration of a number of involved in-house networks being supported by a number of involved service operator servers. The computing device is adapted to inform the number of involved operator servers of the coordination strategy. A service operator server is adapted to reconfigure an in-house network according to the coordination strategy to solve the technical problem. | 02-05-2015 |
20150039734 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR ENABLING REAL-TIME GUARANTEES IN PUBLISH-SUBSCRIBE MIDDLEWARE USING DYNAMICALLY RECONFIGURABLE NETWORKS - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for enabling real-time guarantees in publish-subscribe middleware with dynamically reconfigurable networks. One exemplary method includes providing a publish-subscribe middleware interface usable by publishers and subscribers to request quality of service guarantees for data delivery across a network. The method also includes providing a global resource manager for receiving quality of service requests from the subscribers, for evaluating the requests, and for dynamically reconfiguring network resources to provide the requested quality of service guarantees. | 02-05-2015 |
20150039735 | CENTRALIZED CONFIGURATION OF A DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING CLUSTER - Systems and methods for centralized configuration of a distributed computing cluster are disclosed. One embodiment of the disclosed technology provides a user environment that facilitates a selection of a service to be run on hosts in the distributed computing cluster and configuration of the service or hosts in the distributed computer cluster. The disclosed technology can further configure each of the hosts in the distributed computing cluster to run the service based on a set of configuration settings. | 02-05-2015 |
20150039736 | NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - In a network synchronization system including plural information processing devices, a first information processing device includes a synchronization-use common storage unit configured to copy and store first information for each user authorized to use the first information processing device, so that the first information can be shared with another information processing device; and a second information processing device includes a setting information unit configured to store second information for each user authorized to use the second information processing device, and a synchronization control unit configured to compare the second information with the first information, and to update the second information to latest information based on a result of the comparison. The synchronization control unit acquires common update information common to the information processing devices, which is stored in the synchronization-use common storage unit. | 02-05-2015 |
20150052229 | DATA CENTER SERVICE ORIENTED NETWORKING - A tangible machine readable storage medium stores instructions and implements a method when the instructions are executed by a processor. A service catalog (SC) includes a service unit (SU). The SU includes an array of service resources (SR) to define a service using end-user service-oriented terminology. The SU is assigned to a module. The module includes a component associated with a configuration and a device. An operational task is executed on the device to deploy the configuration on the device to implement the service. | 02-19-2015 |
20150058458 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK-CAPABLE APPLIANCES - A controlling device is used to configure a target device for wireless network communications through use of a setup wizard. The setup wizard is used to obtain information required to perform communications on a wireless network via a wireless network router and a digital representation of the information obtained through use of the setup wizard is provided to the target device via use of the controlling device. The target device will use the digital representation of the information to configure itself for wireless network communications. | 02-26-2015 |
20150067113 | ADAPTIVE NETWORK CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A centralized configuration controlling system for configuring network devices is provided. The centralized configuration controlling system includes a retrieval component for retrieving configuration data, and operating parameters related to performance of a plurality of network devices in a network. The centralized configuration controlling system includes a processing component for processing retrieved operating parameters of the plurality of network devices based upon predefined rules to generate revised configuration data for the plurality of network devices. The centralized configuration controlling system includes a configuration component for configuring the plurality of network devices based upon the revised configuration data. | 03-05-2015 |
20150067114 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RESOLVING DATA INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN DOMAIN NAME SYSTEMS - In one aspect, a computer-implemented method for managing Domain Name System (DNS) information is provided. The method uses a computing device having a processor and a memory. The method includes receiving, in the memory, source DNS data from a plurality of DNS systems including at least first source data from a first source system and second source data from a second source system. The method also includes identifying, by the processor, an inconsistency between the first source data and the second source data. The inconsistency includes an inconsistency type. The method further includes determining a solution to the inconsistency by applying one or more rules from a plurality of inconsistency rules based at least in part on the inconsistency type associated with the inconsistency. The method also includes resolving the inconsistency using the determined solution including generating resultant DNS data. | 03-05-2015 |
20150067115 | METHOD OF PROVIDING A MOBILITY SERVICE - A method comprising running an application on user equipment; providing a mobility service; using a packet switched connection when said mobility service is unavailable; and using said mobility service when said mobility service becomes available. | 03-05-2015 |
20150074250 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT - A system and method for network management are described herein. The system includes a number of servers and a first network coupling the servers to each other and configured to connect the servers to one or more client computing devices. The system also includes a second network coupling the servers to each other, wherein data transferred between the servers is transferred though the second network. Network management requests for configuring the second network are communicated to the servers through the first network. | 03-12-2015 |
20150074251 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, RESOURCE MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND MANAGEMENT COMPUTER - A computer system, comprising: at least one computer; at least one network apparatus; at least one storage apparatus; and a plurality of service systems for use in execution of given services, the at least one computer including a system control part for managing the plurality of service systems, the system control part being configured to: hold system configuration information and evaluation information; obtain configuration information of the plurality of service systems from the system configuration information, in a case of evaluating the reliability of the plurality of service systems in the services; calculate the evaluation values of the plurality of service systems; and generate information that indicates the reliability of the plurality of service systems based on the calculated evaluation values. | 03-12-2015 |
20150074252 | LOCALITY AND TIME BASED DEPENDENCY RELATIONSHIPS IN CLUSTERS - A method, apparatus, and system are directed toward configuring a dependency relationship between resources in a cluster. A dependency relationship between a dependent in a first resource group and a dependee in a second resource group is declared. The dependency relationship might include a locality based qualifier and/or a time based qualifier. The locality based qualifier includes a Local Node, Any Node, or From Resource Group Affinity relationship. The time based dependency qualifier includes a Strong dependency, Weak dependency, Online Restart dependency, or Offline Restart dependency. The declaration might be made using a graphical user interface, property list, configuration file, or the like. A candidate node on which to activate the first resource group is determined. The dependent is brought online on the candidate node based on whether an instance of the dependee is online on a node specified by the locality based qualifier. | 03-12-2015 |
20150081857 | DYNAMIC AGENT REPLACEMENT WITHIN A CLOUD NETWORK - A computing device receives information from one or more agents, wherein the one or more agents monitor one or more resources in a cloud network. The computing device determines that the configuration of the one or more agents monitoring the one or more resources needs to be changed based on at least the information received from the one or more agents. The computing device changes the configuration of the one or more agents monitoring the one or more resources based on at least the information received from the one or more agents. | 03-19-2015 |
20150081858 | SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING TELEMATIC SERVICES AND CORRESPONDING METHOD - Method of providing services for a vehicle, the method comprising: storing for at least one model of vehicle of said group of vehicles, the configuration files for at least one service to be provided; storing a set of data pairs comprising an identifier of the control unit and an identification number of the corresponding vehicle; receiving the identification number of the vehicle from said vehicle by the services provision server; extracting the identifier of the control unit as a function of the identification number of the vehicle; an extraction of one or more configuration files as a function of a vehicle identification datum; and a downloading by the control unit of said vehicle from the services provision server of the configuration file or files extracted for the setting up of the service or services to be provided for the model of the vehicle. | 03-19-2015 |
20150089032 | Scalable Network Configuration with Consistent Updates in Software Defined Networks - Mechanisms are provided for configuring a data flow between a source device and a destination device in a network. The mechanisms receive, from a network control application, a request to establish a network configuration corresponding to a data flow between the source device and the destination device. The request comprises a fine grained header field tuple for defining the data flow. The mechanisms allocate, from a shadow address pool, a shadow address to be mapped to the fine grained header field tuple. The shadow address pool comprises addresses not being used by devices coupled to the network. The mechanisms configure a network infrastructure of the network to route data packets of the data flow from the source device to the destination device based on the shadow address. | 03-26-2015 |
20150095470 | Identifying a Useful Wired Connection - Certain examples identify a device's useful wired connection and, when found, facilitate network configuration according to that useful wired connection. An example method includes periodically transmitting, by a first device, a first message over a wireless network interface. The example method includes listening, by the first device, for the first message over a wired network interface. The example method includes, when the first device at least receives the first message over the wired network interface, transmitting, by the first device to at least one additional device over the wireless network interface, a second message, wherein the second message includes an indication, the indication indicating that the at least one additional device can change its network configuration to utilize the wired network interface of the first device. | 04-02-2015 |
20150095471 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING DYNAMIC ANALYTICS CONFIGURATION ON A MOBILE DEVICE - A computer implemented method and apparatus for enabling dynamic analytics configuration on a mobile device. generating a mobile application, which mobile application, when executed on a mobile device, includes accessing of instructions for analytics data collection, which instructions are accessed from a location remote from the mobile device executing the mobile application, and which instructions are modifiable without modification to the mobile application, thereby enabling dynamic analytics configuration on the mobile device. | 04-02-2015 |
20150095472 | Resource Affinity Via Dynamic Reconfiguration for Multi-Queue Network Adapters - A mechanism is provided for providing resource affinity for multi-queue network adapters via dynamic reconfiguration. A device driver allocates an initial queue pair within a memory. The device driver determines whether workload of the data processing system has risen above a predetermined high threshold. Responsive to the workload rising above the predetermined high threshold, the device driver allocates and initializes an additional queue pair in the memory. The device driver programs a receive side scaling (RSS) mechanism in a network adapter to allow for dynamic insertion of an additional processing engine associated with the additional queue pair. The device driver enables transmit tuple hashing to the additional queue pair. | 04-02-2015 |
20150100671 | Identifying Compatible System Configurations - Methods, systems, and articles of manufacture for identifying compatible system configurations are provided herein. A method includes generating a second graph from a first graph of multiple devices in a network and a set of one or more network compatibility rules, wherein said generating comprises dividing each device in the first graph into multiple nodes in the second graph, and wherein each node in the second graph represents a valid configuration of a device in the first graph; identifying a sub-graph of two or more linked nodes in the second graph that is isomorphic to at least a portion of the first graph, wherein the two or more linked nodes in the second graph represent two or more configurations that are compatible based on the set of one or more network compatibility rules; and determining each of one or more changes needed to convert a current configuration in the network to a target configuration specified by the sub-graph. | 04-09-2015 |
20150100672 | Remote Management of Devices - Remote configuration ensures compliance of remote devices. A server polls a device for a configuration file. The server compares the configuration file to a compliance policy. If the configuration file fails the compliance policy, the server retrieves a compliant configuration file that conforms to the compliance policy. The server sends the compliant configuration file to the device with an instruction to replace the configuration file. | 04-09-2015 |
20150100673 | AUTOMATED NETWORK DEVICE PROVISIONING USING DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL - In an embodiment, an electronic digital data packet router performs receiving a DHCP initiation message on a particular interface among a plurality of network interfaces; modifying the DHCP initiation message by adding a particular DHCP option that signals a DHCP server to provide router configuration data, resulting in a modified DHCP initiation message; relaying the modified DHCP initiation message to the DHCP server; receiving, from the DHCP server, a DHCPOFFER message that comprises the particular DHCP option containing configuration data; configuring the router using the configuration data; relaying the DHCPOFFER message without the particular DHCP option on the particular interface toward another data packet router. | 04-09-2015 |
20150106486 | SINK DEVICE ADDRESSING MECHANISM - In general, in one aspect, the disclosure describes a method to assign unique addresses to each sink device in a content network based on port numbers of a source and branch devices in the network. Sink devices connected to a port on the source or the branch devices are assigned a corresponding port number as a sink address. Branch devices connected to a port on the source or higher level branch devices have a corresponding port number prepended to the previously assigned sink addresses. | 04-16-2015 |
20150106487 | DATA TABLE AT REMOTE SITE HAVING DEVICE IDENTIFIER THAT IDENTIFIES DEVICE AT LOCATION REMOTE FROM REMOTE SITE, PARAMETER SETTING FOR CONFIGURING DEVICE AT LOCATION, AND CONTROL SETTING FOR OPERATION OF DEVICE AT LOCATION - Systems and methods for providing registration at a remote site that may include, for example, a monitoring module that may communicate with a remote site. A registration protocol may be used by the monitoring module and the remote site in generating the messages communicated during the registration process. The monitoring module may gather and generate various identification information to be included in the registration protocol messages. The registration information provided by the monitoring module maybe stored at the remote site in a database server having a database. A confirmation message may be communicated from the remote site to the monitoring module that may either acknowledge successful registration or report that an error occurred during the registration process. | 04-16-2015 |
20150106488 | PHYSICAL RESOURCE LIFE-CYCLE IN A TEMPLATE BASED ORCHESTRATION OF END-TO-END SERVICE PROVISIONING - In one embodiment, the system may identify a virtual network, the virtual network including a plurality of virtual entities and connections among the plurality of virtual entities. The system may automatically map each of the plurality of virtual entities to one or more resources or resource pools such that the virtual network is mapped to a physical network, wherein mapping includes allocating one or more resources or resource pools to a corresponding one of the plurality of virtual entities. | 04-16-2015 |
20150113106 | AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION OF RETURNED MERCHANDISE IN A DATA CENTER - A method and system for determining a device identifier assigned to a device within an installation of devices connected via a network is provided. A system determines the device identifier of a device that has been repaired and reinstalled so that the device can be placed in service. Upon receiving an indication that a repaired device has been reinstalled, the system requests and receives a possible device identifier of the repaired device from an interconnect device that connects the repaired device to the network. To verify that the possible device identifier is the actual device identifier, the system directs the repaired device to reboot so that it broadcasts its device identifier. When the repaired device reboots, it broadcasts its device identifier. Upon receiving the broadcast device identifier, the system verifies that the possible device identifier is the same as the broadcast device identifier. | 04-23-2015 |
20150113107 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC MOBILE APPLICATIONS - Various embodiments of the present invention are dynamic, cross-platform application architectures for devices. According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, a platform-specific thin client can be provided on a mobile device. The thin client can be a simple code base customized for the device platform and prepared to configure itself to become a desired application. The thin client can be directed at a trusted source, which can initiate the configuration by delivering data instructing the thin client as to how it should behave under the current conditions and by delivering a framework for the GUI of the application. After the thin client is configured, the thin client can receive content for providing an application to a user. Thus, only a simple code base need be provided on for a device, and that code base can be dynamically configured to perform a desired task under given conditions. | 04-23-2015 |
20150120888 | Configuration Provision Device and Corresponding M2M Device, System, Method, Computer Program and Computer Program Product - It is presented a configuration provision device comprising: an electronic paper display; an input device arranged to detect a user action; and a controller arranged to, when the input device detects a user action, determine configuration data of a machine-to-machine device associated with the configuration provision device, and display the configuration data on the electronic paper display. A corresponding machine-to-machine device, system, method, computer program and computer program product are also presented. | 04-30-2015 |
20150120889 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A CLONE SERVICE FOR USE WITH A CLOUD PLATFORM ENVIRONMENT - In accordance with an embodiment, described herein is a system and method for providing a clone a service in a cloud platform environment. The system can clone a source service within a service domain or across service domains, by creating a new service from a same service definition package used for creating the source service, extracting post-provision changes from the source service, e.g., user applications and post-provision configurations, and applying the changes to the new service. | 04-30-2015 |
20150120890 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A UNIVERSAL DEVICE TO PROVIDE DESIRED NETWORK HARDWARE FUNCTIONALITY - A method and system for automatically configuring and transforming a universal device into a feature specific device to provide desired network hardware functionality for a plurality of different conventionally single purpose devices. The universal device receives data configured for handling by a network hardware device capable of providing desired network hardware functionality. Based on the data received, the universal device identifies the desired network hardware functionality from network hardware functionalities. The universal device selects one or more virtual ports capable of providing the desired network hardware functionality. The universal device automatically configures and transforms itself into a feature specific device to provide the desired network hardware functionality by implementing the selected one or more virtual ports to handle the data received. | 04-30-2015 |
20150127788 | CENTRALIZED ENTERPRISE IMAGE UPGRADES FOR DISTRIBUTED CAMPUS NETWORKS - System, method, and computer program product to perform an operation, comprising establishing a connection between a primary intermediate branch director (IBD) in a first branch of an enterprise network and a first proxy IBD in a second branch of the enterprise network, receiving, at the primary IBD, network topology information for each of a plurality of intermediate branch clients (IBCs) in the second branch of the enterprise network, and issuing, by the primary IBD to the first proxy IBD, a command to remotely configure at least one IBC of the plurality of IBCs in the second branch of the enterprise network. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127789 | ENCODING TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION INFORMATION FOR NETWORKING CONFIGURATION - Methods and apparatus for encoding traffic classification information for a networking configuration system are disclosed. At a networking configuration server, a hierarchy of network traffic categories and corresponding networking configuration options are generated. In addition, steps of a procedure usable to classify network traffic units into the categories are determined. Data structures to represent the hierarchy and the procedure are constructed at the networking configuration server and provided to a computing device of a distributed system to be used to schedule network transmissions. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127790 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENTERPRISE MISSION MANAGEMENT OF A COMPUTER NEWORK | 05-07-2015 |
20150127791 | DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM HAVING EIR TERMINAL INTERFACE NODE - A network accessible node facilitates management of a fleet of portable communication devices (EIR terminal), including portable data terminals and/or barcode readers, by directing performance of software upgrade and/or configuration update actions by one or more members of the fleet of EIR terminals. The node can be configured for use in managing the reprogramming of the one or more EIR terminals. In one embodiment, the node can be disposed in a common local facility and connected to a common local area network with the at least one EIR terminal. | 05-07-2015 |
20150127792 | CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, CONFIGURATION INTERFACE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR VENDOR-INDEPENDENT NETWORK DEVICE CONFIGURATION - A configuration management device for vendor-independent network device configuration includes a network interface unit for communicating with network devices over a communications network and a data storage unit. The network interface unit can include a unified device network interface and a device-specific driver unit, where the unified device network interface can: retrieve a device profile; to identify a network device which belongs to a network device type corresponding to the device profile; retrieve information on a device-specific configuration protocol to be used during configuration of the network device; and download values for the vendor-independent configuration parameters to the network device. | 05-07-2015 |
20150134789 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLICATION BEHAVIOR POLICIES - Various methods are described with respect to application behavior polices according to example embodiments. One example method may comprise determining an application behavior policy of one or more application behavior policies for an application, the application behavior policy comprising one or more configuration parameters. The method of this embodiment may also include causing the application to be launched, such that once launched the application operates in accordance with the application behavior policy. The method of this embodiment may also include causing the application to perform a negotiation with a remote peer, wherein the negotiation comprises a determination with respect to the one or more configuration parameters. The method of this embodiment may also include causing the application behavior policy to be enforced against the application. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134790 | RESOURCE ENTITLEMENT IN A MULTI-COMPUTER SYSTEM CONTROLLED BY A SINGLE INSTANCE - An entitlement system includes at least two computing devices and a management controller which all include a trusted platform module. Each of the trusted platform modules include a non-volatile storage for storing entitlement records. A management unit of each computing device includes configuration means to enable and disable computing resources of the respective computing device based on entitlement records. The management controller receives ensemble entitlement records in encrypted form and distributes sub-entitlement records in a second encrypted form to the management units of the computing devices. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134791 | MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS FOR MODIFIED COMPUTER NETWORKS - Techniques are described for managing communications between multiple computing nodes, such as computing nodes that are part of a virtual computer network. In some situations, various types of modifications may be made to one or more computing nodes of an existing virtual computer network, and the described techniques include managing ongoing communications for those computing nodes so as to accommodate the modifications. Such modifications may include, for example, migrating or otherwise moving a particular computing node that is part of a virtual network to a new physical network location, or modifying other aspects of how the computing node participates in the virtual network (e.g., changing one or more virtual network addresses used by the computing node). In some situations, the computing nodes may include virtual machine nodes hosted on one or more physical computing machines or systems, such as by or on behalf of one or more users. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134792 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT METHOD AND MANAGEMENT SERVER - The present invention relates to the field of a resource management method and a server. The resource management method includes: acquiring, by a management server, a first stable ratio used to indicate a quantitative ratio of at least two types of servers in a CSP during stable interaction; and increasing quantities of the at least two types of servers in the CSP according to the first stable ratio. By applying the present invention, a management server on a CSP increases the quantities of all types of servers at one time according to a stable ratio. This enables all types of servers to quickly reach a stable state, and improves overall processing capabilities of all types of servers, thereby further enhancing quality of service of an application deployed on the CSP. | 05-14-2015 |
20150134793 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERIC IP MULTIMEDIA RESIDENTIAL GATEWAYS - A common IP layer client device interface within an IP multimedia gateway (IMG) is configured to connect client devices to broadband IP networks such as the Internet based on determined device capabilities. Broadband IP network interfaces within the IMG are configured to enable communication between the IMG and broadband IP networks based on the determined device capabilities. Content provided by various service managers are communicated with the client devices utilizing the common IP layer client device interface and the configured network interfaces. Network capabilities may be determined during the device and network discovery. Protocol translation, media transcoding and/or dynamic device configuration may be performed based on the determined device capabilities, and based on the determined network capabilities. The IMG may adjust system timing and manage power consumptions for service deployment over corresponding client devices. Information may be routed or distributed by the IMRG among the client devices when needed. | 05-14-2015 |
20150142933 | SELF-CONFIGURING DYNAMIC CONTACT CENTER - A self-configuring dynamic contact center including a plurality of resources, each resource associated with a set of attributes, a plurality of dynamic switches connected to the resources, a dynamic controller connected to the dynamic switches and configured to control the operation of the dynamic switches, and a routing engine connected to the dynamic controller. The routing engine is configured to utilize the dynamic controller and dynamic switches to determine the states of network paths between the dynamic switches, and is further configured to determine which of the resources are suitable to handle a contact based on requirements of the contact and the attributes of the resources, to determine which of the suitable resources is an optimal resource based on the requirements of the contact and the states of the network paths, and to utilize the dynamic controller and the dynamic switches to route the contact to the optimal resource. | 05-21-2015 |
20150142934 | METHOD FOR MANAGING DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS USING CONFIGURATION TEMPLATES - Aspects of the subject disclosure may include, for example, identifying a configuration of a second end user device that includes device data and applications, generating a configuration template associated with the second end user device, providing a first end user device with access to the configuration template for enabling the first end user device to be configured, detecting an adjustment to the configuration of the second end user device, and transmitting a notification of a configuration change at the second end user device responsive to the detecting of the adjustment to enable the first end user device to be reconfigured according to the adjustment to the configuration of the second end user device. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-21-2015 |
20150142935 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OBSERVING AND CONTROLLING A PROGRAMMABLE NETWORK VIA HIGHER LAYER ATTRIBUTES - A system and method for observing and controlling a programmable network via higher layer attributes is disclosed. According to one embodiment, the system includes one or more collectors and a programmable network element. The one or more collectors are configured to receive network traffic data from a plurality of network elements in the network and extract metadata from the network traffic data. The programmable network element is programmed based on the metadata received from the plurality of network elements in the network. | 05-21-2015 |
20150142936 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OBSERVING AND CONTROLLING A PROGRAMMABLE NETWORK USING TIME VARYING DATA COLLECTION - A system and method for observing and controlling a programmable network via higher layer attributes is disclosed. According to one embodiment, the system includes a plurality of network elements, a programmable network element, and one or more collectors. The one or more collectors are configured to collects filtered network traffic data from the plurality of network elements based on a time-varying schedule. | 05-21-2015 |
20150295753 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - An information processing device in the present invention includes: an updating means for acquiring update information, updating data pre-stored in a storage unit, and acquiring difference information between the pre-update data and the post-update data; a communication state acquisition means for acquiring a communication state of each of a plurality of communication channels to communicate with another information processing device storing the pre-update data; a difference information splitting means for, based on the communication state of each of the plurality of communication channels acquired by the communication state acquisition means, splitting the difference information, which is acquired by the updating means, so as to be related with each of the communication channels; and a transmission means for transmitting pieces of the difference information split by the difference information splitting means to the another information processing device through the communication channels related with the pieces of the split difference information, respectively. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295766 | TRANSFORMATION OF NETWORK DATA AT REMOTE CAPTURE AGENTS - The disclosed embodiments provide a method and system for processing network data. During operation, the system obtains, at a remote capture agent, configuration information for the remote capture agent from a configuration server over a network. Next, the system uses the configuration information to configure the generation of event data from network data obtained from network packets at the remote capture agent. The system then uses the configuration information to configure transformation of the event data or the network data into transformed event data at the remote capture agent. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295767 | METHOD FOR REAL-TIME ACTIVATION OF RECEIVER MODULE - The present invention provides a method for real-time activation of receiver module associated or integrated with external display. The receiver device having processor and communication module for supporting streaming multimedia applications. The method comprising the steps of updating communication credentials in the receiver from the touch enabled device through direct local wireless communication network, said communication credentials support communication with external data communication network. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295768 | ROLE AND PROXIMITY-BASED MANAGEMENT OF NETWORKS - Various embodiments manage computing networks. In one embodiment, a set of network management data associated with one or more users is analyzed. The set of network management data includes at least electronic scheduling information associated with the one or more users. A concentration of users is predicted for a given location based on the analyzing. At least one network characteristic associated with the given location is performed based on at least the predicted concentration of users. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304165 | Session-based Device Configuration - Techniques for session-based device configuration are described. According to one or more implementations, various settings of a wireless device are configured to optimize device performance while participating in a communication session via a wireless network. The settings, for instance, are configured dynamically and on a per-session basis. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304167 | ACCELERATING DEVICE, CONNECTION AND SERVICE DISCOVERY - There are provided a system, a method and a computer program product for managing one or more network devices. The one or more network devices are connected indirectly or directly to one or more networks and communicate each other by exchanging one or more messages. A classifier intercepts the one or more messages associated with one or more network devices. The classifier classifies each of the intercepted messages into a layer. A discovery system receives the each classified message and detecting, based on the each received classified message, a new network device added to the one or more networks and detecting one or more configuration changes made on the one or more network devices. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304274 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING DHCP CLIENT - It is provided a method for configuring a DHCP client. The method comprises the steps of detecting state of the DHCP client; in response to transition to Bound state, storing network address and at least one of configuration parameters of the DHCP client, which is allocated by a DHCP server; and when the DHCP server is unreachable, in response to transition to Selecting state, restoring the network address and the at least one of configuration parameters without changing the Selecting state of the DHCP client. | 10-22-2015 |
20150312099 | NETWORK REVISION EVALUATOR - A process may include a step of receiving a request to perform a revision on plural network devices. The process may include a step of identifying at least a first group of the plural network devices according to a first predetermined criterion including at least a first feature with a same first predefined characteristic. The process may include a step of determining whether the requested revision can be successfully performed on network devices in the first group of the plural network devices. The process may include a step of storing on an electronic storage device a record of whether the requested revision can be successfully performed on the network devices in the first group of the plural network devices. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319041 | OVERSUBSCRIBING A PACKET PROCESSING DEVICE TO ADJUST POWER CONSUMPTION - Embodiments are directed to saving power consumption in packet processing devices. A method for controlling power consumption of a packet processing device includes determining a power-save link utilization based upon one or more power-save enabled links of the packet processing device, determining an aggregate minimum processing bandwidth for the packet processing device based at least upon the determined power-save link utilization, and adjusting a processing capacity of the packet processing device based upon the determined aggregate minimum processing bandwidth, wherein the power consumption is changed by the adjusting. System and computer program product embodiments are also disclosed. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326434 | METHOD FOR OPERATING SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO APPLICATION - Disclosed is a structure for operating a unified radio application for a software defined radio terminal. The structure for operating a unified radio application according to the present invention can be classified into two types depending on whether a configuration code (configcode) of the radio application is constituted by an executable code or implemented in an intermediate representation (IR) code. With the structure for operating a unified radio application according to the present invention, it is possible to develop and distribute a radio application capable of operating on all radio platforms. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326435 | PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM, PROGRAM MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - A server computer manages a setting program which is used for setting parameters. An operating PC conducts communication with a server computer and a device to which parameters have not been set. The server computer sends a setting program to the operating PC based on a request from the operating PC. The operating PC receives the setting program from the server computer, executes the received setting program, generates a parameter setting request message which includes a setting target parameter to be set to the device and requests setting of the setting target parameter, and sends the generated parameter setting request message to the device. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326436 | System and Method for Remote Asset Management - A remote asset management system comprising a network of programmable wireless modules, each having an antenna and an identification module and configured to communicate via a radio communication protocol. The system further includes a plurality of assets each linked to one of the wireless modules and configured to be managed by the linked wireless module. A remote system server service platform is configured to receive remote asset data from the wireless modules, pass the remote asset data to and from the wireless modules, send messages to at least one of the wireless modules, monitor the wireless modules by requesting and receiving current mode information, and remotely program the wireless modules. A data processing module located within the wireless module(s) and configured to process messages received by the wireless module, authenticate said message, analyze authenticated messages, and carry out asset management instructions included in the message. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326461 | NETWORK USAGE MONITORING AND ANALYTICS FOR DIFFERENTIATED DATA SERVICES - A system for discovery and analysis of network data usage of users of a communication network may collect information related to data usage over a network. The system may determine network data usage patterns for users from the data usage information. The network usage data, usage patterns and additional information may be analyzed to create user segments, and to analyze network data usage for the user segments. Differentiated data services may be created and implemented based on the network data usage for the user segments. | 11-12-2015 |
20150333960 | PHONE THERMAL CONTEXT - A method and a system a thermal context manager (hereinafter “TCM”) detects a thermal state and a position of a computing device. Based on the detected thermal state(s) and the detected position(s) of the computing device, the TCM initiates an action associated with the computing device. The TCM continually monitors the computing device in order to create a thermal state profile of the computing device. To create the thermal state profile, the TCM stores data representing each detected instance of the thermal state of the computing device and data representing each detected position of the computing device. | 11-19-2015 |
20150333962 | State-Based Provisioning of a Client Having a Windows-Based Embedded Image - Examples of methods and apparatus are provided for state-based provisioning of a local client having a windows-based embedded image. The apparatus may include a retrieval module of the local client that facilitates locating a remote repository server containing a configuration file and that facilitates obtaining the configuration file from the remote repository server. The apparatus may include a reset check module of the local client that determines whether to reset a previous state of the image based on the configuration file. The apparatus may include an apply settings module of the local client that applies, to the image, one of a first configuration change and a second configuration change based on the determination. The first configuration change may include a configuration update to the previous state of the image. The second configuration change may include a change to the image independent of the previous state of the image. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341206 | NETWORK ENTITY OF A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments relate to a concept for a communication network, the communication network comprising a plurality of network entities. It is provided, from an event subscribing network entity ( | 11-26-2015 |
20150341211 | PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATIONS FOR WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS - In an example, a performance of an access point in a wireless network is optimized based on a statistical ranking of independent variables. A device analyzer may calculate a dependent variable for the performance of the access point and independent variables that impact the dependent variable from a set of independent variables based on real-time access point data received from a plurality of access points. A predictive modeler may generate a model to forecast the performance of the access point and to determine an impact ranking for the independent variables from the dependent and independent variables. The impact ranking may sequence the independent variables according to their impact on the dependent variable. Accordingly, a configuration circuit may adjust a controllable parameter of the access points according to the impact ranking. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341213 | Method, system and server for service switching - Disclosed are a service switching method, system and server, and the method includes: service switching is implemented when a server determines that a service switching strategy is met according to switching information required for the service switching stored in the server or pooled in and reported by a service switching request. The system includes a server configured to implement service switching when determining that a service switching strategy is met according to switching information required for the service switching stored in the server or pooled in and reported by a service switching request. By means of the disclosure, the necessary switching information required for the service switching can be passed by a determined target terminal. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341214 | CONFIGURATION COMMAND TEMPLATE CREATION ASSISTANT USING CROSS-MODEL ANALYSIS TO IDENTIFY COMMON SYNTAX AND SEMANTICS - In one embodiment, a method for creating a configuration template for a set of devices includes determining command information for a plurality of devices, identifying a command structure from the command information which is common to a set of devices from the plurality of devices, and associating the set of devices to a common configuration template. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341216 | AUTOMATIC AND SECURE ACTIVATION OF A UNIVERSAL PLUG AND PLAY DEVICE MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A device may receive a first device identifier associated with a first device management (DM) device associated with a local area network. The device may identify a second DM device, associated with the local area network, based on receiving the first device identifier. The device may provide the first device identifier to the second DM device. The first device identifier may be provided to the second DM device to allow the first DM device to be managed by the second DM device via the local area network. The device may determine a second device identifier associated with the second DM device. The device may provide the second device identifier to the first DM device. The second device identifier may be provided to the first DM device to allow the second DM device to manage the first DM device via the local area network. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341217 | METHOD FOR THE AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION OF PORTABLE TERMINALS - A method for the automatic configuration of portable terminals, comprises the steps of detecting the geographical position of at least two portable terminals (T | 11-26-2015 |
20150350008 | NETWORK ADDRESSABLE APPLIANCE INTERFACE DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to an interface device to control an appliance through a network. The interface device can be device-agnostic and can be incorporated into any suitable appliance. Upon initialization, the interface device can determine the capabilities of the attached appliance and send out update information that can be received by a controller. The controller can send commands designated to control the appliance, which are received by the interface device and translated into appropriate commands that are transmitted to the appliance. The interface device can turn the appliance into a network device, such as a home automation network device. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350015 | AUTOMATING MONITORING USING CONFIGURATION EVENT TRIGGERS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for automating monitoring using configuration event triggers in a network environment is provided and includes receiving a change request for a configuration change, creating a change impact monitor according to a profile associated with the configuration change, taking a first snapshot of performance indicators when the configuration change is applied, taking a second snapshot of the performance indicators a predetermined duration after applying the configuration change, and generating a change impact notification describing the first snapshot and the second snapshot. The profile can specify the performance indicators for the configuration change. A change agent that creates the change impact monitor may also be invoked. In some embodiments, the method can further include receiving a soak command, and taking a third snapshot of the performance indicators before applying the configuration change. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350019 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT METHOD AND RESOURCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - In a cloud environment where multiple applications having different performance characteristics are operated in a mixture, in order to specify the cause of performance deterioration and to solve the confliction of requests related to a shared resource, the present invention detects the performance deterioration of resources allocated to multiple instances constituting a logical server configuration, and extracts an instance sharing resources existing performance deterioration, and compares a performance tendency of the extracted instance and a performance pattern showing a characteristics extracted from a performance information of the resource in association with a bottleneck factor, to thereby estimate the bottleneck factor by calculating mutual similarities and determining a performance pattern where the calculated similarity becomes maximum. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350020 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOTE MODIFICATION OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus for updating the system configuration settings of a computer system. Embodiments include a remote system configuration system that enables a user to update the system configuration of a target machine from a server machine over a network or similar communications system. Another embodiment includes a system configuration method using a bus master device to write system configuration data into a target computer system. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358198 | Dynamic Scheduling of Network Updates - The techniques and/or systems described herein are configured to determine a set of update operations to transition a network from an observed network state to a target network state and to generate an update dependency graph used to dynamically schedule the set of update operations based on constraint(s) defined to ensure reliability of the network during the transition. The techniques and/or systems dynamically schedule the set of update operations based on feedback. For example, the feedback may include an indication that a previously scheduled update operation has been delayed, has failed, or has been successfully completed. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358209 | NETWORK-STATE MANAGEMENT SERVICE - The techniques and/or systems described herein implement a network management service configured to read and write a state of a network for various applications (e.g., network management applications) so that the applications can operate independently. The network management service is configured to read an observed network state and provide the observed network state to the applications. Subsequently, the network management service receives proposed network states from the applications and uses a state dependency graph to determine whether state conflicts exist between the proposed network states. The network management service also determined whether defined policies are violated by the proposed network states. Finally, the network management service is configured to generate a target network state by merging non-conflicting proposed network states that comply with defined policies and to update (e.g., write) the network state based on the generated target network state. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365274 | LIVE PARTITION MOBILITY WITH SHARED PERSISTENT RESERVATIONS - According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method is provided. The method may include a computer registering a first instance of a logical partition on a source server with a logical unit and placing a first persistent reservation on the logical unit, wherein the first persistent reservation indicates that only the first instance of the logical partition can hold a reservation on the logical unit. The method may further include the computer registering a second instance of the logical partition on a destination server with the logical unit and downgrading the first persistent reservation, such that the first and second instances of the logical partition can hold persistent reservations on the logical unit. The method may further include the computer placing, by one or more computer processors, a second persistent reservation on the logical unit. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365282 | TEMPLATE BUILDER FOR END-TO-END PROVISIONING AND LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT OF IT INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES - A system for creating or modifying a template is disclosed that includes a plurality of application controls configured to allow a user to modify one or more application parameters for an application associated with each application control. A plurality of virtual machine controls are configured to allow a user to modify one or virtual machine parameters for a virtual machine associated with each virtual machine control and to allow a user to associate each virtual machine control with one or more application control. The application controls are configured to allow a user to associate each application control with one or more virtual machine control. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365292 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REROUTING SERVICES USING ROUTING POLICIES IN A MULTIPLE RESOURCE NODE SYSTEM - A method, system and computer program product for configuring active resource nodes in a distributed computing system controlled by an administrative control module. The method includes identifying a first configuration of active resource nodes having at least two or more active resource nodes and detecting a modification of a link representing at least one connection between the active resource nodes. In response to detecting the modification of the link, a routing policy table is retrieved and a second configuration of the active resource nodes are identified from the routing policy table including at least one new connection between the two or more active resource nodes. The distributed computing system is triggered to configure the two or more active resource nodes according to the second configuration and to establish the at least one new connection between the two or more active resource nodes. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365293 | ENFORCING POLICIES BASED ON INFORMATION RECEIVED FROM EXTERNAL SYSTEMS - A system for enforcing policies is described. The system can receive information about one or more computing devices from each of a mobile device management (MDM) system and a machine-to-machine (M2M) system. Each of the MDM system and the M2M system can receive information from or be in communication with the one or more computing devices. Based on the information received, the system can identify a policy from a set of policies, and transmit a request to either or both of the MDM system or M2M system to perform an action based on the identified policy. | 12-17-2015 |
20150372863 | HIERARCHICAL RESALE SYSTEM FOR TELECOMMUNICATION PRODUCTS - Systems and methods for a hierarchical resale system for telecommunications services are described. In an embodiment, a computerized method for remote configuration of telecommunication equipment may include generating, using a data processing device, configuration information for the telecommunication equipment; and communicating, using a network interface device, the configuration information to a server on a network that is local to the telecommunication equipment; wherein the telecommunication equipment receives the configuration information from the server. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372865 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTONOMOUS DYNAMIC PROVISIONING - An industrial automation gateway for autonomous dynamic provisioning is provided. The industrial automation gateway includes a cloud communication interface coupled with, and configured for communication with, a cloud automation facility, and a processor coupled with the cloud communication interface. The processor is configured to determine a current configuration of the industrial automation gateway, and request a configuration update from the cloud automation facility through the cloud communication interface. The processor is also configured to receive the configuration update from the cloud automation facility through the cloud communication interface, and implement the configuration update within the industrial automation gateway. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372867 | CLUSTER RECONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - Assigning a set of port names to storage access paths of virtual machines accessing storage resources via storage area networks is provided. A first computing system cluster that is associated with a set of computing system identifiers is created. A first computing system identifier associated with a first computing system is added to the set of computing system identifiers. The first computing system is disassociated from the first computing system identifier. The first computing system is added to the first computing system cluster. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381409 | Self-Learning Automated Remediation of Changes that Cause Performance Degradation of Applications - Techniques are disclosed for automatic remediation of application performance degradations caused by configuration changes. In one embodiment, a learning module keeps track of application configuration changes and subsequent effects on the application's performance. The learning module creates new potential remediation rules based on correlations between such configuration changes and performance degradations or improvements. The learning module affirms such potential rules if the correlation between the configuration changes and degradations or improvements are repeatedly observed, and vice versa. When subsequent performance degradations are observed, a rule engine, which maintains a set of remediation rules, evaluates the rules to identify configuration changes relevant to the observed performance degradation and determines whether the probability that the configuration changes caused the degradation are greater than a threshold for invoking a remediation action, such as rolling back the configuration changes. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381418 | Remote Orchestration of Virtual Machine Updates - Virtual machines can be remotely configured on distributed host devices by communicating management instructions over remote access tunnels. The management instructions prompt virtual remote agents on instantiated on the distributed host devices to configure virtual machines on the distributed host devices. The management instruction may prompt the virtual remote agents to instantiate a new virtual machine, to re-configure an existing virtual machine, or to create, remove, and/or modify virtual paths between two or more virtual machines on the distributed host device. Management signaling can be broadcast over multiple management tunnels to coordinate the configuration of multiple virtual machines at different distributed host devices based on a single virtual machine installation instance in an MSP server. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381427 | NETWORK GATEWAY CONFIGURATION - Methods, systems, and computer program products for configuring wireless local area network gateways to provide visitors with network access, are provided. A nearby client device of a user is provided a first level of access through the wireless local area network gateway to access a cloud-based service provider in a remote network. A determination is made whether a source Internet Protocol (IP) address associated with a request for authentication received from the nearby client device is matched to a public IP address of the wireless local area network gateway. If a match is determined, a configuration setting associated with the nearby client device of the user is received from the cloud-based service provider and the wireless local area network is reconfigured to provide a second level of access to the nearby client device of the user. Corresponding system and computer readable mediums are also provided. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381711 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SCALE APPLICATION DEPLOYMENTS IN CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENTS - Methods, apparatus, systems and articles of manufacture are disclosed to scale application deployments in cloud computing environments. An example method disclosed herein includes marking a scaling status of a virtual machine included in a first node deployed in the computing environment, the first node executing a first component of the application, the scaling status of the virtual machine indicating a change in a number of virtual machines included in the first node. The example method also includes identifying a second node including a dependency with the virtual machine, the second node deployed in the computing environment. The example method also includes updating configuration information associated with the second node based on the scaling status of the virtual machine, the configuration information including a reference to the virtual machine. | 12-31-2015 |
20160013978 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND LOGIC FOR CONFIGURING A LOCAL LINK BASED ON A REMOTE LINK PARTNER | 01-14-2016 |
20160013979 | Modifying Marine Electronics Settings | 01-14-2016 |
20160013980 | Private Content Distribution Network | 01-14-2016 |
20160020944 | Reconfigurable Device For Processing Signals - Methods and systems for processing signals and data are disclosed. An example method can comprise receiving a first portion of a first signal. An example method can comprise processing the first portion of the first signal based on a module. The module can comprise instructions for physical layer processing. An example method can comprise receiving an update for the module. The update can be configured to modify the instructions for physical layer processing. The module can be reconfigured based on the update. An example method can comprise processing at least one of a second portion of the first signal and a second signal based on the module reconfigured based on the update. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020949 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE PARTITION EDIT SESSIONS IN A MULTITENANT APPLICATION SERVER ENVIRONMENT - In accordance with an embodiment, described herein is a system and method for supporting multiple partitions and edit sessions in a multitenant application server environment. In accordance with an embodiment, a first administrator or user can obtain a named edit session for use with a partition, make changes, and then activate those changes. Another administrator or user can create a named edit session in parallel. If there are conflicts between a concurrent change and changes being made by another user, the administrator will receive an error when activating the changes. At that point, the administrator can resolve the conflicts and activate the changes. Upon activation, the changes in the edit session will be applied to a global edit configuration. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020950 | MANAGING TECHNOLOGY RESOURCES ACROSS MULTIPLE PLATFORMS - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for managing technology resources across multiple platforms. Embodiments of the invention can be used to manage the configuration of a plurality of different devices. A management server/service can utilize native management capabilities of different devices to provide configuration management without requiring agents to be installed on the devices. In general, the management server/service adapts to the unique characteristics and behaviors of different devices, platforms, and external systems to provide configuration management for the different devices, platforms, and external systems. As such, configuration management can be provided in a unified fashion across different platforms, both on-premise and off-premise, and indirectly. When client agents are present, the management server/service can adjust to compatibly operate with the client agents. | 01-21-2016 |
20160020951 | MANAGING TARGET COMPUTER USING ENCAPSULATED FILE - An encapsulated file is accessed at a management computer. The encapsulated file contains plural files and a deployment descriptor. The deployment descriptor is used to update the management computer about the plural files. A function is execute using at least one of the plural files. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021212 | METHOD, SERVER AND CLIENT DEVICE FOR UPDATING SERVICE REGISTRATION - A method, server and client device for updating service registration are provided. The method includes: receiving a first service registration updating request from a client device; acquiring services registered by a first contact identification of the client device; and updating registration information of service using a second contact identification of the client device. The present disclosure may ensure users to easily update registered services after replacing contact identification, thus improving user experience. | 01-21-2016 |
20160036629 | CONTROL DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND CONTROL METHOD - A control device includes: a controller configured to control an information processor including a plurality of processing devices, wherein, the controller, based on a program, performs operations to: receive a plurality of processes to be executed by the plurality of processing devices; and select, based on processing information pertaining to the plurality of processes, a second process capable of being executed by a second processing device among the plurality of processing devices during an adjustment time in accordance with an execution of a first process to be executed by a first processing device among the plurality of processing devices, the first process being different from the second process. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036631 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus synchronizes setting information between a plurality of devices and performs control to cancel, in a case where, if setting information that a device uses is changed, a plurality of pieces of setting information that another device uses becomes mismatched with one another, the setting information from being changed. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036633 | RELAY CONFIGURATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Disclosed herein are a variety of systems and methods that may be utilized to facilitate the configuration of intelligent electronic devices (IED) and other devices. In one embodiment, a configurable IED may be able to perform a plurality of features. The plurality of features may be enabled by a plurality of functional modules configured to implement the plurality of features. A feature-selecting subsystem configured to receive a first feature-selecting filter and to apply the first feature-selecting filter to selectively enable a subset of a plurality of features based on the feature-selecting filter. The subset of the plurality of features may be associated with a plurality of feature configuration settings. A feature configuration subsystem configured to receive at least one configuration filter and to set at least a subset of the plurality of feature configuration settings. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036634 | ZERO TOUCH CONFIGURATION SUPPORT FOR UNNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS MODEM ON A NETWORK DEVICE - The present disclosure discloses a method and a network device for zero touch configuration support for universal serial bus (USB) modem on a network device. Specifically, an access point determines an identifier of a network device connected to the access point, and location information corresponding to the access point. Based at least on the identifier of the network device and the location information corresponding to the access point, the access point selects a particular configuration, of a plurality of configurations, for the network device. Specifically, the particular configuration selected for the network device is suitable for a geographical location associated with the location information. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036665 | DATA VERIFICATION BASED UPGRADES IN TIME SERIES SYSTEM - A time series system is updated using a data-verification system. The aggregation system may include one or more aggregators. When an upgrade is appropriate, a shadow aggregator may be added to the set of active aggregators. Metrics are provided from one or more collectors to an active aggregator. The shadow aggregator may receive the metrics intended for a particular aggregator, process the metric, and then pass the metric to the intended aggregator for processing. After a period of time, the shadow aggregator data is verified against the intended aggregator data. If the shadow aggregator data is verified, the shadow aggregator becomes an active aggregator and processes data as normal. | 02-04-2016 |
20160043898 | LINKED LIST SCRIPTING ENGINE - A system and a method are creating a linked list scripts for a networking device. The system receives a set of nodes defining script functionality and generates a script by coupling the nodes in a nodal structure based on desired order of execution, wherein a leaf node is an standalone node with no child node, and wherein a nugget node includes one or more child nodes, each child node being a nugget or leaf node. The system then determines an execution path through a subset of nodes in the nodal tree structure based on one or more input values. The system also compiles the subset of nodes into a linked list of operations, which follows the execution path, and executes the path of operations within the compiled linked list of operations. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044136 | VIRTUAL GATEWAY - Systems, software, and methods are provided to create a virtual appliance that serves the purpose of connecting devices that are placed directly onto the Internet without the use of a hardware gateway. Code can be embedded into the device, which allows it to communicate to the cloud services and connect to its authorized virtual gateway, thereby eliminating the need for an intermediate hardware gateway. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050113 | METHODS FOR MANAGING STORAGE VIRTUAL MACHINE CONFIGURATION CHANGES IN A DISTRIBUTED STORAGE SYSTEM AND DEVICES THEREOF - A method, non-transitory computer readable medium and storage controller computing device that receives a configuration change request for a storage virtual machine, the configuration change request including a configuration change operation. A determination is made when configuration settings for the storage virtual machine are locked. The configuration change operation is applied to the configuration settings for the storage virtual machine when the determining indicates the configuration settings for the storage virtual machine are not locked. A failure message is sent in response to the configuration change request when the configuration settings for the storage virtual machine are determined to be locked. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050115 | NETWORKING COMPONENT MANAGEMENT IN HOST COMPUTING SYSTEMS IN A VIRTUAL COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Techniques for managing networking components in a host computing system in a virtual computing environment are described. The networking components include virtual switches and physical network interface cards (NICs). In one embodiment, a virtual switch that is not coupled to any running virtual machines in a host computing system is identified. Further, physical NICs associated with the virtual switch are identified. Furthermore, the virtual switch and the physical NICs associated with the virtual switch are placed into a standby mode. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050116 | NETWORK DEVICE CONFIGURATION FRAMEWORK - Various embodiments of methods and systems for network infrastructure configuration based on network device configuration templates are provided. A network device configuration template is received where the network device configuration template corresponds to network device configuration data based on template elements. Template elements include variable placeholders, versions, Stock Keeping Units (SKUs), firmware, and target devices identified in the network device configuration template. Values for the template elements are referenced from a dataset storage component. The network device configuration data are classified into different classification units. The network device configuration data are merged with the network device configuration template that programmatically defines configuration of network devices. A network device configuration instance is generated based on evaluating the template elements and replacing template elements with values from the dataset storage. The network device can be associated with a configuration scope, where the configuration scope indicates intended configuration features of the network devices. | 02-18-2016 |
20160057000 | DISTRIBUTED CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A configuration management system includes a configuration management application for receiving configuration management information from a user device. The configuration management information including data associated with one or more parameters of the user device to be configured in the user device. The application further, for each parameter, accesses a parameter value associated with the parameter from at least one device configuration file stored in server, and transmits the accessed parameter values to the user device, wherein the parameters of the user device are configured using the parameter values received from the application. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057001 | UPDATE OF PROGRAMMABLE FOR COMPUTING NODES - For computing nodes having a first programmable and comprising a first node and a second node, an update of the first node from the first programmable to a second programmable across an external network is initiated. In response to the update being interrupted, the first programmable is automatically reinstated on the first node by retrieving the first programmable from the second node across an internal network. The second node is automatically updated to the second programmable by retrieving the second programmable from the first node across the internal network in response to completion of the update of the first node to the second programmable. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057009 | CONFIGURATION OF PEERED CLUSTER STORAGE ENVIRONMENT ORGANIZED AS DISASTER RECOVERY GROUP - A technique efficiently configures a peered cluster storage environment. The configuration technique illustratively includes three phases: a discovery phase, a node setup phase and a cluster setup phase. The discovery phase may be employed to initiate discovery of nodes of a disaster recovery (DR) group through transmission of multicast advertisement packets by the nodes over interconnects, including a Fibre Channel (FC) fabric, to each other node of the group. In the node setup phase, each node of a cluster assigns its relationships to the nodes discovered and present in the FC fabric; illustratively, the assigned relationships include high availability (HA) partner, DR primary partner and DR auxiliary partner. In the cluster setup phase, the discovered nodes of the FC fabric are organized as the peered cluster storage environment (DR group) configured to service data in a highly reliable and available manner. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057011 | MULTIMEDIA NETWORK SYSTEM WITH CONTENT IMPORTATION, CONTENT EXPORTATION, AND INTEGRATED CONTENT MANAGEMENT - This system provides wired and/or wireless access throughout a multimedia network built on a distributed architecture which can be transparent to the user. This multimedia network includes content which is imported or generated within the network. The system allows for the content provider to determine the license status of content and update the license status of content which was previously provided by that provider. The external content can be accessed in real time or downloaded and stored within the system for later access at the convenience of the user. The usage of some content is controlled by the use of encryption and other protection methods. The system allows for storage of live video by storing the digitized video and allowing the user to control how, when and where the content is viewed. The system makes available multiple multimedia services to all users in the network or connected via the internet. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057197 | REMOTE ACCESS TO A NODE - Systems and methods for providing registration at a remote site that may include, for example, a monitoring module that may communicate with a remote site. A registration protocol may be used by the monitoring module and the remote site in generating the messages communicated during the registration process. The monitoring module may gather and generate various identification information to be included in the registration protocol messages. The registration information provided by the monitoring module maybe stored at the remote site in a database server having a database. A confirmation message may be communicated from the remote site to the monitoring module that may either acknowledge successful registration or report that an error occurred during the registration process. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057198 | FUNCTIONALITY INOPERABLE UNLESS NODE REGISTERED AT REMOTE SITE - Systems and methods for providing registration at a remote site that may include, for example, a monitoring module that may communicate with a remote site. A registration protocol may be used by the monitoring module and the remote site in generating the messages communicated during the registration process. The monitoring module may gather and generate various identification information to be included in the registration protocol messages. The registration information provided by the monitoring module may be stored at the remote site in a database server having a database. A confirmation message may be communicated from the remote site to the monitoring module that may either acknowledge successful registration or report that an error occurred during the registration process. | 02-25-2016 |
20160065410 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PEER DEVICE DIAGNOSIS - A method is provided to enable a target device to be conformed with a reference device. After a peer-to-peer network connection is established between the target device and the reference device, profiles are taken of the target device and the reference device using diagnostic applications on the devices. The parameter values of the profiles are compared to establish a delta. Using this delta, at least one parameter value of the reference device profile is transmitted to the target device. That parameter value is automatically reset or adjusted to match or approximate the reference device profile. A method is also provided for using a first device to mediate the diagnosis and fixing of a second device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065452 | PROTECTION AGAINST RULE MAP UPDATE ATTACKS - Technologies are described herein to manage the replacement of routing rules. Some example technologies may receive a request to replace one or more active rules in a routing device with one or more stored rules. Each of the active rules and the stored rules may specify a routing rule that specifies how to route packets within a network. The active rules may be routing rules that are actively being used by the routing device. The stored rules may be routing rules that are not currently in use by the routing device. A determination may be made as to whether a number of active rule replacements for the routing device exceeds a threshold. In response to determining that the number of the active rule replacements exceeds the threshold, the request to replace the one or more active rules in the routing device may be denied. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065533 | Cross registrar compliance and communication mechanism - What is described is a system and method providing an improved customer experience for the registrant. The registrant is able to use a single interface and a single set of user inputs to bring about changes for multiple domain names. The single interaction with the single interface works out just as well and just as conveniently regardless of whether a single registrar happens to be handling all of the domain names, or whether each domain name is handled by a different registrar. | 03-03-2016 |
20160072674 | AUTOMATIC DEVICE CONFIGURATION - Various systems and methods for automatic device configuration are described herein. A system for automatic device configuration comprises a performance monitor module to monitor, at a computing device, performance of the computing device during a period while the computing device communicates on a network using a current network interface of the computing device, a policy enforcement module to compare the performance of the computing device during the period with a performance policy installed on the computing device, and determine that the performance violates a threshold, the threshold provided in the performance policy. The system also includes a network configuration module to reconfigure a network configuration in response to the determining that the performance violates the threshold by disabling the current network interface and enabling a replacement network interface from a plurality of network interfaces available on the computing device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160072676 | SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE FOR CLOUD-PLATFORM INFRASTRUCTURE LAYOUTS - A system maintains, generates, and manages infrastructure layouts. The infrastructure layouts interconnect infrastructure components and capture relational aspects between the components within the interconnections. The infrastructure layouts map northbound services, which are service outputs, to southbound services, which are service capabilities, for fulfilment. The system may traverse a mapping from a northbound service to a fulfilling southbound service to generate a workflow to support deployment of the northbound service. In various implementations, the system may compare a path, which maps a northbound service to a southbound service, to a policy model to determine compliance with the policy. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080201 | NETWORK OFFERING IN CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - A cloud system may create and support multiple network offerings for virtual machines in a cloud zone. Physical networks comprising sets of network elements, such as routers, gateways, firewalls, load balancers, and other network hardware, may be created and updated within a zone. Network offerings may be defined and associated, using tags or other techniques, with virtual machine networks, physical networks and/or network elements. Cloud end users may request specific network offerings when creating virtual machines, or may request to move existing virtual machines from one network offering to another. The cloud system may use the requested network offering to identify the virtual machine network, physical network, and/or network elements corresponding to the requested network offering. The cloud system may allocate a new virtual machine network and configure the network elements within the associated physical network to provide network services to the virtual machine. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080203 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXTENDING CLOUD SERVICES INTO THE CUSTOMER PREMISE - A cloud extension agent can be provided on a customer premise for interfacing, via an outbound secure connection, cloud based services. The cloud extension agent can reach the cloud based services through existing firewall infrastructure, thereby providing simple, secure deployment. Furthermore, the secure connection can enable substantially real-time communication with a cloud service to provide web-based, substantially real time control or management of resources on the customer premises via the cloud extension agent. | 03-17-2016 |
20160087833 | SERVER CLUSTERING IN MOBILE COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - A clustered server system and a method for maintaining a server cluster involve a plurality of servers that collectively form a server cluster. A master database stores configuration information concerning the server cluster. Each server stores a local copy of the configuration information in a file system. The servers automatically update their respective file system using a database copy of the configuration information if the configuration information changes in the database. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087840 | USING VIRTUAL NETWORKING DEVICES TO MANAGE NETWORK CONFIGURATION - Techniques are described for providing managed virtual computer networks that may have a configured logical network topology with one or more virtual networking devices, with corresponding networking functionality provided for communications between multiple computing nodes of the virtual computer network by emulating functionality that would be provided by the networking devices if they were physically present. In some situations, the emulating of networking device functionality includes receiving routing communications directed to the networking devices and using included routing information to update the configured network topology for the managed computer network. In addition, the techniques may further include supporting interactions with devices that are external to the virtual computer network, including remote physical networking devices that are part of a remote computer network configured to interoperate with the virtual computer network, and/or specialized network devices that are accessible via a substrate network on which the virtual computer network is overlaid. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087841 | BIFURCATED CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT PLANES FOR FIBER CHANNEL NETWORKS - Techniques are provided for bifurcating database information that might otherwise be replicated on each switch in a switched fabric of a Storage Area Network (SAN). The database is divided into a control plane database that comprises mostly switch specific data and a central management database that comprises user device configurations and device profiles. The control plane database includes information such as name server and zone server information, for those devices that may locally log into the switched fabric via a given switch, and those remote devices that are zoned with those local devices and that may log into the switched fabric via another switch. The central management database includes global information for the switched fabric and device profile information (e.g., login interface, Virtual SAN membership, device aliasing, etc.) for devices that have access to the switched fabric and that can also be requested by the various switches in the switched fabric. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087849 | PLANNING AND RECONFIGURING A MULTILAYER NETWORK - A device may receive information that identifies an initial network topology, to be used to reconfigure a network. The initial network topology may describe an optical layer and an internet protocol layer of the network. The internet protocol layer of the network may include an internet protocol node. The device may determine a reconfiguration criterion associated with the initial network topology. The device may determine a reconfiguration technique to be used to reconfigure the network. The device may perform the reconfiguration technique. The device may generate a reconfigured network topology based on performing the reconfiguration technique. The reconfigured network topology may describe a reconfigured internet protocol layer and a reconfigured optical layer. The reconfigured internet protocol layer may be reconfigured based on the optical layer. The reconfigured network topology may be reconfigured based on the initial network topology. The device may provide the reconfigured network topology. | 03-24-2016 |
20160094383 | Methods and Apparatus to Track Changes to a Network Topology - Methods and apparatus to track network changes are disclosed herein. An example method to track a network topology includes, in response to a reporting message including topology change information corresponding to a topology change event, generating a confirmation-seeking message based on the topology change information to confirm the topology change event and updating a topology data set representing the network topology based on a response to the confirmation-seeking message. Further disclosed methods include generating a pre-confirmation data record that reflects the topology change information contained in the reporting message, and storing the pre-confirmation data record in a pre-confirmation topology database. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094384 | Controller Driven Reconfiguration of a Multi-Layered Application or Service Model - Some embodiments provide novel inline switches that distribute data messages from source compute nodes (SCNs) to different groups of destination service compute nodes (DSCNs). In some embodiments, the inline switches are deployed in the source compute nodes datapaths (e.g., egress datapath). The inline switches in some embodiments are service switches that (1) receive data messages from the SCNs, (2) identify service nodes in a service-node cluster for processing the data messages based on service policies that the switches implement, and (3) use tunnels to send the received data messages to their identified service nodes. Alternatively, or conjunctively, the inline service switches of some embodiments (1) identify service-nodes cluster for processing the data messages based on service policies that the switches implement, and (2) use tunnels to send the received data messages to the identified service-node clusters. The service-node clusters can perform the same service or can perform different services in some embodiments. This tunnel-based approach for distributing data messages to service nodes/clusters is advantageous for seamlessly implementing in a datacenter a cloud-based XaaS model (where XaaS stands for X as a service, and X stands for anything), in which any number of services are provided by service providers in the cloud. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094385 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION IN A MULTITENANT APPLICATION SERVER ENVIRONMENT - In accordance with an embodiment, described herein is a system and method for supporting dynamic security configuration in a multitenant application server environment. Common configuration changes required for partition level security can be made without requiring a server restart, such as for example, adding a new security realm for a partition; deleting an existing realm; changing the configuration on an existing realm; adding or removing a security provider to a realm; or changing the configuration of a security provider. In accordance with an embodiment, also described herein is a system and method for supporting dynamic reconfiguration in a multitenant application server environment. Attributes of partition management components, for example managed beans (MBeans) and child MBeans contained within a partition, can be made dynamic and annotated accordingly, so that a restart of servers is not required for configuration changes to those attributes for a particular partition. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094390 | DYNAMIC DATA ACCESS CONFIGURATION - One or more techniques and/or systems are provided for dynamic data access configuration. For example, a mapping may be maintained for compute nodes of a distributed processing system. The mapping may comprise access permission assignments of at least some compute nodes to shared data segments (e.g., read access and/or write access permissions). The mapping may be updated based upon configuration changes for the distributed processing system (e.g., addition of a new compute node, failure of a compute node, granting or removal of access to a shared data segment for an existing compute node, etc.). The updated mapping may be applied to the distributed processing system during operation of the distributed processing system (e.g., access may be granted to original instances of shared data segments based upon the configuration change; compute nodes and/or the distributed processing system may be kept online and operational while applying the configuration change; etc.). | 03-31-2016 |
20160094391 | AUTOMATED COMPUTING SYSTEM PERSONALIZATION - The personalization of the functionality of a computing system. In response to identifying the user to personalize its functionality to, the computing system self-personalizes by automatically requesting personalization information for the identified user from a remote personalization engine. The resulting received personalized information is then applied to the computing system to at least partially personalize the functionality of the computing system to the identified user. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094392 | Evaluating Configuration Changes Based on Aggregate Activity Level - Disclosed are various embodiments for computing and using an aggregate activity level for a computing system. Activity level metrics are obtained from a corresponding plurality of components in a data center. A current aggregate activity level request is received. An aggregate activity level is computed from the activity level metrics. The aggregate activity level is compared to a baseline aggregate activity level. In response to the request, an indication is provided as to whether the aggregate activity level falls within a predefined range of the baseline aggregate activity level. | 03-31-2016 |
20160098281 | COMPARING AND PROVISIONING CONFIGURATIONS FOR A CLIENT HAVING A WINDOWS-BASED EMBEDDED IMAGE - Examples of methods and apparatus are provided for comparing and provisioning configurations for a local client having a windows-based embedded image. The apparatus may include a retrieval module of the local client configured to facilitate locating a remote repository server containing a new configuration file, to facilitate obtaining the new configuration file from the remote repository server, and to facilitate obtaining a previous configuration file associated with a previous configuration change successfully applied to the embedded image. The apparatus may include a configuration comparison module of the local client configured to compare the new configuration file with the previous configuration file. The apparatus may include an apply settings module of the local client configured to apply, to the embedded image, one of a new configuration change and the previous configuration change based on the comparison. The new configuration change may be based on the new configuration file. | 04-07-2016 |
20160099832 | RELATIVE LOCATION DETERMINATION FOR AUTO-CONFIGURATION OF COMPUTING SYSTEMS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Embodiments of the invention provide for a method, device and computer program product for auto-configuring computing devices disposed in a network environment based upon a relative location of each of the computing devices. The method includes broadcasting into an electromagnetic near field from at least two surface positions of a computing device an identification and position of a corresponding one of the surface positions. The method further includes receiving in a receiver disposed on at least one of the surface positions, an identification of another computing device, and a corresponding position from which the identification had been broadcast. The method yet further includes repeating the broadcasting and receiving in other computing devices and determining in each of the other computing devices a position relative to another of the devices. Finally, the method includes establishing a device configuration in each of the computing devices based upon a correspondingly determined relative position. | 04-07-2016 |
20160099833 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus which has received an instruction to perform communication determines whether a server supports multi-connection communication. When the information processing apparatus determines that the server does not support multi-connection communication, the information processing apparatus performs communication by using one connection instead of using multi-connection communication. | 04-07-2016 |
20160099837 | Method and System For Remote Device Management - A system for remote device management includes in a network an auto-configuration server managing device, at least one database, and a plurality of auto-configuration servers. The auto-configuration server managing device and the database are coupled in a communicative connection. The database holds information for identification of electronic devices. The auto-configuration server managing device is arranged for communication with a manageable electronic device over the network. The auto-configuration server manager is further being arranged for:
| 04-07-2016 |
20160099913 | Internet Protocol (IP) Address Virtualization for Terminal Server Sessions - Techniques are disclosed for virtualizing internet protocol (IP) addresses in terminal server sessions. Techniques include receiving requests for a virtual IP address from a client component, determining whether the requestor can use the virtual IP address, and either returning a requested virtual IP address or returning an indication that the requestor cannot use a virtual IP address. Methods for determining whether a virtual IP address can be used and methods for choosing a virtual IP address are disclosed. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105308 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR ADAPTIVE DATA TRANSPORT AND OPTIMIZATION OF APPLICATION EXECUTION - Elements and processes used to enable the generation and interaction with complex networks, simulations, models, or environments. In some embodiments, this is accomplished by use of a client-server architecture that implements processes to improve data transport efficiency (and hence network usage), reduce latency experienced by users, and optimize the performance of the network, simulation, model or environment with respect to multiple parameters. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105317 | NON-INTRUSIVE DEVICE DISCOVERY AND CONFIGURATION CLONING - Infrastructure management device(s) may discover IT device(s) communicatively connected over a network. IT device information may be determined for at least one of the IT device(s). Configuration rule(s) compatible with IT device information may be matched to IT device(s). Action(s) may be performed on one or more device inventories, determined at least in part, by the configuration rule(s). Feature gap(s) for IT device(s) may be determined. IT device neutral user interface command(s) may be created. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105381 | DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL SWITCH CONFIGURATION AND STATE MANAGEMENT - Techniques are disclosed for pushing configuration changes of a distributed virtual switch from a management server to a plurality of host servers underlying the distributed virtual switch. The approach includes sending, in parallel, by the management server, a message to each of the plurality of host servers. The message specifies a final configuration state for one or more virtual ports emulated via virtualization layers of the host servers. The approach further includes determining, by each of the plurality of host servers, port state configuration changes to make to the virtual ports to achieve the final configuration state, and reconfiguring, by each of the plurality of host servers, their respective virtual ports, to match the final configuration state. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112249 | RAPID GATEWAY SWAP - Systems, software, and methods are provided to rapidly configured replacement gateways and other devices when needed. Configuration information may be received and stored in memory. The information may be sent to a first device or gateway. If the first device or gateway needs to be reconfigured, the information may be resent to the first device or gateway. If the first device or gateway fails, the information may be send to a second device or gateway to configure the second device for use in the system, thereby rapidly swapping the first device and second device. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112252 | DEPLOYMENT AND UPGRADE OF NETWORK DEVICES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method for deployment and upgrade of network devices in a network environment includes comparing configuration settings executing on a switch with settings in a configuration file downloaded to the switch from a central configuration server in the network, identifying a difference between the configuration settings executing on the switch and the settings in the configuration file, synchronizing the difference by updating the configuration file at the configuration server if a sync up operation is selected, and synchronizing the difference by updating the configuration settings executing on the switch if a sync down operation is selected. The sync up operation can comprise updating the configuration file in its entirety; updating a template derived output appended to the configuration file; updating template instance variables feeding into the configuration file; and updating a template used to generate the configuration file. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112262 | INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION OF CONNECTED DEVICES - A method, system, and computer program product for managing Internet-connected devices. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112264 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ALLOWING FLEXIBLE CHIP CONFIGURATION BY EXTERNAL ENTITY WHILE MAINTAINING SECURED BOOT ENVIRONMENT - A new approach is proposed that contemplates systems and methods to support flexible reconfiguration of a network chip by an external entity, such as a baseboard management controller (BMC), while maintaining a secured environment for the chip so that it can booted securely. Specifically, the network chip is configured to designate one or more of its networking ports to the BMC and allow the BMC to configure the designated networking ports without violating the secure areas of the network chip. To this end, the network chip is configured to allow the BMC to access a plurality of registers of the network chip via an Network Controller Sideband Interface (NC-SI) block of the network chip by issuing a plurality NC-SI compliant commands. By configuring the designated networking ports, the BMC is configured to establish a data path to a management software of a platform that includes the network chip though the designated networking ports. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112266 | DECISION SERVICE MANAGER - The disclosure generally describes computer-implemented methods, software, and systems for modeling and deploying decision services. One computer-implemented method includes creating a connection between a decision service manager and a managed system, establishing a signature of a decision service, developing, using at least one computer, the decision service based upon the established signature of the decision service, performing a deployment readiness check, transferring generated code implementing the decision service to the managed system upon a determination that the deployment readiness check was successful, inserting the generated code into the managed system, and retrieving a deployment status from the managed system. | 04-21-2016 |
20160127182 | CONFIGURATION RESOLUTION FOR TRANSITIVE DEPENDENCIES - A method including receiving on a server a request from a first provider to retrieve a configuration for a lookup order. The first provider can be configured to be called directly by an application such that the application has a direct dependency relationship with the first provider. The first provider can be configured to be called by the application through a second provider such that the application has a transitive dependency relationship with the first provider through the second provider. The request from the first provider can be received when the first provider is called by the application through one of the direct dependency relationship or the transitive dependency relationship. The method also can include determining the configuration for the lookup order using the server based at least in part on whether the call to the first provider by the application is through the direct dependency relationship or through the transitive dependency relationship. The method further can include providing the configuration for the lookup order to the first provider. The method additionally can include receiving first information at the application that is based at least in part on the configuration for the lookup order. The method further can include providing second information for at least a portion of a web page that is based at least in part on the first information. Other embodiments are provided. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127183 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, AND DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A device management apparatus includes a reception unit configured to receive a setting value of a setting item to be set on one or more devices, the setting value being contained in first setting information representing a range of values settable on a first device among the devices; a conversion unit configured to convert the setting value, based on second setting information representing a range of values settable on a second device among the devices, and the first setting information; and an application request unit configured to request the second device to apply the setting value after being converted by the conversion unit, to the second device. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127184 | Dynamic Configuration in Cloud Computing Environments - Virtual machines, virtualization servers, and other physical resources in a cloud computing environment may be dynamically configured based on the resource usage data for the virtual machines and resource capacity data for the physical resources in the cloud system. Based on an analysis of the virtual machine resource usage data and the resource capacity data of the virtualization servers and other physical resources in the cloud computing environment, each virtual machine may be matched to one of a plurality of virtualization servers, and the resources of the virtualization servers and other physical resources in the cloud may be reallocated and reconfigured to provide additional usage capacity to the virtual machines. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127506 | NETWORK CONTROL APPARATUS, NETWORK CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Efficient use of a virtual appliance corresponding to a dedicated appliance in a communication system will be accomplished. A network control apparatus according to the present invention is a network control apparatus that constructs a function of hardware equipment used in a communication network by using software, and includes: first means for deploying the software capable of executing the function of the hardware equipment in an information processing resource; and second means for instructing a network resource to identify communication data to be processed by the deployed software and to transfer the identified communication data to the information processing resource. | 05-05-2016 |
20160134476 | Method for controlling changes in a computer system - The present disclosure relates to a computer implemented method for controlling changes in at least a first and a second computer system, the first computer system comprising a first development server that is connected to a production server, wherein the production server comprises a first application having a first configuration, wherein the first configuration comprises at least one of a software and hardware configuration, wherein the first development server is configured to perform at least one of providing and modifying the first application at the first development server by generating a modified configuration from the first configuration, the second computer system comprising a second development server for upgrading the first application using the modified first application. The method comprises providing a central management module that is in communication with the first computer system and the second computer system; providing an input data interface; configuring the first computer system to communicate with the central management module via the input data interface; receiving at the central management module from the first computer sys-tem via the input data interface data indicative of a change in the first configuration, the change resulting in a second application having a second configuration, wherein the second configuration comprises at least one of a software and hardware configuration; processing by the central management module the received data for determining at least one component of the second computer system that are affected by the change; determining by the central management module using the determined components at least one update task for implementing the change in the second computer system. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134492 | FORWARD-BASED RESOURCE DELIVERY NETWORK MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES - A resource delivery network and method for distributing content in the network is disclosed herein. The network comprises a plurality of servers arranged in tiers and partitioned. Each server includes a resource store with a set of resources for distribution to a successive tier. Updates to each successive tier are provided by a pull-forward client on servers in the tier. This forward propagation mechanism maximizes resource availability at edge servers in the network. Resources transmitted to the edge tier servers may be transformed, combined, and rendered without taxing lower tier servers. Transformation and pre-rendering of data can be performed by low priority CPU tasks at each layer of the system. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142247 | LOCAL NETWORK AND METHOD OF UPDATING A DEVICE IN A LOCAL NETWORK - A method of updating at least two interconnected devices in a local network, a local network comprising at least two interconnected devices and a method of operating a remote management client and a device in this local network are provided. A resource location information of an update archive is communicated from a remote management client in the local network to the other devices in said network. The devices participating in the update communicate participation acknowledgement messages to the remote management client. The participating devices determine whether a next one of a pre-defined sequence of update statuses is reached. They notify the other participating devices that this update status has been reached and pause until all other participating devices have notified that they also have reached the same update status. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142253 | APPLICATION PLACEMENT THROUGH MULTIPLE ALLOCATION DOMAIN AGENTS AND FLEXIBLE CLOUD SCHEDULER FRAMEWORK - There are provided a method for operating a cloud computing infrastructure. In one embodiment, the method performs allocation domain modeling and provides a cloud scheduler framework that takes as input desired optimization objectives and the workload constraints and efficiently produces a placement solution that satisfies the constraints while optimizing the objectives in a way that adjusts itself depending on the objectives. As the objectives change, e.g., due to actions from system administrators or due to changes in business policies, the system optimizes itself accordingly and still produces efficient and optimized placement solutions. The method constructs an Allocation Domain (AD) that is a particular facet for allocating a logical entity to a physical entity. An AD is created using: variables, functional definitions (functions of variables), and a policy specification that includes a Boolean expression (of the functional definitions). | 05-19-2016 |
20160142254 | MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN COMPUTING NODES - Techniques are described for managing communications between multiple intercommunicating computing nodes, such as multiple virtual machine nodes hosted on one or more physical computing machines or systems. In some situations, users may specify groups of computing nodes and optionally associated access policies for use in the managing of the communications for those groups, such as by specifying which source nodes are allowed to transmit data to particular destinations nodes. In addition, determinations of whether initiated data transmissions from source nodes to destination nodes are authorized may be dynamically negotiated for and recorded for later use in automatically authorizing future such data transmissions without negotiation. This abstract is provided to comply with rules requiring an abstract, and it is submitted with the intention that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 05-19-2016 |
20160149755 | SYSTEM FOR UTILITY USAGE TRIGGERING ACTION - The present disclosure relates to using sensors and measurements from sensors to trigger actions within a network. Specifically, various techniques and systems are provided for measuring usage or measurements, using sensors, of utilities or other environmental factors, generating profiles based on the usage or measurements, and triggering actions within a network device based on the usage, measurements and profiles. Embodiments of the present invention may include, for example, compiling historical usage based on the use or measurements detected by a network device and generating a usage profile based on that use or measurements. The normal usage profile may be compared with the usage over a certain predetermined period of time to detect any abnormal use or measurements from the network device, and an action may be taken as a result of an abnormality. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149760 | MULTI-STAGE CONVERGENCE AND INTENT REVOCATION IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for facilitating multi-stage convergence and intent revocation in a network environment is provided and includes sending an intent support request for an intent to a plurality of targets in a network, receiving intent pre-commits from a portion of the plurality of targets and intent pre-aborts from a remaining portion of the plurality of targets, each intent pre-commit indicative of ability to support the intent, and each intent pre-abort indicative of inability to support the intent, determining whether the intent is to be added to the domain in view of potentially impacted intents, and instructing the plurality of targets to commit to the intent if the intent is to be added to the domain. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149761 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING UNIFIED CONFIGURATION INFORMATION TO DISPARATE SYSTEM SOFTWARE COMPONENTS - Techniques for maintaining configuration data for software components deployed on a computer network are disclosed. The techniques include a server on the computer network receiving configuration data values associated with the software components, committing the configuration data values to a data store, creating, from configuration data stored in the data store, configuration files for the software components with the configuration data value, and providing the configuration files to the software components. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156506 | MIGRATION OF PROFILES BETWEEN VIRTUAL CONNECT DOMAINS | 06-02-2016 |
20160156515 | MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND CLOUD SYSTEM | 06-02-2016 |
20160164722 | ZERO-DOWNTIME, REVERSIBLE, CLIENT-DRIVEN SERVICE MIGRATION - A computer system may provide zero-downtime, reversible, client-driven service migration to migrate a client from a current service to a new service. The computer system may configure the client to operate in a dual-write, old-read mode in which the client issues write requests to both the current service and the new service and issues read requests only to the current service. The computer system may configure the client to operate in a dual-write, new-read mode in which the client issues write requests to both the current service and the new service and issues read requests only to the new service. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164723 | TYPE-TO-TYPE ANALYSIS FOR CLOUD COMPUTING TECHNICAL COMPONENTS - Cloud computing has emerged as an extremely popular implementation option for a wide range of computing services. However, provisioning services into the cloud is an extremely difficult technical challenge. This is due in part to the regular emergence of new cloud service providers, as well as the routine changing and reconfiguration of the disparate computing platforms, services, assets, supported technical components, and other features offered by the service providers. An analysis architecture determines how to map a particular technical component into the execution environment of any particular service provider. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164729 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - There is provided an information processing apparatus including an acquisition control unit configured to acquire information on function extension from an external object, the information on the function extension including attribute information indicating a function of a device and connection information relating to a connection to the device, and a function control unit configured to extend a function of the information processing apparatus based on the acquired attribute information, connect to a device corresponding to the extended function based on the acquired connection information, and enable the extended function. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164730 | NETWORK SERVICE INTERFACE FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE APPLICATIONS - Utilizing a network service interface function within a machine-to-machine common service layer is presented herein. A method can comprise determining network configuration information for network devices coupled to a set of distributed remote devices; receiving a device request directed to a remote device of the set of distributed remote devices; determining, based on the network configuration information, a network interface for facilitating performance of the device request; and sending, via the network interface, command information corresponding to the device request directed to the remote device. In an example, in response to determining that a traffic load of a communication channel associated with the remote device satisfies a defined condition with respect to an increased loading of such channel, the method can comprise sending a message to request delay of the device request if the device request has been determined to be a non-priority request. | 06-09-2016 |
20160164733 | MULTIPLE CONFIGURATION ITEM STATUS VALUE ANALYSIS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, system and computer program product for configuration item (CI) status value analysis for multiple performance monitors. In one embodiment of the invention, a multi-CI analysis method can be provided. The method can include weighting different CI status values produced by different performance monitors for a single resource in a monitored computing system and displaying selected ones of the weighted different CI status values according to relevance determined by weight. In one aspect of the embodiment, weighting different CI status values produced by different performance monitors for a single resource in a monitored computing system can include locating the different CI status values for the single resource in a configuration management database (CMDB), identifying the different performance monitors producing the different CI status values in the CMDB and applying weights to the different CI status values according to CI status value characteristics. | 06-09-2016 |
20160173331 | DETERMINED CONFIGURATION UPDATE FOR EDGE COMPONENTS | 06-16-2016 |
20160173332 | Handling Connections Between Network Devices That Support Multiple Port Communication Modes | 06-16-2016 |
20160173339 | CONFIGURATION VALIDATION IN A MIXED NODE TOPOLOGY | 06-16-2016 |
20160182291 | CONTROLLING A MODALITY OF A DOCKEE IN A WIRELESS DOCKING SYSTEM | 06-23-2016 |
20160182292 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE | 06-23-2016 |
20160182293 | VLAN TAGGING IN A VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT | 06-23-2016 |
20160182295 | Multi-Protocol Storage Network I/O Devices and Methods | 06-23-2016 |
20160182316 | COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIA FOR DYNAMIC SERVICE DEPLOYMENT AND METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR UTILIZING SAME | 06-23-2016 |
20160183037 | Building Network Hub with Occupancy Awareness | 06-23-2016 |
20160191307 | Data Updating Method, Device for Vehicle Diagnosing Apparatus and Vehicle Diagnosing Apparatus - A method for vehicle diagnosing apparatus comprises: providing a diagnosing apparatus terminal which receives the latest data edition information of one or more data packets pushed to the diagnosing apparatus terminal; the diagnosing apparatus terminal comparing the latest data edition information of the data packets with the current data edition information of the data packets respectively so as to determine whether the latest data edition of each data packet is superior to the current data edition of this data packet; if there is any data packet whose latest data edition is superior to the current data edition, the diagnosing apparatus terminal prompting that there is an update for the data edition; the diagnosing apparatus terminal downloading the data packet for which there is an update; and the diagnosing apparatus terminal installing this data packet and replacing the current data edition information with the latest data edition information. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191308 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION SYSTEM - A networked system includes a network. A secondary device is coupled to the network. A primary device is coupled to the network and includes a key device connector. The primary device may detect that a key device that includes a plurality of configuration information is coupled to the key device connector. The primary device then retrieves first configuration information of the plurality of configuration information from the key device for the primary device and configures the primary device using the first configuration information. The primary device then discovers the secondary device through the network, retrieves second configuration information of the plurality of configuration information from the key device for the secondary device, and provides the second configuration information over the network to the secondary device to initiate configuration of the secondary device using the second configuration information. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191314 | MULTI-PORT SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION - A multi-port configuration system includes a network switch including a plurality of ports and a user device that is configured to couple to the network switch. Each of the plurality of ports is configured to operate in at least one of a plurality of modes. A congruent graphical representation of the network switch is displayed on the user device, and a selection of a group of ports of the plurality of ports is received. Based on the received selection of the group of ports, available configuration settings for the group of ports are displayed on the user device. A configuration settings selection, selected from the available configuration settings, for configuring the group of ports is received. The configuration settings selection is provided to the network switch to configure the group of ports. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191315 | AUTOMATIC RECONFIGURATION OF NETWORK DEVICES - A solution for automatic reconfiguration of network devices adapted to switch from the role of access point to the role of station and vice versa. In order to prepare a first network device for automatic configuration in the network, a profile of a second network device connected to said first network device via a network is received. The profile comprises access point credentials of the second network device. The received profile is compared with existing profiles stored in a memory of said first network device and is stored in said memory, if necessary. In case at a later time a role change of the first network device is determined, the stored profile is retrieved from the memory and used for connecting the first network device to the second network device. | 06-30-2016 |
20160195864 | AUTONOMOUS, DISTRIBUTED, RULE-BASED INTELLIGENCE | 07-07-2016 |
20160197771 | ENTERPRISE QUALITY ASSURANCE AND LAB MANAGEMENT TOOL | 07-07-2016 |
20160197882 | RULE SWAPPING IN A PACKET NETWORK | 07-07-2016 |
20160197985 | MULTI-CDN DIGITAL CONTENT STREAMING | 07-07-2016 |
20160204984 | Device Communication, Monitoring and Control Architecture and Method | 07-14-2016 |
20160205218 | MULTI-ADAPTER SUPPORT IN THE CLOUD | 07-14-2016 |
20160254955 | QUERY LATENCY OF A DNS SERVICE | 09-01-2016 |
20160380803 | RANKING COMPUTER MODULES - A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium may include instructions stored thereon for ranking multiple computer modules to reduce failure impacts. When executed by at least one processor, the instructions may be configured to cause a computing system implementing the multiple computer modules to at least associate the multiple computer modules with multiple services that rely on the multiple computer modules, at least one of the multiple services relying on more than one of the multiple computer modules, determine values of the multiple services, and rank the multiple computer modules based on the determined values of the multiple services with which the respective multiple computer modules are associated. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380808 | DYNAMICALLY MANAGING DIFFERENT VERSIONS OF A SERVICE - A management portal receives an input indicating that a management operation is to be performed on a service. The management portal dynamically hosts a management interface for performing the management operation on different versions of the service. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380816 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A DATA ACCESS SYSTEM - A data access configuration system includes, not limited to, a configuration tool, a configuration library, a plurality of configuration files, a data server and an acquisition engine. The configuration library is configured to communicate with the configuration tool. The configuration library includes, not limited to, a plurality of configuration Application Programming Interfaces (APIs). The plurality of configuration files are generated by the APIs. The data server includes, not limited to, a data server configuration module. The acquisition engine includes, not limited to, an acquisition engine configuration module. The acquisition engine is configured to communicate with at least one data source, the at least one data source is configured to communicate with a plurality of field devices to retrieve data. The configuration library is configured to manage the data server configuration module and the acquisition engine configuration module. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380817 | ASSESSING COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT CHANGES USING SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS - According to one embodiment of the present invention, a system analyzes an environment specification document that specifies a proposed configuration of a full-stack environment for a computing system and that describes infrastructure, middleware, and application elements. The system correlates the environment specification document with an environment instantiated on the computing system from the environment specification document. The system determines an impact of changes in the proposed configuration on the environment instantiated on the computing system, and configures the computing system in accordance with the proposed configuration based on the determined impact. Embodiments of the present invention further include a method and computer program product for analyzing an environment specification document in substantially the same manners described above. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380819 | CONFIGURING ACCELERATION COMPONENTS OVER A NETWORK - Aspects extend to methods, systems, and computer program products for (re)configuring acceleration components over a network. (Re)configuration can be implemented for any of a variety of reasons, including to address an error in functionality at the acceleration component or to update functionality at the acceleration component. During (re)configuration, connectivity can be maintained for any other functionality at the acceleration component untouched by the (re)configuration. Network (re)configuration of acceleration components facilitates management of acceleration components and accelerated services from a centralized service. Network (re)configuration of acceleration components also relieves host components from having to store (potentially diverse and numerous) image files. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381155 | DETERMINING A PHYSICAL LOCATION OF A DEVICE - Embodiments of the present disclosure disclose a method, an apparatus and a computer program product for determining a physical location of a device by obtaining a first address of a device; and determining, based on a first mapping between the first address of the device and a location identifier of a physical location, the physical location of the device. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237618 | STANDBY INSTANCES FOR AUTO-SCALING GROUPS | 08-17-2017 |
20170237619 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR COMMUNICATION NETWORK DEVICES | 08-17-2017 |
20170237634 | TRANSFORMATION OF NETWORK DATA AT REMOTE CAPTURE AGENTS | 08-17-2017 |
20170237828 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION CONTROL METHOD | 08-17-2017 |
20180026834 | AUTOMATICALLY, DYNAMICALLY GENERATING AUGMENTATION EXTENSIONS FOR NETWORK FEATURE AUTHORIZATION | 01-25-2018 |
20180026842 | APPLICATION CONTROLLER TO SUPPORT INCREMENTAL DEPLOYMENT | 01-25-2018 |
20180027093 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SDI SUPPORT FOR AUTOMATIC AND TRANSPARENT MIGRATION | 01-25-2018 |
20190149411 | VIRTUAL MACHINE SERVER-SIDE NETWORK ADAPTATION | 05-16-2019 |
20220141086 | COORDINATED MANAGEMENT OF IOT DEVICE POWER CONSUMPTION AND NETWORK CONGESTION - A system for coordinated management of Internet of Things (IoT) devices to minimize power consumption and network congestion is provided. A mobile device designated as local group management device (LGMD) identifies a group of IoT devices that are configured to access a network. The mobile device receives information regarding an upcoming event involving the group of IoT devices. The mobile device generates usage knowledge specifying the group of IoT devices, a location, and a time associated with the upcoming event. The mobile device receives configuration update data that are generated based on the usage knowledge for scheduling operations of the group IoT devices. The mobile device delivers the configuration update data to the group of IoT devices. | 05-05-2022 |